JP7471698B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game and executes a presentation based on the result of that determination.

In conventional gaming machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole and it is determined whether or not a special game will be executed, the special symbol is displayed variably on the special symbol display device, and then a special symbol showing the result of the determination is displayed stationary. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, a specified image display device displays a performance symbol variably in conjunction with the display of the special symbol variably, and as the special symbol is displayed stationary, the performance symbol is displayed stationary in a manner showing the result of the determination.

JP 2015-96091 A

However, conventional gaming machines have room for improvement in terms of making the presentation more entertaining.

Therefore, the object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment value of the presentation.

The present invention adopts the following configuration to solve the above problems.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means is capable of acquiring judgment information, executing a special game judgment as to whether or not a special game is to be executed based on the judgment information, and variably displaying identification information based on a result of the special game judgment, and as the variably displaying identification information, the main control means is capable of performing a cyclical variation a plurality of times and then displaying the identification information in a stationary state, and storing the judgment information before the special game judgment is performed in a reservation storage means as a reservation memory, and storing the variably displaying identification information in the reservation storage means. and when the predetermined command is received in the variable display of the identification information, the presentation control means is capable of executing a first variable presentation by a first presentation pattern and a second variable presentation by a second presentation pattern having a display position different from that of the first presentation pattern, and during the variable display of the identification information, is capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold memory and a corresponding display corresponding to the judgment information for which the special game judgment has been made, and in the stopped display of the identification information, a first stop display for stopping and displaying the first presentation pattern and a second stop display for stopping and displaying the second presentation pattern. In the first variation performance, a start action performance is executed to operate the first performance symbol in a predetermined manner, and after the start action performance, a variation display performance is executed to vary and display the first performance symbol, and after the variation display performance, a pre-stop action performance is executed to operate the first performance symbol in a specific manner, and after the pre-stop action performance, the first performance symbol can be temporarily stopped, and after the temporary stop of the first performance symbol, the first stop display and the second stop display are performed at a timing after the end timing of the last cycle variation in the variation display of the identification information and before the stop time of the identification information has elapsed. and a stop display , and when executing the first stop display, the corresponding display can be made invisible for a first time, and in the second variable performance, after the second performance pattern is variable-displayed, the second stop display can be executed without temporarily stopping the second performance pattern, and during the execution of the first variable performance and the second variable performance , in response to receiving the next specified command , the start operation performance can be executed without performing the first stop display and the second variable performance can be executed without performing the second stop display , and the corresponding display can be made invisible for a second time different from the first time .

The present invention makes it possible to improve the entertainment value of the presentation.

Front view of pachinko game machine 1 FIG. 1 is a plan view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1. A perspective view of the rear side of the gaming machine 1. An exploded perspective view of the game board 5. Overall block diagram of gaming machine 1 1 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control unit 100. Flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control unit 100 Flowchart showing the setting change process of the main control unit 100 Flowchart showing RWM clear processing of the main control unit 100 Flowchart showing the setting confirmation process of the main control unit 100 Flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control unit 100 Detailed flow chart of the start hole detection switch process in step S200 of FIG. 11 A detailed flowchart showing the special symbol processing of step S300 in FIG. A flowchart showing details of the special chart variation pattern setting process in step S408 of FIG. A detailed flowchart showing the process during stoppage in step S416 of FIG. 13. A detailed flowchart showing the big win game process of step S500 of FIG. A detailed flowchart showing the game state setting process in step S519 of FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot symbol determination table used to determine a jackpot symbol in the jackpot determination process in step S407 of FIG. 13. Flowchart showing performance display data setting processing in the main control unit 100 A diagram showing the display information of the information display device in each game zone. A diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal game state. A diagram showing an example of a special pattern variation table used when selecting a variation pattern of a special pattern in a probability variation game state. A flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process performed in the performance control unit 130. A flowchart showing an example of a command receiving process in step E10 of FIG. 23. A flowchart showing an example of the start winning command processing in step E111 of FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an icon change scenario table; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a start-time effect production scenario table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a zone production scenario table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a chance effect scenario table; A flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation start command process in step E113 of FIG. 24. 1 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process performed in the image/audio control unit 140. 1 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process performed in the lamp control unit 150. A timing chart and example of how to initialize various drive sources while changing settings. A timing chart and a performance example showing the initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for clearing the RWM. A timing chart and example of the initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation. A diagram showing a comparison of the operation of various drive sources at various operation timings. A timing chart and example of the initial operation of various drive sources after changing settings. A timing chart and a performance example showing the initial operation of various drive sources after clearing the RWM. A timing chart and example of the initial operation of various drive sources after checking the settings. A diagram to explain the cycle fluctuation of special symbols FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in the presentation mode A set in the normal gaming state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in a presentation mode D that is set during a probability variation game state. FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of the effects from the start of the variation of the first special symbol to its stop when a big win is determined to be a miss in the normal game state. FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of the effects from the start of the variation of the first special symbol to its stop when a big win is determined to be a miss in the normal game state. FIG. 45 shows an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 43 and FIG. 44. FIG. 45 shows an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 43 and FIG. 44. FIG. 45 shows an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 43 and FIG. 44. FIG. 45 shows an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 43 and FIG. 44. FIG. 45 shows an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 43 and FIG. 44. FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a performance when a volume adjustment operation is performed during the variable display and stop display of special symbols. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the first image display device 70 at each timing in FIG. 50 . FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the first image display device 70 at each timing in FIG. 50 . FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a performance when an SPSP reach performance is performed. FIG. 54 is a continuation of the timing chart of FIG. 53, showing a timing chart in the case where a miss is notified as a result of the SPSP reach presentation. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 53 and FIG. 54. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 53 and FIG. 54. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 53 and FIG. 54. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 53 and FIG. 54. FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a big win is announced as a result of the SPSP reach effect. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a big win is announced as a result of the SPSP reach presentation; A diagram showing an example of a timing chart when a pre-reading continuous performance is performed two changes before the pre-reading target change. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 61 , and is an example of a timing chart from one change before the pre-read target change to the middle of the pre-read target change. FIG. 63 shows an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 61 and FIG. 62. FIG. 63 shows an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 61 and FIG. 62. FIG. 63 shows an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 61 and FIG. 62. FIG. 63 shows an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 61 and FIG. 62. FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the performance control unit 130 cannot receive commands from the main control unit 100 during the variable display of special symbols. FIG. 68 shows an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 67. FIG. 68 shows an example of the performance at each timing of FIG. 67. A diagram showing an example of a performance in which the leftmost first hold icon HA3 is erased when one extra first hold icon HA is displayed. A diagram showing an example of a performance in which the rightmost first hold icon HA1 is erased when one extra first hold icon HA is displayed. FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the power supply is interrupted during the variable display of the first special symbol. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a display at each timing of FIG. 72; FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a display at each timing of FIG. 72; FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a display at each timing of FIG. 72;

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 3. Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, Figure 2 is a plan view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and Figure 3 is a perspective view of the rear side of the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a gaming board mounting frame 3 that is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 that is rotatably supported relative to the gaming board mounting frame 3, and a gaming board 5 that has a gaming area 5a formed therein through which gaming balls (gaming media) flow down.

The outer frame 2 is made up of a rectangular base frame 2a with a central opening in the front-rear direction, to which a decorative plate 2b is attached at the lower front. The outer frame 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement arcade via fastening members (e.g., nails, fasteners, etc.).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door relative to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, making it possible to perform maintenance on various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door relative to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-to-rear direction is formed in the approximate center near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or acrylic plate) is attached to cover the opening 8 from the rear, making it possible to see the play area 5a through this opening 8 and transparent member 8a.

A sound output device 9 consisting of a speaker and a frame lighting device 10 having multiple decorative LEDs are provided above the opening 8 of the glass frame 4. In addition, below the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are an upper tray 11 for storing multiple game balls, such as game balls paid out from a payout device 95 described below based on the establishment of a grant condition, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit in the upper tray 11 and flow into an overflow ball flow path described below, and a launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch the game balls.

The audio output device 9 outputs background music, sound effects, etc. to create a sound effect (music, voice, etc.). In addition, multiple frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and create a lighting effect by changing the direction of light irradiation and the color of light emitted by each lamp (LED). In addition, the frame lighting device 10 is equipped with an alarm LED 10a that is controlled to light up/blink when the glass frame 4 opens or a payout abnormality occurs in which game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

The upper tray 11 is for storing game balls to be supplied to the launching device 26. The game balls stored in the upper tray 11 are guided to the launching device 26 and launched into the game area 5a with a ball-hitting force that corresponds to the rotation angle of the launching handle 15.

In addition, the central front portion of the upper tray 11 is provided with a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1 or FIG. 2) that function as input devices for performing decision and selection operations related to various performances, which will be described later.

The effect button device 16 is equipped with an effect button 17 capable of performing operations such as decision operations (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the effect button 17, a button drive device 17b equipped with a button drive motor for changing the effect button 17 between a normal state and a protruding state positioned higher than the normal state and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 between the normal state and a vibration state in which the effect button 17 vibrates in a predetermined manner, and an effect button light-emitting LED 17c for changing the effect button 17 between an off state and a lit state in which the effect button 17 emits light in a predetermined manner. The player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1 using the effect button device 16.

The selection button device 18 is equipped with a cross key 19 (upper button 191A, left button 192A, lower button 193A, right button 194A) that can be used to perform operations such as selection, and a cross key detection switch 19a (see Figure 5) for detecting the operation of the cross key 19, allowing the player to input specified information into the gaming machine 1.

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed to receive game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guide them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 5) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect the occurrence of a full tray error in which the lower tray 12 is full of game balls, and while the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full, the payout of game balls by the payout device 95, which will be described later, is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a launch handle 15 rotatably mounted on the base 14, a touch sensor (not shown) that detects whether the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, and a launch volume consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. When the touch sensor detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, the launch device 26 (see FIG. 5) is configured to be able to launch the game ball.

The game board mounting frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting portion (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 (see FIG. 5) for launching game balls toward the game area 5a, a locking mechanism 27 for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an opening detection switch for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4.

The game board mounting section is formed in a recessed chamber shape that opens to the front at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. At the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting section, an opening that opens in the front-to-rear direction is provided, and through this opening, various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the rear of the gaming machine 1.

The launch device 26 includes a launch member for launching the game balls and a launch solenoid for driving the launch member. The launch device 26 launches the game balls toward the game area 5a by operating the launch solenoid with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 of the launch operation device 13.

The locking mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

Curved inner and outer rails 35 and 36 are provided near the outer edge of the game board 5, and the area surrounded by the inner and outer rails 35 and 36 forms a game area 5a into which game balls can flow. A launched ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner and outer rails 35 and 36, which guides game balls launched by the launching device 26 to the upstream part of the game area 5a. An outlet 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a to guide the game balls that have flowed down outside the game area (to the collection part of the game board mounting frame 3).

A decorative frame 40 is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a, which is a frame-shaped area known as a center case that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior. This decorative frame 40 divides the play area 5a into a left play area where game balls launched with a first launch force flow down, and a right play area where game balls launched with a second launch force that is stronger than the first launch force flow down, and the left play area and the right play area are connected below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to guide the game balls flowing down the left side game area into the interior of the decorative frame 40, and a stage section 42 is provided on the bottom of the decorative frame 40 to roll the game balls introduced into the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41 and cause them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

Three general winning openings 43 through which game balls can always enter are provided at intervals at the lower left side of the decorative frame 40, and one general winning opening 43 through which game balls can always enter is provided at the lower right side of the decorative frame 40. When a game ball that has entered this general winning opening 43 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 5) (awarding condition is met), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., five balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarding prize value).

Below the stage section 42, a first start hole 45 (a start winning area of a first special symbol) is provided, where a game ball can always win (enter). When a game ball wins (enters) the first start hole 45, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot game) is executed is granted (special symbol determination information described later is stored). In addition, when a game ball wins (enters) the first start hole 45, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded prize value). Inside the first start hole 45, a first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 5) is provided for detecting a game ball that has won (entered) the first start hole 45.

A variable starter 46 is provided in the game area 5a diagonally below and to the right of the first starter hole 45. The variable starter 46 is configured to be able to change from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter (slot in), to an open state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter, based on a winning result in a winning determination (auxiliary game determination) described below.

Specifically, the variable starting section 46 has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1) to form a flow path for the game ball, and is equipped with a second starting hole opening/closing member 48 that can move in the front-rear direction, a second starting hole 47 (starting winning area of the second special pattern) that opens upward directly below the second starting hole opening/closing member 48, a second starting hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) that detects a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting hole 47, and a second starting hole opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 5) that converts the second starting hole 47 to a closed state by moving the second starting hole opening/closing member 48 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the second starting hole 47 to an open state by moving the second starting hole opening/closing member 48 backward (winning allowance position).

When a game ball enters the second start hole 47 that is opened during the auxiliary game described below and is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) (awarding conditions are met), the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not to play a special game (jackpot game) is granted (special chart determination information described below is stored). In addition, when a game ball enters the second start hole 47 and is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded prize value).

The right side of the game area 5a is provided with a normal game gate 44 (normal game start area) through which game balls can always pass. When a game ball that has passed through the normal game gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a, no prize balls are awarded, but the player is given the right to make an auxiliary game judgment (win judgment) to determine whether or not to execute a winning game (normal game judgment information, described later, is stored).

Below the normal gate 44 is a first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) that can change from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the ball) to an open state in which it is possible or easy to win, based on a jackpot determination.

The first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (forming part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b), and is equipped with a first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move in the front-back direction, a first large winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51, a first large winning opening detection switch 50a that detects game balls that have won (entered) the first large winning opening 50, and a first large winning opening opening opening solenoid 51b (see Figure 5) that converts the first large winning opening 50 to a closed state by moving the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 forward (winning restriction position) and changes the first large winning opening 50 to an open state by moving the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 backward (winning permitted position).

Then, during a jackpot game described below, when the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward and the first large prize opening 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state, game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the first large prize opening opening opening member 51 and game balls that have reached the first large prize opening 50 can enter the first large prize opening 50. When a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening 50 is detected by the first large prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

Below the first variable winning section 49 is a second variable winning section 55 (second variable winning device) that can change from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win (enter the winning hole) to an open state in which it is possible or easy to win, based on a jackpot determination.

The second variable prize winning section 55 (second variable prize winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) to become a flow path for game balls (forming part of the bottom surface of the first downstream flow path 91e), and is equipped with a second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 that can move in the front-back direction, a second large prize winning opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57, a second large prize winning opening detection switch 56a that detects game balls that have won (entered) the second large prize winning opening 56, and a second large prize winning opening opening opening solenoid 57b (see Figure 5) that converts the second large prize winning opening 56 to a closed state by moving the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 forward (winning restriction position) and changes the second large prize winning opening 56 to an open state by moving the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 backward (winning permitted position).

When the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 moves backward during a jackpot game and the second large prize opening 56 is converted from a closed state to an open state, game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 and game balls that have reached the second large prize opening 56 can enter the second large prize opening 56. When a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 56 is detected by the second large prize opening detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

In addition, game balls shot into the left side game area will win one of the three general winning openings 43 or the first starting opening 45 located below the decorative frame 40, or will flow into the out opening 39. Therefore, game balls shot into the left side game area will not win (pass through) the general winning gate 44, general winning opening 43, first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), or second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56) located in the right side game area.

In addition, a game ball launched into the right-side game area passes through the normal gate 44 and the like via the upstream flow path 91a, and enters one of the general winning openings 43, the variable starting section 46 (second starting opening 47), the first variable winning opening 49 (first large winning opening 50), or the second variable winning opening 55 (second large winning opening 56) provided in the right-side game area, or flows into the outlet 39. Therefore, a game ball launched into the right-side game area will not enter the general winning opening 43 or the first starting opening 45 provided in the left-side game area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is an out-ball flow path that receives and collects out-balls, which are game balls that have won in the general winning port 43, the first starting port 45, the second starting port 47, the first large winning port 50, and the second large winning port 56, as well as game balls that have flowed into the outlet 39, and allows them to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see Figure 5) is provided at the most downstream part of the out-ball flow path. Game balls detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a are discharged from the outlet on the back side of the game machine 1 to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment).

A main information display 59 is provided outside the play area 5a. The main information display 59 includes a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62. The main information display 59 also includes a first special symbol reserved display 63, a second special symbol reserved display 64, and a normal symbol reserved display 65. The main information display 59 also includes a round number display 66, a right hit display 67, and a status confirmation display 68.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a first special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the first starting hole 45, the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a second special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the second starting hole 47, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a hit determination for a normal symbol, which is made based on the passage (entry) of a game ball into the normal gate 44.

The jackpot determination is to obtain special symbol determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for jackpot pattern determination, random number value for reach determination, random number value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) when the game ball enters (enters) the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, and to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the obtained special symbol determination information.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of a plurality of (specifically, eight) LEDs. When a jackpot determination is made based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol changes and is displayed stationary after a predetermined time has elapsed. The result of the jackpot determination is reported by the stopping mode of this first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol display 60, the lighting mode of the LED changes (moving lighting) at a predetermined cycle (32 ms), thereby displaying the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is displayed stationary by lighting each LED of the first special symbol display 60 in a mode that reports the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot mode or miss mode). In addition, when a jackpot determination is made based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 47, the second special symbol changes and is displayed stationary after a predetermined time has elapsed. The result of the jackpot determination is reported by the stopping mode of this second special symbol. Specifically, the second special pattern display 61 changes the lighting state of the LEDs (moving lighting) at a predetermined cycle (32 ms) to display the variable second special pattern, and each LED of the second special pattern display 61 lights up in a manner that notifies the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot state or miss state) to display the stationary second special pattern.

In this embodiment, a "jackpot" refers to a state in which a jackpot game (special game) is determined to be executed in the jackpot determination. A "jackpot game" refers to a round game in which the jackpot winning holes (first jackpot winning hole 50, second jackpot winning hole 56) are converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner, which is played a predetermined number of times (e.g., four times, ten times, etc.) with intervals in between, and refers to a state that is advantageous for the player in that it is easy for the player to win prize balls. The period of a "jackpot game" may refer to the time when the opening is started by stopping and displaying the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a jackpot manner, and the time when the round game ends and the ending is completed.

The maximum number of times the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) can be opened and the maximum opening time for each round of play are preset, but if a certain number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the large prize openings (balls enter the large prize openings) even before the maximum number of times or maximum opening time are reached, one round of play ends. In this embodiment, it is possible to play one of several types of large prize games (special games) that differ in the degree of advantage to the player.

The auxiliary game judgment corresponds to obtaining normal game judgment information (random number value for winning judgment, random number value for normal pattern judgment, random number value for normal pattern variation pattern judgment, etc.) based on the passage (entry) of the game ball into the normal game gate 44, and judging whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the obtained normal game judgment information. When the auxiliary game judgment is made, the normal pattern display 62 displays the variation of the normal pattern, and after a predetermined time has passed, a stationary display of the normal pattern is made to notify the judgment result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of three LEDs, which flash at a specified interval or sequence when displaying a variable normal symbol. When a normal symbol is displayed stationary, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the auxiliary game judgment (win or miss). The normal symbol display 62 also changes (moving lights) the lighting mode of the LEDs at the same cycle (32 ms) as the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61.

In this embodiment, "win" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the auxiliary game judgment that an auxiliary game (a winning game) will be executed. "Auxiliary game" refers to a state in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The maximum number of times the second start hole 47 can be opened and the maximum opening time during the auxiliary game (winning game) are preset, but the auxiliary game (winning game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the second start hole 47 even before the maximum number of times the balls can be opened and the maximum opening time are reached. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is in a state in which the conditions for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are likely to be met. In this embodiment, multiple types of auxiliary games (winning games) with different degrees of advantage to the player may be provided.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is composed of two LEDs, and is intended to display the first reserved number (U1), which is the number of special symbol determination information (first reserved) stored when a game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first reserved items. Note that up to a maximum of four first reserved items can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four.

The second special symbol reserved indicator 64 is composed of two LEDs, and is intended to display the second reserved number (U2), which is the number of special symbol determination information (second reserved) stored when a game ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 47, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of second reserved. Note that, although a maximum of four second reserved items can be stored, the number may be less than or more than four, or no second reserved items may be stored.

The normal symbol reserve indicator 65 is composed of two LEDs, and is intended to display the number of reserved normal symbols, which is the number of normal symbol judgment information (reserved normal symbols) stored when a game ball enters (passes through) the normal symbol gate 44, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of reserved normal symbols. Note that up to four reserved normal symbols can be stored, but the number may be less or more than four, or no reserved normal symbols may be stored.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can be configured with a seven-segment LED. For example, if the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, numbers such as "3" or "7" can be displayed as static numbers, and if a jackpot is determined to be a miss, a static "-" can be displayed, and during the varying display, the light can be turned off and the "-" can be displayed alternately.

The round number indicator 66 is made up of six LEDs and is intended to display the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. At the start of a jackpot game, the LEDs start to light up in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds, the LEDs continue to light up during the jackpot game, and the LEDs turn off at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the jackpot game has four rounds, only the leftmost LED lights up, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all LEDs light up.

The right-hit indicator 67 is made up of a single LED and is used to display a right-hit display that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-side game area (so-called right hit). The LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game), during the probability game state described below, and during the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED, and is intended to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later is set. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the LED goes out. In this way, since the status confirmation indicator 68 is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily check whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. The status confirmation indicator 68 may be provided in any location, as long as it is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same display mode (illuminated display) is used regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the display may be made so that it is possible to recognize which mode is set. For example, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated in the setting change mode and flashing in the setting confirmation mode, or vice versa.

In addition, in this embodiment, a status confirmation indicator 68 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may be used in combination with other indicators. For example, in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol indicator 60, the second special symbol indicator 61, the first special symbol reserved indicator 63, the second special symbol reserved indicator 64, the round number indicator 66, the right hit indicator 67, etc. are turned off, so one or more LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

A sub-information display 80 is provided inside the play area 5a. The sub-information display 80 includes a sub-first change indicator 81, a sub-second change indicator 82, a sub-first hold indicator 83, a sub-second hold indicator 84, a sub-regular change indicator 85, a sub-regular hold indicator 86, and a sub-right-hit indicator 87. Note that the sub-information display 80 does not include an indicator such as the above-mentioned status confirmation indicator 68 that indicates that the mode is set to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, but an indicator corresponding to these may be provided.

The sub-first variable indicator 81 is for displaying (informing) whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed variable, and the sub-second variable indicator 82 is for displaying (informing) whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed variable, and each is composed of one LED. When the variable display of the corresponding special symbol starts, the LED flashes at a predetermined cycle (for example, on for 0.25 seconds → off for 0.25 seconds), and when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary, it displays a stationary display (off or on).

The result of the special symbol jackpot determination may be notified by the sub-first variable display 81 or the sub-second variable display 82. In this case, the LED may be lit in the case of a jackpot and turned off in the case of a miss.

The sub-first reserved indicator 83 is for displaying the reserved number (first reserved number) for the jackpot judgment of the first special symbol, and the sub-second reserved indicator 84 is for displaying the reserved number (second reserved number) for the jackpot judgment of the second special symbol, and each is composed of two LEDs. When the reserved number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the reserved number is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the reserved number is "2", the left and right LEDs are turned on, when the reserved number is "3", the left LED blinks at a predetermined cycle (0.25 seconds on → 0.25 seconds off) and the right LED is turned on, and when the reserved number is "4", the left and right LEDs blink at a predetermined cycle (0.25 seconds on → 0.25 seconds off).

The sub-regular symbol variation display 85 is for displaying (informing) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the regular symbol starts, the LED blinks (varies) at a specified interval. Then, when the regular symbol is displayed in a static state, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a win, and goes out in the case of a loss) is displayed in a static state.

In addition, the sub-regular pattern change indicator 85 may be configured to flash while displaying the normal pattern change, and to light up or go out when the normal pattern is displayed as stopped, so that it is possible to know whether or not the normal pattern change is being displayed.

The sub-regular map reservation indicator 86 is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories (regular map reservation number) and is composed of two LEDs. When the regular map reservation number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the regular map reservation number is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the regular map reservation number is "2", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned on, when the regular map reservation number is "3", the left LED flashes at a predetermined cycle and the right LED is turned on, and when the regular map reservation number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash at a predetermined cycle.

The sub right-hit indicator 87 is intended to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area of the play area 5a (so-called right hit), and is composed of one LED. The LED lights up during a jackpot state (special play), a guaranteed bonus play state, or a time-saving play state, and is turned off in other play states.

A first image display device 70 is provided at the back of the performance space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40. A second image display device 71, which has a smaller display area than the first image display device 70, is provided at the bottom of the performance space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70. The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 may be liquid crystal displays or organic EL displays. A movable performance device 73 for executing action performances is provided at the top of the performance space 40a.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 display various effects in accordance with the progress of the game. The effects include customer waiting demo effects that are performed when the variable display of the special symbols is not being executed, variable effects by the effect symbols 701 that are performed when the variable display of the special symbols is being executed (such as the start action effect, variable display effect, and pre-stop action effect described below), variable display (update variation) of the small symbols 702 that are performed when the variable display of the special symbols is being executed, and big win effects that are executed during the execution of a big win game.

The second image display device 71 can also perform a moving effect by moving using a movable device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, motor, etc. while the first image display device 70 is performing a moving effect.

Specifically, the second image display device 71 performs a movement effect by moving up and down (rising and descending) between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a performance position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. Note that the movement direction of the second image display device 71 may be left and right or forward and backward, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the performance button 17.

The display unit (display area) of the first image display device 70 displays three performance symbols 701 (from left to right, sometimes called the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) and a small symbol 702. The performance symbols 701 and small symbols 702 are performance symbols that change in response to the change in the special symbol and stop in response to the stop of the special symbol. Depending on the stopping state of the performance symbols 701 and small symbols 702, it is notified whether or not a jackpot has been won.

The first image display device 70 also displays a hold icon HA and the icon TI. The hold icon HA is an icon indicating the hold of the right to determine a jackpot related to the first special symbol, and up to four icons are displayed. The icon TI is an icon indicating the current fluctuation of the special symbol. The images displayed on the first image display device 70 will be described in detail later.

The movable performance device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and can perform a motion performance by making the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b perform a predetermined motion while the variable display of the performance pattern 701 executed by the first image display device 70 is being executed. In addition, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board lighting device 74 having multiple decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined manner while the motion performance is being executed.

Specifically, the first movable member 73a moves (rising and descending) between a standby position (first position) located toward the end (upper) of the first image display device 70 and a performance position (second position) located toward the center (lower) of the first image display device 70. The second movable member 73b moves between a standby position (first position) that covers a portion of the front of the first movable member 73a and a performance position where it retreats from the front of the first movable member 73a.

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there are provided a payout device 95 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball loans), a game ball storage section 96 for storing game balls supplied from island equipment and the like and supplying them to the payout device 95, a main control device 110A incorporating a main control section 100, a payout control device 120A incorporating a payout control section 120, a performance control device 130A incorporating a performance control section 130, a power supply device 160A incorporating a power supply board 160, and a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collection device such as a hall computer).

In addition, a cover member 23 with an opening and closing door is provided, which opens and closes in the left and right direction on one side around a rotation axis set on the left or right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire performance control device from the rear, and the performance control device 130A is provided with a changeover switch 22, which is covered by the cover member 23, for switching adjustment modes related to adjusting the volume of the performance sound output from the audio output device 9 and the light intensity of the display devices (first image display device, second image display device) and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74).

On the front side of the main control device 110A, there are mounted the main control unit 100 for controlling the game, an RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal to clear the memory contents of the main RAM 100c of the main control unit 100 or to update a setting value (probability of determining a jackpot) which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game, a setting key switch 112a for inputting a signal to switch to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode (described later) by operating the setting key, an information display 113 (see Figure 5) for displaying performance information and setting values that allow the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic components.

The information display 113 is composed of four seven-segment displays (113a to 113d) aligned horizontally. The two seven-segment displays from the left, 113a and 113b, form an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two seven-segment displays from the right, 113c and 113d, form a numeric segment for displaying numeric information indicating setting values and numerical values of the performance information.

(Game Board Configuration)
Next, the configuration of the game board 5 in the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5.

The game board 5 is composed of a board surface unit 500 that forms the front side of the game board 5, and a back surface unit 501 that forms the rear side of the game board 5.

The board unit 500 has a play area 5a formed on its surface by the inner rail 35 and outer rail 36 described above, and a play board 500a made of transparent resin with a window that allows visibility to the rear.

Then, inside the play area 5a of the play board 500a, the above-mentioned decorative frame 40, general winning opening 43, general map gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), first starting opening 45 (first starting opening detection switch 45a), variable starting section 46 (second starting opening 47, second starting opening detection switch 47a, second starting opening opening opening solenoid 48b), first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50, first large winning opening detection switch 50a, first large winning opening opening opening member 51, first large winning opening opening opening solenoid 51b), and second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56, second large winning opening detection switch 56a, second large winning opening opening opening member 57, second large winning opening opening opening solenoid 57b) are provided, and outside the play area 5a, the above-mentioned main information display 59 is provided.

In addition, a stamp plate 502, on which a stamp bearing unique identification information for the gaming machine 1 is affixed, is provided at the lower right of the gaming board 500a in a state that allows it to rotate left and right around the left side as an axis, and at each of the four corners of the gaming board 500a, fixing devices 503a are provided for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back unit 501.

The fixture 503a located at the bottom right of the game board 500a is normally covered by the stamp plate 502, but is exposed when the right side of the stamp plate is pinched with the fingertips and rotated to the left.

The fixing device 503a has an operating section located on the front side of the game board 500a, a shaft section extending from the operating section to the back side of the game board 500a, and an engagement piece provided at the tip of the shaft section and located on the back side of the game board 500a. By operating the operating section, the engagement piece changes between a first state (non-engaged position) and a second state (engaged position).

The rear unit 501 has a unit base 501a formed in a recessed chamber with an open front and a window that allows the rear to be seen. The second image display device 71, the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b), etc. are provided inside the recessed chamber, and the first image display device 70 is provided behind the window. In addition, the performance control device 130A is provided behind the first image display device 70, and the main control device 110A is provided below the performance control device 130A.

At each of the four corners of the unit base 501a, there is a fixed receiving portion 503b that engages with the engaging piece of the fixing device 503a described above to detachably attach the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501.

When attaching the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the certificate plate 502 is opened and the engagement pieces of the four fixing devices 503a are in the first state (non-engaged position). Then, the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN leading from the various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided in the panel unit 500 is passed through the through hole HA provided on the right side of the back unit 501. After that, when the back surface of the panel unit 500 and the front surface of the back unit 501 are abutted against each other, the engagement pieces of the fixing devices 503a enter the interior of the fixed receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the operating parts of the four fixing devices 503a are rotated to place the engaging pieces in the second state (engaged posture), the engaging pieces engage with the fixed receiving parts 503b, and the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 are fixed together. After that, the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN leading from the various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A, and the certificate plate 502 is closed, completing the installation of the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501.

On the other hand, when removing the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A is pulled out to open the certificate plate 502. After that, the operating parts of the four fixing devices 503a are turned to set the engagement pieces to the first state, and the engagement between the engagement pieces and the fixed receiving parts 503b is released.

In this state, when the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 are separated, the engagement pieces of the four fasteners 503a retract from the fixed receiving portions 503b. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the removal of the panel unit 500 and the back unit 501 is completed.

In this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the game board 5 (a set of the game board unit 500 and the back unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the game board unit 500 from the viewpoint of reusing the parts of the game machine 1. Therefore, although the attachment and detachment of the game board unit 500 and the back unit 501 when the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described here, it is also possible to replace only the game board unit 500 from the game board 5 attached to the game board mounting frame 3.

Specifically, when the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via a locking mechanism, and the locking mechanism prevents the board surface unit 500 from being fixed, making it possible to replace only the board surface unit 500. Therefore, when replacing only the board surface unit 500, it is recommended to open the glass frame 4 and then perform the removal work described above.

(Overall block diagram of the gaming machine)
Next, a control means for controlling the progress of a game will be described with reference to the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in Fig. 5. Fig. 5 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control unit 100 that controls the overall progress of the game (basic operations), a payout control unit 120 that controls the payout of game balls based on receiving a payout control command from the main control unit 100, a presentation control device 130A (presentation control unit 130) that controls presentation related to the game based on receiving a presentation control command from the main control unit 100, and a power supply board 160 that supplies power to the payout control unit 120 and the presentation control device 130A.

Note that the communication between the main control unit 100 and the payout control unit 120 is configured to enable bidirectional transmission and reception of commands, while the communication between the main control unit 100 and the performance control device 130A (performance control unit 130) is configured to enable unidirectional transmission of commands from the main control unit 100 to the performance control device 130A (performance control unit 130).

The main control unit 100 includes a main CPU 100a that performs calculation processing, a main ROM 100b that stores game control programs and the like, a main RAM 100c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 100 are connected to the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the gate detection switch 44a, the first starting hole detection switch 45a, the second starting hole detection switch 47a, the second starting hole opening/closing solenoid 48b, the first large winning hole detection switch 50a, the first large winning hole opening/closing solenoid 51b, the second large winning hole detection switch 56a, the second large winning hole opening/closing solenoid 57b, the magnetic detection sensor 57a, the radio wave detection sensor 58a, the out ball detection switch 39a, the main information display 59, the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113. The input/output ports of the main control unit 100 are also connected to the game information output terminal board 90, the payout control unit 120, and the performance control unit 130.

The main CPU 100a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main ROM 100b, and performs calculation processing related to the game while using the main RAM 100c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing in response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, displays, etc.), control processing for sending and receiving various control commands, and control processing for sending game information to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) via the game information output terminal board 90.

The "game information" includes a start port winning signal output each time a game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, a pattern determination signal output each time the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern ends, a jackpot signal output throughout the jackpot game, an open signal output throughout the round game (opening of the jackpot opening), a signal output throughout the probability bonus game state or time-limited game state described below, and a security signal output when a situation that poses a problem (threat) to the security of the gaming machine 1 occurs (RWM clear, error, etc.).

The memory area of the main ROM 100b is arranged in order of a game ROM area in which programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area in which programs and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored.

The game ROM area contains a game program area in which programs related to the game progress are stored, and a game data area in which data related to the game progress is stored.

The information ROM area contains an information program area in which programs related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored, and an information data area in which data related to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 100c contains a game RWM area that is used as a work area when executing game programs, and an information RWM area that is used as a work area when executing information programs.

The gaming RWM area contains a gaming work area that the gaming program uses as work, and a gaming stack area for temporarily saving data being processed by the gaming program.

The game work area is arranged in the following order: a setting value area for storing setting values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum, described below) for judging abnormalities in the RWM area, and a game data area for storing game data that changes as the game progresses.

The information RWM area contains an information work area that information programs use as work, and an information stack area for temporarily saving data being processed by information programs.

The information work area includes a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1, and an error information area for storing information related to various error judgments.

The following explains the relationship between the game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) that performs processing based on the game program and the information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) that performs processing based on the information program.

When the main CPU 100a performs processing based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area, and refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as work. Also, when the main CPU 100a performs processing based on an information program, it basically refers to the information data area, and refers to and updates the contents of the information RWM area while using the information RWM area as work.

However, in processing based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referenced. Also, in processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referenced.

When processing based on the information program is performed, the flag register is saved to the game RWM area during processing based on the game program, and then the information program is called to execute processing based on the information program, and the flag register is restored from the game RWM area immediately after processing based on the information program ends and returns to the game program.

In addition, immediately after the information program starts, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved to the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, all registers used in the game program are saved to the information RWM area, and immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are restored from the information RWM area and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing this, data used by the game program can be protected when performing processing based on the information program, and no inconvenience occurs when returning from the information program to the game program.

The payout control unit 120 drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls. The payout control unit 120 also drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 120 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The input/output port of the payout control unit 120 is connected to an open detection switch, a full detection switch, a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls being paid out from the payout device 95, a payout motor for paying out game balls from the payout device 95, and a ball presence detection switch for detecting that game balls are stored in the game ball storage unit 96.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs calculation processing related to the payout of game balls while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for paying out game balls from the payout device 95 in response to a payout control command from the main control unit 100, control processing for sending a command based on the result of the calculation processing to the main control unit 100, etc.

The payout control unit 120 is connected to a ball feeding solenoid, a touch sensor, a firing volume, a firing solenoid, etc.

When the payout control unit 120 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 through a touch signal input from the touch sensor, it allows current to flow to the ball feed solenoid and the launch solenoid, and when it detects a change in the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 through a detection signal from the launch volume, it drives the ball feed solenoid and drives the launch solenoid to launch game balls (99.9 balls/min) with a launch strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15.

The performance control device 130A includes a performance control unit 130 that performs overall control of the progress of the performance based on the performance control commands received from the main control unit 100, an image and audio control unit 140 that performs control processing of image display and audio output based on the performance control commands received from the performance control unit 130, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing of various light-emitting components (LEDs, etc.) and various driving sources (motors, etc.) based on the performance control commands received from the performance control unit 130.

The performance control unit 130 includes a sub-CPU 130a that performs calculation processing, a sub-ROM 130b that stores the performance control program, a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, an RTC 130d that keeps track of the date and time, and input/output ports.

The performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output port of the performance control unit 130.

The sub-CPU 130a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the performance control program stored in the sub-ROM 130b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the sub-RAM 130c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for determining the performance mode of the variable performance, control processing for sending a performance control command based on the determination result to the image and sound control unit 140, control processing in response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.), etc.

The image and audio control unit 140 receives commands from the performance control unit 130 and controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a specified image, and controls the audio output device 9 to output a specified voice or sound.

The image and audio control unit 140 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs overall control of image display and audio output based on reception of a performance control command from the performance control unit 130, an overall ROM 141b in which an overall control program is stored, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, a VDP 145 that generates images to be output to the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on reception of a display control command (display list) from the overall CPU 141a, a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on reception of an audio control command from the overall CPU 141a, and an audio ROM in which audio data and the like are stored.

The general CPU 141a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the general control program stored in the general ROM 141b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the general RAM 141c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for generating display control commands (display lists) that specify the performance images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and sending them to the VDP 145, and control processing for generating audio control commands that specify the performance sounds to be output from the audio output device 9 and sending them to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The image and audio control unit 140 is also connected to the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, and the audio output device 9. The image and audio control unit 140 (VDP 145) generates images at a predetermined frame time (e.g., 1/30 seconds) interval and outputs the generated images to the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. As a result, images including, for example, a performance pattern 701, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. Furthermore, sound is output by outputting an audio signal generated by the image and audio control unit 140 (audio control unit 148) to the audio output device 9 (speaker).

The performance control device 130A is also connected to a changeover switch 22. The changeover switch 22 is a switch for setting the volume value of the sound (performance sound such as background music or sound effects) output from the sound output device 9. For example, the volume value is set to five levels from "1" to "5" depending on the operation of the changeover switch 22. The changeover switch 22 is also used as a switch for setting the light intensity value of the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74. The light intensity value is set to five levels from "1" to "5" depending on the operation of the changeover switch 22.

In addition, the performance control device 130A is connected to the performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores the lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 are connected to the frame lighting device 10, the movable performance device 73, the board lighting device 74, the sub-information display 80, the performance button drive device 17b (performance button drive motor, performance button vibration motor), and the performance button light-emitting LED 17c.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for the frame lighting device 10, the performance button driving device 17b, the performance button light-emitting LED 17c, the movable performance device 73, and the board lighting device 74.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power supply (operating power supply) required for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control unit 100, payout control unit 120, performance control device 130A, and various electronic components) (corresponding to a power supply supply means). The power supply board 160 is equipped with a power interruption detection circuit 162 that detects whether the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (a power outage has occurred) and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 100 based on the drop in power supply voltage (occurrence of a power outage), and a backup power supply circuit 163 that supplies backup power to the main control unit 100 in the event of a power interruption (power outage).

The power supply board 160 also has a power switch that can be operated by an arcade staff member to switch between an ON state that supplies main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control unit 100, payout control unit 120, performance control device 130A, and various electronic components) and an OFF state that stops the supply. When the power switch is turned ON, the supply of main power begins and the gaming machine 1 starts operating. Note that the supply of backup power to the main control unit 100 is maintained even when the power switch is turned OFF.

The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control unit 100 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, and stops outputting the voltage drop detection signal when the power supply voltage exceeds the predetermined value while the voltage drop detection signal is being output.

The backup power circuit 163 is equipped with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and in the event of a power outage (blackout), the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is supplied to the main RAM 100c of the main control unit 100. This allows the contents stored in the main RAM 100c to be retained even in the event of a power outage (blackout), and after recovery from the power outage (blackout), the game control state can be restored to the state before the power outage (blackout).

Although backup power is not supplied to the payout control unit 120 and the performance control unit 130, backup power may be supplied to the payout control unit 120 and the performance control unit 130 so that the contents stored in the payout RAM 121c and the sub-RAM 130c are retained even in the event of a power outage. Backup power may also be supplied to only one of the payout control unit 120 and the performance control unit 130.

(Explanation of game state)
Here, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. In this embodiment, there are a low probability state in which the probability of being determined as a jackpot is a first probability, and a high probability state in which the probability of being determined as a jackpot is a second probability higher than the first probability, as gaming states. Specifically, in a jackpot determination table used in the jackpot determination described later, a jackpot random number value that is determined as a jackpot according to the gaming state is predetermined. In the jackpot determination, if the random number value for jackpot determination matches the jackpot random number value stored in the jackpot determination table, it is determined as a jackpot, and if it does not match, it is determined as a miss. The high probability state is an advantageous state for the player because the probability of being determined as a jackpot is higher than the low probability state.

The first probability and the second probability differ for each set value. For example, the set value can be set from "1" to "4", and when the set value is "1", the first probability may be 1/300 and the second probability may be 1/60. When the set value is "2", the first probability may be 1/290 and the second probability may be 1/58, when the set value is "3", the first probability may be 1/280 and the second probability may be 1/56, and when the set value is "4", the first probability may be 1/270 and the second probability may be 1/54. The set value may be set within a range from "1" to "6", for example.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a non-auxiliary gaming state and an auxiliary gaming state. The auxiliary gaming state is a state in which it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the second start hole 47 than in the non-auxiliary gaming state. Specifically, in the "normal gaming state (non-auxiliary gaming state)," the probability of a win being determined in the auxiliary gaming determination, which is performed on the condition that the gaming ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44, is set low at 1/200, the fluctuation time (average) of the normal symbol is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second start hole 47 in the event of a win is set to 0.18 seconds.

On the other hand, in the "auxiliary game state", the probability of a win being determined in the auxiliary game judgment is set high at 199/200, the fluctuation time (average) of the normal pattern is set to about 3 seconds, and the opening time of the second start hole 47 when a win is determined is set to 6 seconds. As a result, it is easier for game balls to enter the second start hole 47 compared to the normal game state, the consumption (reduction) of game balls is suppressed, and the jackpot judgment based on the entry into the second start hole 47 is repeatedly executed in a short period of time, making it a more advantageous state for the player than the normal game state.

The "auxiliary game state" is set to be more favorable than the "normal game state" in terms of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start hole 47, and the probability of being determined to be a win, but it may be set to be more favorable in terms of only one of the average change time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second start hole 47, and the probability of being determined to be a win.

In the following, the low probability state and non-auxiliary game state will be referred to as the "normal game state", the high probability state and auxiliary game state will be referred to as the "high probability game state", and the low probability state and auxiliary game state will be referred to as the "time-saving game state". The gaming machine 1 is initially set to the normal game state, and when a jackpot game is played, it transitions to the high probability game state or the time-saving game state.

(Flowchart of the main control unit)
Next, the progress of the game on the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of the main control unit)
The main processing (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Fig. 6 is a flow chart showing the main processing in the main control unit 100. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the main CPU 100a.

First, the main CPU 100a performs an initial setting process in step S10. Specifically, the process includes preparation for starting game control, setting change process for changing the setting value based on a setting change operation, RWM clear process for initializing a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 100c based on an RWM clear operation, setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value based on a setting confirmation operation, and drive source initial operation process for initializing various drive sources (second start opening opening solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b, etc.) provided in the board unit 500. Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S51, the main CPU 100a updates the initial random number value for determining a jackpot, the initial random number value for determining a jackpot pattern, the initial random number value for determining a win, and the initial random number value for determining a normal pattern.

In step S52, the main CPU 100a determines whether a voltage drop detection signal indicating a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, a voltage drop from 24 volts to less than 18 volts) has been input from the power interruption detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160. If a voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S51, and if a voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 100a determines whether the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 milliseconds). If the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for the predetermined period, it is assumed that a complete power outage has occurred and the process proceeds to step S54. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input for the predetermined period, it is assumed that a momentary power outage has occurred, in which the voltage of the power supply drops for just a moment, and the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 100a sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and in step S55, sends a power cutoff designation command to the payout control unit 120 to notify it that the power cutoff process has begun. In response to this, the payout control unit 120 receives the power cutoff designation command and sends a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c to be paid out.

In step S56, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a remaining payout number designation command has been received. If a remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57. If a remaining payout number designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 100a determines whether the waiting time for receiving the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the waiting time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56. If the waiting time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58, assuming that normal communication with the payout control unit 120 is not possible.

In step S58, the main CPU 100a saves the payout number in a payout counter set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c. Specifically, if a remaining payout number designation command has been received, the remaining payout number specified by the remaining payout number designation command is saved, and if a remaining payout number designation command has not been received, "0" is saved as the remaining payout number. The remaining payout number saved here is referenced in the timer interrupt payout control process described below, and after the power is restored, a payout number designation command corresponding to the remaining payout number is sent to the payout control unit 120.

In step S59, the main CPU 100a clears the output port. This initializes the output state of the output port and stops the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motors, solenoids).

In step S60, the main CPU 100a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 100c and saves it in a specified area of the gaming RWM area. By doing this, it becomes possible to perform an abnormality determination of the data in the gaming RWM area using the checksum the next time the power is turned on.

In step S61, the main CPU 100a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 100c has been backed up (power has been restored) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c, and in step S62, prohibits RWM access and waits thereafter until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 begins, the initial setting process is performed, but when the supply of operating power resumes following a momentary power outage (voltage drop to less than 18 volts), the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if a setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, or RWM clear operation is being performed due to some factor when a momentary power outage occurs, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process will not be executed, so the gaming machine will not perform unintended operations, and it is possible to ensure the reliability of the gaming machine.

(Initial setting process of main control unit)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 7. Fig. 7 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control unit 100.

First, the main CPU 100a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as setting built-in registers in step S12, and waits for other control units to start in step S13. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control unit 120 and performance control unit 130 to start up so that no commands from the main control unit 100 are missed.

In step S14, the main CPU 100a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 100c, and in step S15, transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control unit 120. This causes the payout control unit 120 to carry out processing to permit the launch device 26 to launch game balls.

In step S16, the main CPU 100a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored has been saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c. If the backup flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S17 assuming that power has been restored, and if the backup flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S18 assuming that power has been turned on for the first time or that power has been restored irregularly.

In step S17, the main CPU 100a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 100c and clears the backup flag saved in the gaming RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 100a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are ON. If a setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19 to transition to setting change mode, and if a setting change operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S20.

The main CPU 100a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process is performed to change (update) the setting value, which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game (the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination). The setting change process will be described in detail later. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S25.

In step S20, the main CPU 100a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), processing proceeds to step S21; if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), processing proceeds to step S22.

If the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that this is the first power-on or an irregular power recovery, and the checksum is determined to be abnormal, and processing proceeds to step S22.

In step S21, the main CPU 100a determines whether the setting value in the setting value (during play) area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (during play) area is within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S23, and if it is determined that the setting value in the setting value (during play) area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S22.

In step S22, the main CPU 100a performs an irrecoverable error process (game program). Specifically, it displays error information "E" indicating an irrecoverable error on the information display 113, sends an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control unit 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, then sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interruption, clears the output port, and then outputs an irrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an irrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the performance control unit 130 performs a process to execute an irrecoverable error notification indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred.

An "irrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (there is no transition to game control), and it cannot be released unless a setting change process is performed. Therefore, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the error will not be released even if the power switch on the power supply board 160 is turned OFF and then turned ON without a setting change operation; it is necessary to turn the power switch ON while performing a setting change operation. Note that during an irrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from the various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Irrecoverable error notification" refers to displaying an irrecoverable error screen ("This is an irrecoverable error. Please change the settings.") on the image display device to make the user aware that an irrecoverable error has occurred, or turning on all of the frame lighting devices 10 and board lighting devices 74 in a specified light color (e.g. red) until the power is turned off, or outputting an irrecoverable error sound ("This is an irrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred until the power is turned off.

In step S23, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If an RWM clear operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S24 to perform RWM clearing, and if an RWM clear operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S26.

The main CPU 100a performs an RWM clear process (game program) in step S24. Specifically, it performs a process to initialize the game control state (initialize everything other than the set value area of the game RWM area) based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a. After the RWM clear process, the main CPU 100a performs the process of step S25. The details of the RWM clear process will be described later.

In step S25, the main CPU 100a sends a power-on command to the payout control unit 120 and the presentation control unit 130, indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, the normal game state), and proceeds to step S31. As a result, the presentation control unit 130 performs processing to execute a power-on notification indicating that the game control state has been initialized.

The "power-on notification" refers to displaying the initial screen (background image and initial performance pattern "123") on the first image display device 70 when the power is turned on to let the player know that the game control state has been initialized, turning on the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 in a predetermined light color (e.g. white) for a predetermined period (e.g. 60 seconds), and outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period (e.g. 30 seconds) indicating that the RWM area has been initialized. Note that in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, a display notifying the player that the RWM area has been cleared may be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71.

In step S26, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a is ON. If a setting confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S27 to transition to setting confirmation mode, and if a setting confirmation operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S28 to return the game control state to the state before the power was turned off.

In step S27, the main CPU 100a performs a setting confirmation process (game program). Specifically, it performs a process to display the setting values saved in the setting value (during play) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113. The setting confirmation process will be described in detail later.

In step S28, the main CPU 100a sets the RWM area for when power is restored, such as clearing (clearing to 0) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c. This returns (restores) the game progress state (control state) to the state before the power was cut off, making it possible to resume play from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S29, the main CPU 100a transmits a power restoration command to the presentation control unit 130, which indicates that the game control state has been restored and that the game state was in before the power outage. This causes the presentation control unit 130 to perform processing to end setting confirmation notifications and the like and to execute a power restoration notification indicating that the game control state has returned to the state it was in before the power outage.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration image on the first image display device 70 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to notify the player that the game control state has returned to the state before the power was cut off, turning on all of the frame lighting devices 10 and board lighting devices 74 in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), or outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to indicate that power has been restored (from a power outage).

In step S30, the main CPU 100a sends other commands (such as a command indicating the first reserved number U1 and a command indicating the second reserved number U2, which will be described later) to the performance control unit 130. This allows the performance control unit 130 to grasp the number of reserved special figures, and performs processing to display the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70, etc.

In step S31, the main CPU 100a transmits a setting value designation command to the performance control unit 130. This allows the performance control unit 130 to grasp the current setting value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the performance control unit 130 before a power-on command or a power-restoration command is transmitted. The setting value designation command may also be transmitted each time the display of the special pattern begins, or each time a jackpot game begins.

In step S32, the main CPU 100a starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S33, it starts controlling the progress of the game (timer interrupt of the main control unit 100) by allowing all interrupts, and ends this initial setting process.

In other words, from when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the machine is in a pre-start state before game progress control begins, and after the initial setting process is completed, the machine is in a playable state in which game progress control is performed.

In this way, multiple conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation, making it difficult to change settings, clear the RWM, or confirm settings, which makes it possible to suppress fraudulent activity and improve the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, by having more conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation than for the RWM clear operation or the setting check operation, it is possible to increase security for the event in which fraudulent activity is most likely to occur (setting changes), and to effectively prevent fraudulent activity.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal (including when the backup flag has not been saved), an unrecoverable error process is executed to stop the game from progressing, preventing the gaming machine from performing unexpected operations that cause trouble for gaming facilities and players, and improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, if the value in the setting value (during play) area is not within the appropriate range, in other words, if the previous power outage may have occurred while the settings were being changed, an unrecoverable error process is executed to stop play even if the checksum is normal. This prevents play from progressing with a setting value that the gaming facility did not intend, making it possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, when the settings are being changed (in setting change mode) or confirmed (in setting confirmation mode), it is possible to know that the settings are being changed on the front (front side) of the gaming machine 1 by checking the status confirmation display 68, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74, and it is possible to know that the settings are being changed on the back (rear side) by checking the information display 113. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front side) or the back (rear side) of the gaming machine 1.

Note that the conditions for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 is in the ON state. By doing so, the number of conditions increases, making it possible to suppress fraudulent activities and further improve the security of the gaming machine.

If the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S20, an unrecoverable error process is executed. However, at the point when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the initial value "1" may be saved in the setting value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c, and the process may proceed to step S24.

In addition, the power-on command and power-restore command are transmitted together with information indicating the current game status, but after transmitting the power-on command or power-restore command, a game status designation command indicating the current game status may also be transmitted.

In addition, when a power outage occurs or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but it is also possible to calculate the checksum of the entire RWM area, or to calculate the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area separately, and transition to unrecoverable error processing if either checksum is abnormal.

(Main control unit setting change process)
The setting change process (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 8. Fig. 8 is a flow chart showing the setting change process of the main control unit 100.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 100a performs processing to output a setting change signal (security signal). Specifically, it starts outputting a setting change signal (security signal) indicating that a setting change is in progress from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Note that the setting change signal (security signal) continues to be output while the setting is being changed, and even after the setting change is completed, it continues to be output for 200 ms before terminating the output.

In step S19-2, a status confirmation display indicating that a setting change is being made is displayed on the status confirmation display 68. Specifically, one LED on the status confirmation display 68 is turned on. This allows the gaming store staff to know that a setting change is being made by checking the status confirmation display 68.

In step S19-3, the main CPU 100a sends a setting change command to the performance control unit 130. This causes the performance control unit 130 to perform processing to execute a setting change notification to notify the user that the setting value is being changed.

A "setting change notification" refers to displaying a setting change screen on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71 to indicate that the setting value is being changed, or to lighting the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 in a specified light color (e.g., white) throughout the setting change. A setting change notification sound ("setting change in progress") indicating that the setting is being changed may be output from the audio output device 9. This allows game staff to know that the setting is being changed by checking the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, or the audio output device 9.

In step S19-4, the main CPU 100a acquires a setting value from the setting value area, and in the following step S19-5, it determines whether the setting value in the acquired setting value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the acquired setting value is within the appropriate range, it proceeds to step S19-7, and if it is determined that the acquired setting value is not within the appropriate range, it changes the acquired setting value to "1" in step S19-6.

In step S19-7, the main CPU 100a displays the current setting value on the information display 113. Specifically, the acquired setting value (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. This allows the gaming store staff to know the setting value before the change by checking the information display 113.

In step S19-8, the main CPU 100a determines whether a setting value update operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from an OFF state to an ON state. If a setting value update operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19-9. If a setting value update operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S19-12.

The main CPU 100a updates the acquired setting value by +1 in step S19-9, and performs setting value correction processing in step S19-10. Specifically, if the updated setting value is "5" which is outside the appropriate range (1 to 4), the main CPU 100a performs processing to correct the setting value to "1".

In step S19-11, the main CPU 100a displays the current setting value on the information display 113. Specifically, the updated acquired setting value (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one of the 7-segment LEDs on the information display 113. This allows the gaming store staff to know the setting value before it is confirmed by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (game program) in step S19-12. Specifically, it performs a process for initializing the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are to be operated by the main control unit 100 as the game progresses until the setting change mode ends. Details of the initial operation of the various drive sources during the setting change mode will be described later.

In step S19-13, the main CPU 100a determines whether a setting value confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a has changed from an ON state to an OFF state. If a setting value confirmation operation has been performed, the setting value is assumed to have been confirmed (setting change mode is terminated) and processing proceeds to step S19-14. If a setting value confirmation operation has not been performed, the setting value is assumed to be updated and processing proceeds to step S19-8.

In step S19-14, the main CPU 100a saves the updated acquired setting value in the setting value area, in step S19-15 ends the display of the setting value on the information display 113, and in step S19-16 ends the display on the status confirmation display 68.

In step S19-17, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears to 0) all areas of the game RWM area in the main RAM 110c except for the setting value area. This initializes the game progress state to the initial state (the state when the gaming machine 1 was shipped), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM was cleared is not carried over.

In step S19-18, the main CPU 110a performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, it performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM has been cleared from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. If another security signal is being output from the security signal terminal, it starts outputting the RWM clear signal (security signal) after the output period of the currently output security signal has ended.

In step S19-19, the main CPU 110a performs processing to stop the initial operation of various drive sources as the setting change mode ends with the setting value confirmation operation, and then ends this setting change process.

In this way, even if the setting value is not within the appropriate range, the initial value is set as the setting value, which prevents an indefinite value from being set and causing the gaming machine to perform unexpected operations, thereby preventing inconvenience to gaming facilities and players, and making it possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, when the setting is being changed (in setting change mode), the gaming store staff can know that the setting is being changed by checking the status confirmation display 68, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74 on the front (front side) of the gaming machine 1, and can know that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back (rear side). In other words, it is possible to know whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (front side) or the back (rear side) of the gaming machine 1.

In the above description, the setting value confirmation operation is defined as the setting key switch 112a changing from ON to OFF, but it may also be defined as the RWM clear switch 111a changing from OFF to ON, or a dedicated switch changing from OFF to ON, or a signal from the touch sensor 15a may also be input to the main control unit 100 so that the touch sensor 15a changes from OFF to ON, or a detection switch (such as the general winning port detection switch 43a) provided at a specific winning port (including the starting port) changes from OFF to ON, or an open detection switch changing from OFF to ON.

In addition, a setting change command is sent when the setting change process starts, and a power-on command is sent after the setting change process ends, but it is also possible to send a setting change start command instead of the setting change command, and a setting change end command instead of the power-on command. In this case, the setting change end command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or after the setting change process ends.

(RWM clear processing of main control unit)
The RWM clear process (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 9. Fig. 9 is a flow chart showing the RWM clear process of the main control unit 100.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a sends an RWM clear preparation command to the performance control unit 130 and transitions to the RWM clear preparation mode. This causes the performance control unit to perform processing to notify the user of the RWM clear preparation.

The "RWM clear preparation notification" is a notification that displays a clear preparation screen on the first image display device 70 to make the user aware that preparation for RWM clear is in progress, and outputs an audio notification from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period of time saying "Please press the RWM clear switch again."

The main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (game program) in step S24-2. Specifically, it performs a process for initializing the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are to be operated by the main control unit 100 as the game progresses until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. Details regarding the initial operation of the various drive sources during the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If an RWM clear approval operation has been performed, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S24-4, and if an RWM clear approval operation has not been performed, it returns to step S24-2.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 100a initializes (clears to 0) the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c except for the setting value area. This initializes the game progress state to the initial state (the state when the gaming machine 1 was shipped), and data (other than the setting values) in the game RWM area before the RWM was cleared is not carried over.

In step S24-5, the main CPU 100a performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, it performs processing to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that an RWM clear has been performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. If another security signal is being output from the security signal terminal, it starts outputting the RWM clear signal (security signal) after the output period of the currently output security signal has ended.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 100a ends the initial operations of the various drive sources, ends the current RWM clear process, and ends the RWM clear preparation mode.

Note that the RWM clear preparation command is sent when the RWM clear process starts, and the power-on command is sent after the RWM clear process ends, but the RWM clear command may be sent instead of (or in addition to) the power-on command. In this case, the RWM clear command may be sent at the end of the RWM clear process, or after the RWM clear process ends.

(Main control unit setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation process (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 10. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process of the main control unit 100.

First, in step S27-1, the main CPU 100a performs processing to output a setting confirmation signal (security signal). Specifically, it starts outputting a setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that setting confirmation is in progress from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Note that the setting confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output while the setting confirmation is in progress, and even after the setting confirmation is completed, it continues to be output for 200 ms before terminating the output.

In step S27-2, the main CPU 100a displays a status indicator on the status indicator 68 indicating that a setting change is in progress. Specifically, one LED on the status indicator 68 is turned on. This allows the gaming store staff to know that a setting check is in progress by checking the status indicator 68.

In step S27-3, the main CPU 100a sends a setting confirmation command to the performance control unit 130. This causes the performance control unit 130 to perform processing to execute a setting confirmation notification to notify the user that a setting confirmation is being performed.

A "setting confirmation notification" is when a setting confirmation screen is displayed on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71 to indicate that the setting is being confirmed, or when the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 74 is fully lit in a specified light color (e.g., white) during the setting confirmation. In addition, a setting confirmation notification sound ("Confirming setting values") indicating that the setting is being confirmed may be output from the audio output device 9. This allows the gaming store staff to know that the setting is being confirmed by checking the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, or the audio output device 9.

In step S27-4, the main CPU 100a displays the current setting value on the information display 113. Specifically, it references the setting value in the setting value (during play) area and displays a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the setting value on one of the 7-segment LEDs on the information display 113. This allows game store staff to know the current setting value by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a executes a drive source initial operation process (game program) in step S27-5. Specifically, it performs a process for initializing the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are to be operated by the main control unit 100 as the game progresses until the setting confirmation mode ends. Details regarding the initial operation of the various drive sources during the setting confirmation mode will be described later.

The main CPU 100a determines in step S27-5 whether or not a confirmation end operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from an ON state to an OFF state. If a confirmation end operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S28-7, and if a confirmation end operation has not been performed, the process of step S28-5 is repeated.

In step S27-7, the main CPU 100a ends the display of the setting values on the information display 113, and in step S27-8, ends the display on the status confirmation display 68. Then, in step S27-9, the main CPU 100a performs processing to stop the initial operations of the various drive sources, ends this setting confirmation process, and ends the setting confirmation mode.

Note that a setting check command is sent when the setting check process starts, and a power recovery command is sent after the setting check process ends. However, a setting check start command may be sent instead of the setting check command, and a setting check end command may be sent instead of (or in addition to) the power recovery command. In this case, the setting check end command may be sent at the end of the setting check process, or after the setting check process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting change signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the unrecoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. In this way, many types of signals can be output even with a limited number of signal terminals, making it possible to improve the convenience of the gaming machine.

In addition, from the start of power supply until the game is ready to play (pre-start state) and progress control of the game (timer interrupt of the main control unit 100) is performed, the presence or absence of signal input from input devices other than the RWM clear switch 111a and setting key switch 112a (out ball detection switch 39a, general winning hole detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first start hole detection switch 45a, second start hole detection switch 47a, first large winning hole detection switch 50a, second large winning hole detection switch 56a, magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a) is not monitored.

In other words, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, even if a game ball enters any of the winning holes (including the start hole), the winning is invalidated and the game ball is not paid out. Also, even if a game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, the winning is invalidated, the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 do not display the variation of the special symbol, and the big win game is not executed. Also, even if a game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, the passage is invalidated, the normal symbol display 62 does not display the variation of the normal symbol, and the auxiliary game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to imagine that a player will play before the game progress control is started, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

In addition, in the pre-start state before game progress control begins, even if a situation occurs in which various errors may occur, no error notification is performed. This makes it possible to avoid performing unnecessary processing before game progress control begins, a situation in which it is difficult to imagine that fraudulent activity will occur, and to reduce the processing load.

In addition, the setting change signal, RWM clear signal, setting confirmation signal, and unrecoverable error signal may be output from separate output terminals rather than from a common security signal terminal.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control unit)
The timer interrupt process (game program and information program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 11. Fig. 11 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process in the main control unit 100.

This timer interrupt process is executed after the main processing initialization process is completed, by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generating circuit provided in the main control unit 100, and controls the progress of the game.

First, when the timer interrupt process starts, the main CPU 100a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area and performs time control processing (game program). Specifically, it performs processing to update various timer counters such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric devices.

In step S100, the main CPU 100a performs a random number update process (game program). Specifically, it updates the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a jackpot pattern, the random number value for determining a special pattern variation pattern, the random number value for determining a win, the random number value for determining a normal pattern, and the random number value for determining a normal pattern variation pattern. Specifically, it performs a process of adding +1 to each random number value and the random number counter to update them. Note that if the incremented random number counter value exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (if the random number counter has completed one revolution), the random number counter is reset to 0, and if the random number counter has returned to the initial value for the revolution, the corresponding initial random number value is set as the new initial value for the revolution and the random number value is updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 100a performs start hole detection switch processing (game program). Specifically, it determines whether there has been an input to the first start hole detection switch 45a or the second start hole detection switch 47a, and if there has been an input, it performs processing to set predetermined data. Details of the start hole detection switch processing will be described later.

In step S300, the main CPU 100a performs special symbol processing (game program). Specifically, it performs processes such as judging the special symbol determination information acquired based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47, and controlling the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Details of the special symbol processing will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs gate detection switch processing (game program) in step S400. Specifically, it determines whether there has been an input to the gate detection switch 44a, and if there has been an input, it acquires and stores regular map determination information (random number value for winning determination, random number value for regular pattern determination, random number value for regular map fluctuation pattern determination). The gaming machine 1 can reserve up to four regular map determination information, and if the number of currently reserved regular map determination information is less than four, it acquires new regular map determination information.

In step S410, the main CPU 100a performs normal symbol processing (game program). The main CPU 100a performs processes such as judging the normal symbol judgment information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 44, and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol. Specifically, when the normal symbol is not being displayed, the main CPU 100a performs an auxiliary game judgment to judge whether or not there is a win based on the normal symbol judgment information acquired in step S400, sets the normal symbol variation time based on the judgment result, and starts the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 62. In addition, when the normal symbol is being displayed, it judges whether or not the variation time has elapsed, and if the variation time has elapsed, stops and displays the normal symbol according to the result of the auxiliary game judgment. In the auxiliary game state, the main CPU 100a judges a win with a higher probability in the auxiliary game judgment than in the normal game state.

The types of winning and losing normal symbols determined as a result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol processing remain the same regardless of the setting value. This prevents the game from becoming too complicated, allowing players to play with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratios of various winning normal symbols and the selection ratios of various losing normal symbols, which are determined as a result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol processing, are fixed and do not change depending on the setting value. By doing this, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

In step S500, the main CPU 100a executes the jackpot game process (game program). Specifically, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination in the special symbol process in step S300 and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed in which the first jackpot opening 50 or the second jackpot opening 56 is opened or closed. The details of the jackpot game process will be described later.

The main CPU 100a executes auxiliary game processing (game program) in step S600. Specifically, when the auxiliary game determination in the normal symbol processing in step S410 determines a win and causes the normal symbol display 62 to stop display a winning symbol, the auxiliary game is executed to open and close the second start hole 47. This opens the second start hole 47. Note that in the auxiliary game state, the second start hole 47 is opened for a longer period of time than in the normal game state.

In step S700, the main CPU 100a performs a payout control process (game program). Specifically, based on the detection of input by various switches (general winning opening detection switch 43a, first large winning opening detection switch 50a, second large winning opening detection switch 56a, first start opening detection switch 45a, second start opening detection switch 47a), the main CPU 100a refers to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 100c, and performs processing to send payout number designation commands corresponding to the various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first start opening 45, second start opening 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) to the payout control unit 120. This causes the payout control unit 120 to execute processing to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

In step S800, the main CPU 100a performs an abnormality determination process (game program). Specifically, it determines whether various errors have occurred (illegal winning errors such as a game ball winning the second start port 47 when not in auxiliary play or a game ball winning the large winning port when not in special play, an abnormal winning error in which the number of game balls winning the various winning ports does not match the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow, a magnetic error in which the magnetic detection sensor 57a detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time, a radio wave error in which the radio wave detection sensor 58a detects abnormal radio waves for a predetermined period of time, a door opening error in which the opening detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an operation error in which the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a is operated while the game progress control is being performed), and performs processing to transmit an error designation command corresponding to the error that has occurred to the performance control unit 130. As a result, the performance control unit 130 executes processing to notify the error.

In step S810, the main CPU 100a performs data creation processing (game program). Specifically, the main CPU 100a performs processing to create data such as external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, start opening/closing data output to the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, large prize opening opening/closing data output to the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b and the second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 57b, special pattern display data output to the first special pattern display 60 and the second special pattern display 61, normal pattern display data output to the normal pattern display 62, special pattern reserved display data output to the first special pattern reserved display 63 and the second special pattern reserved display 64, and normal pattern reserved display data output to the normal pattern reserved display 65.

In step S820, the main CPU 100a performs output control processing (game program). Specifically, it performs port output processing to output signals such as external information data, start gate opening/closing data, and large prize gate opening/closing data created in step S810, display output processing to output signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reserved display data, and normal symbol reserved display data, and performs processing to send a payout status confirmation designation command to the payout control unit 120 to check the payout status of the payout control unit 120, and to send a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning port to the payout control unit 120 by referring to the prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) described later. As a result, the payout control unit 120 executes control to pay out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100. In addition, the main CPU 100a transmits various commands to the performance control unit 130 to execute the set performance.

Next, the main CPU 100a disables interrupts, saves the flag register to the gaming RWM area, calls the target information program with a CALL command, and performs processing from step S900 onwards.

Specifically, the main CPU 100a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S900. Specifically, the main CPU 100a performs processing to count game performance information such as the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into various winning ports (general winning port, large winning port, start port) during the normal game state, the normal out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a during the normal game state, and the total out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state.

The total number of outs, number of payouts during normal play, and number of outs during normal play are game performance information that are not affected by changes to the setting value (are unrelated to the setting value), so by counting these, it is possible to calculate performance information that eliminates the influence of the setting value (the normal base value, described below), which can be used to understand the performance of the gaming machine 1.

In step S910, the main CPU 100a performs a normal base value calculation process (information program). Specifically, it calculates the normal base value ((normal payout number ÷ normal out number) × 100) in the current play section, which is divided by the total number of outs, and performs a process of saving the normal base value rounded off to the first decimal place in the first area of the base memory area set in the information RWM area.

The play section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. The base memory area has a first area in which the normal base value for the current play section is stored, a second area for storing the normal base value for the play section one period before, a third area for storing the normal base value for the play section two periods before, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value for the play section three periods before, and the normal base values for four play sections including the current one are saved in each area.

In step S920, the main CPU 100a performs a performance display data setting process (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 100a performs a process of setting performance display data for displaying on the information display 113 the normal base values (performance information) for the four play intervals calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base memory area while switching them every five seconds. The performance display data setting process will be described in detail later.

In step S930, the main CPU 100a performs a test data creation process (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 100a performs a process to create test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

In step S940, the main CPU 100a performs output control processing (information program). Specifically, it performs display output processing to output signals such as the performance display data (performance information) set in step S920 above to various displays, and processing to output signals such as the test data created in step S930 above.

Then, the main CPU 100a restores the flag register from the gaming RWM area, performs processing to allow the interrupt and return to the gaming program, restores the information saved at the start of this timer interrupt processing to the main CPU 100a register, and ends this timer interrupt processing.

In this way, in the pre-start state before game progress control begins (during setting change mode, RWM clear mode, and setting confirmation mode), timer interrupts are not executed, and the number of payouts and outs is not counted, the normal base value is not calculated, and the normal base value is not displayed, which reduces the control burden on the main control unit.

(Start port detection switch processing of the main control unit)
Next, details of the start hole detection switch process executed in the game control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 12. Fig. 12 is a detailed flow chart of the start hole detection switch process in step S200 of Fig. 11.

In step S201, the main CPU 100a determines whether a signal has been input by the first start hole detection switch 45a detecting a game ball (whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 45). If it is determined that there has been an input to the first start hole detection switch 45a, the process proceeds to step S202, and if it is determined that there has been no input to the first start hole detection switch 45a, the process proceeds to step S208.

In step S202, the main CPU 100a determines whether the first reserved number U1, which indicates the reserved number of rights to determine a jackpot related to the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 100c, is less than a predetermined maximum reserved number Umax1 (e.g., 4). If the first reserved number U1 is less than Umax1, the process proceeds to step S203; if not, the process proceeds to step S208.

In step S203, the main CPU 100a updates the value of the first reserved number U1 by adding "1".

In step S204, the main CPU 100a acquires special symbol determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for jackpot pattern determination, random number value for reach determination, random number value for special symbol change pattern determination), and stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the first special symbol determination information storage area in the main RAM 100c. Specifically, the first special symbol determination information storage area has first to fourth storage areas, and the main CPU 100a searches for an empty area in the first special symbol determination information storage area, starting from the first storage area, and stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the empty area.

In step S205, the main CPU 100a performs a first advance judgment process (first look-ahead process) based on the special chart judgment information acquired in step S204. This first advance judgment process is executed only in the normal game state. If the first advance judgment process has been executed, the process proceeds to step S206; if not, the process proceeds to step S207.

The first advance judgment process is a process for making an advance judgment on the special pattern judgment information acquired this time before the first special pattern variation display is performed based on the special pattern judgment information acquired this time. Specifically, based on the special pattern judgment information acquired this time and the advance judgment table, it is determined in advance whether or not there is a jackpot, and if there is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern and the special pattern variation pattern.

The advance determination table is a table that contains the same random number values as the jackpot determination table used in the jackpot determination process in the special symbol processing. The advance determination table also includes a table that contains the same random number values as the fluctuation pattern table used in the special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process in the special symbol processing.

In step S206, the main CPU 100a generates first look-ahead information for notifying the performance control unit 130 of the result of the first advance judgment process, and sets this in the main RAM 100c. The first look-ahead information is sent to the performance control unit 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, a look-ahead performance (zone performance, start effect performance, look-ahead chance eye performance, icon change performance) may be executed before the variable display of the first special pattern related to this winning starts.

In step S207, the main CPU 100a sets a first start winning command in the main RAM 100c. The first start winning command is a command indicating that a game ball has won in the first start hole 45 (the jackpot determination for the first special symbol has been reserved), and includes a first reserved number U1. In addition, if the first pre-reading information is set, the first start winning command includes the first pre-reading information. The first start winning command is sent to the performance control unit 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, a number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first reserved number U1 are displayed on the first image display device 70.

If the result of step S201 is "NO", if the result of step S202 is "NO", or if the process of step S207 is executed, the main CPU 100a executes the process of step S208.

In step S208, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a signal has been input by the second start hole detection switch 47a detecting a game ball (whether or not the game ball has entered the second start hole 47). If it is determined that an input has been input to the second start hole detection switch 47a, the process proceeds to step S208; otherwise, the start hole detection switch process ends.

In step S209, the main CPU 100a determines whether the second reserved number U2, which indicates the reserved number of rights to determine a jackpot related to the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 100c, is less than a predetermined maximum reserved number Umax2 (e.g., 4). If the second reserved number U2 is less than Umax2, the process proceeds to step S209; if not, the start hole detection switch process ends.

In step S210, the main CPU 100a updates the value of the second reserved number U2 by adding "1".

In step S211, the main CPU 100a acquires special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining a jackpot pattern, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for determining a special symbol change pattern) and stores the acquired special symbol determination information in a second special symbol determination information storage area in the main RAM 100c. Specifically, the second special symbol determination information storage area has first to fourth storage areas, and the main CPU 100a searches for an empty area in the second special symbol determination information storage area, starting from the first storage area, and stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the empty area.

In step S212, the main CPU 100a performs a second advance judgment process (second look-ahead process) based on the special chart judgment information acquired in step S211. This second advance judgment process is executed only in the auxiliary game state (high probability game state or time-limited game state). If the second advance judgment process has been executed, the process proceeds to step S213; if not, the process proceeds to step S214.

The second advance judgment process is a process for making an advance judgment on the special pattern judgment information acquired this time before the second special pattern variation display is performed based on the special pattern judgment information acquired this time. Specifically, it makes an advance judgment on whether or not there is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern, and the special pattern variation pattern based on the special pattern judgment information acquired this time and the advance judgment table.

In step S213, the main CPU 100a generates second look-ahead information for notifying the performance control unit 130 of the result of the second advance judgment process, and sets this in the main RAM 100c. The second look-ahead information is sent to the performance control unit 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, a look-ahead performance (zone performance, start effect performance, look-ahead chance eye performance, icon change performance) may be executed before the variable display of the second special pattern related to the current winning starts.

In step S214, the main CPU 100a sets a second start winning command in the main RAM 100c. The second start winning command is a command indicating that a game ball has won in the second start hole 47 (the jackpot determination for the second special symbol has been reserved), and includes a second reserved number U2. In addition, if second pre-reading information is set, the second start winning command includes the second pre-reading information. The second start winning command is sent to the performance control unit 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second reserved number U2 are displayed on the first image display device 70.

(Special pattern processing of the main control unit)
Next, the details of the special symbol processing executed by the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 13 to Fig. 15. Fig. 13 is a detailed flowchart showing the special symbol processing of step S300 in Fig. 11. Fig. 14 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting processing of step S408 in Fig. 13. Fig. 15 is a detailed flowchart showing the processing during stoppage of step S416 in Fig. 13.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main CPU 100a of the main control unit 100 determines whether or not a special game (a big win game) is in progress based on information stored in the main RAM 100c, for example (step S401). If it is determined that a special game is in progress (step S401: YES), the main CPU 100a ends the special symbol processing.

When the main CPU 100a determines that a special game is not in progress (step S401: NO), it determines whether or not a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is being displayed in a changing manner (step S402). When it determines that a special symbol is not being displayed in a changing manner (step S402: NO), it determines whether or not the second reserved number U2 of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 100c is "1" or more (step S403), and when it determines that it is "1" or more (step S403: YES), it subtracts "1" from the second reserved number U2 and consumes only one reserved symbol of the second special symbol (step S404).

Specifically, in step S404, the main CPU 100a shifts the data stored in the first to fourth memory areas of the second special pattern determination information storage area, thereby moving the special pattern determination information stored in the first to fourth memory areas to the previous memory area.

For example, the special pattern determination information stored in the fourth memory area of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the third memory area of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area. Also, the special pattern determination information stored in the third memory area of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the second memory area of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area. Also, the special pattern determination information stored in the second memory area of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the first memory area of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area. Also, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory area of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the corresponding determination area of the main RAM 100c.

When the main CPU 100a determines that the second reserved number U2 is not "1" or more (a jackpot determination for the second special symbol is not reserved) (step S403: NO), it determines whether the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 100c is "1" or more (step S405), and when it determines that it is "1" or more (step S405: YES), it subtracts "1" from the first reserved number U1 and consumes only one reserved number of the first special symbol (step S406).

Specifically, in step S406, the main CPU 100a shifts the data stored in the first to fourth memory areas of the first special pattern determination information storage area, thereby moving the special pattern determination information stored in the first to fourth memory areas to the previous memory area.

For example, the special pattern judgment information stored in the fourth memory area of the first special pattern judgment information holding memory area is shifted to the third memory area of the first special pattern judgment information holding memory area. Also, the special pattern judgment information stored in the third memory area of the first special pattern judgment information holding memory area is shifted to the second memory area of the first special pattern judgment information holding memory area. Also, the special pattern judgment information stored in the second memory area of the first special pattern judgment information holding memory area is shifted to the first memory area of the first special pattern judgment information holding memory area. Also, the special pattern judgment information stored in the first memory area of the first special pattern judgment information holding memory area is shifted to the corresponding judgment area of the main RAM 100c.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 100a determines in step S405 that the first reserved number U1 is not "1" or more (step S405: NO), it sets a customer waiting command in the main RAM 100c and ends the special pattern processing shown in FIG. 13. This causes the customer waiting command to be sent to the performance control unit 130, and for example, when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting command was received, the customer waiting performance is started in the first image display device 70.

Following the processing of step S404 or step S406, the main CPU 100a executes a jackpot determination process (step S407). In this jackpot determination process, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred, and a pattern determination is performed to determine the type of special pattern (jackpot pattern or losing pattern) that is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 100a first performs a jackpot determination based on the special pattern determination information (specifically, a random number value for jackpot determination) stored in the determination area and a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table stores a jackpot random number value according to the game state for each setting value, and determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the current setting value and game state.

When the main CPU 100a judges that a jackpot has been reached based on the random number value for jackpot judgment, it performs a pattern judgment to determine the jackpot symbol (type of jackpot) to be stopped and displayed after the variable time has elapsed. In this pattern judgment, the jackpot symbol is judged based on the random number value for jackpot symbol judgment stored in the judgment area and the jackpot symbol judgment table. The main CPU 100a then sets the judged jackpot symbol in the main RAM 100c. On the other hand, if the jackpot judgment judges that a miss has been reached, the main CPU 100a sets a miss symbol in the main RAM 100c. The main CPU 100a then sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the set jackpot symbol or miss symbol in the main RAM 100c.

(An example of a jackpot symbol determination table)
An example of the big win symbol determination table will now be described. Fig. 18 is a diagram showing an example of the big win symbol determination table used for determining the big win symbol in the big win determination process in step S407 of Fig. 13 .

As shown in FIG. 18, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination for the first special symbol (i.e., a jackpot determination based on winning at the first starting hole 45), one of the jackpot symbols A1 to A3 will be determined. Specifically, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination for the first special symbol, there is a 15% chance that the jackpot symbol A1 will be selected as the jackpot symbol, a 50% chance that the jackpot symbol A2 will be selected, and a 35% chance that the jackpot symbol A3 will be selected.

The jackpot symbol A1 is a jackpot symbol that indicates a 10R guaranteed jackpot. When the jackpot symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, a 10R jackpot game is executed in which the second large prize opening 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds, and this round game is repeated 10 times (10 rounds (denoted as "R")). When the 10R jackpot game ends, the guaranteed jackpot game state is set. Note that if 10 game balls enter the second large prize opening 56 within 29.5 seconds from the start of one round game, the round game ends.

The jackpot pattern A2 is a jackpot pattern that indicates a 4R jackpot. When the jackpot pattern A2 is stopped and displayed, a 4R jackpot game is executed in which the first large prize winning port 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds, and this round game is repeated four times. When the 4R jackpot game ends, the game is set to a jackpot game state.

The jackpot pattern A3 is a jackpot pattern that indicates a 4R normal jackpot. When the jackpot pattern A3 is stopped and displayed, a 4R jackpot game is executed in which the first large prize winning port 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds, and this round game is repeated four times. When the 4R jackpot game ends, the game is set to a time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is determined to have occurred in the jackpot determination for the second special symbol (i.e., a jackpot determination based on winning at the second starting hole 47), one of the jackpot symbols B1 to B3 will be determined. Specifically, if a jackpot is determined to have occurred in the jackpot determination for the second special symbol, there is a 40% chance that the jackpot symbol B1 will be selected as the jackpot symbol, a 25% chance that the jackpot symbol B2 will be selected, and a 35% chance that the jackpot symbol B3 will be selected.

The jackpot symbol B1 is a jackpot symbol indicating a 10R sure-win jackpot, and when the jackpot symbol B1 is stopped and displayed, a 10R jackpot game is executed in which the round game in which the second big prize winning port 56 is opened is repeated 10 times, and then the sure-win game state is set. The jackpot symbol B2 is a jackpot symbol indicating a 4R sure-win jackpot, and when the jackpot symbol B2 is stopped and displayed, a 4R jackpot game is executed in which the round game in which the first big prize winning port 50 is opened is repeated 4 times, and then the sure-win game state is set. The jackpot symbol B3 is a jackpot symbol indicating a 4R normal jackpot, and when the jackpot symbol B3 is stopped and displayed, a 4R jackpot game is executed in which the round game in which the first big prize winning port 50 is opened is repeated 4 times, and then the time-saving game state is set.

The types of jackpots shown here are merely examples and may be modified as appropriate. For example, in a jackpot game involving jackpot pattern A1, the first winning port 50 may be opened instead of the second winning port 56, or the first winning port 50 and the second winning port 56 may be opened. Also, in a jackpot game involving jackpot patterns A2 and A3, the second winning port 56 may be opened instead of the first winning port 50, or the first winning port 50 and the second winning port 56 may be opened. Also, in each jackpot game, a short opening round game in which the opening time of the first winning port 50 or the second winning port 56 is short (for example, 2 seconds or less) may be played one or more times.

Returning to FIG. 13, following the jackpot determination process in step S407, the main CPU 100a executes a special chart variation pattern setting process (step S408). The special chart variation pattern setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 14.

(Special chart variation pattern setting process)
As shown in FIG. 14, the main CPU 100a judges whether or not the probability flag described later is ON, that is, whether or not the state is a high probability state (step S461). If the probability flag is OFF (step S461: NO), the main CPU 100a judges whether or not the time-saving flag described later is ON, that is, whether or not the state is an auxiliary game state (step S462). If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S462: NO), that is, in the case of a normal game state, the main CPU 100a sets the normal table as the special chart fluctuation pattern table in the main RAM 100c (step S463). If the time-saving flag is ON (step S462: YES), that is, in the case of a time-saving game state, the main CPU 100a sets the time-saving table as the special chart fluctuation pattern table in the main RAM 100c (step S464).

On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is ON (step S461: YES), i.e., if the game is in a probability variation state, the main CPU 100a sets the probability variation table in the main RAM 100c as a special chart variation pattern table (step S465).

The special pattern variation pattern table is a table that specifies the conditions for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special pattern. The special pattern variation pattern table includes multiple variation patterns, including a jackpot variation pattern that is selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a miss variation pattern (no reach) that is selected when the result is a miss and there is no reach (when it is not determined that a variation pattern with a predetermined variation time or more is selected using a reach determination random number value), and a reach variation pattern that is selected when the result is a miss and there is a reach (when it is determined that a variation pattern with a predetermined variation time or more is selected using a reach determination random number value). Note that, as examples of the special pattern variation pattern table, a normal table that is selected in a normal game state and an example of a special variable table that is selected in a special variable game state will be described later.

Following the processing of step S463, step S464, or step S465, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S407 was a miss (step S466). If the result of this jackpot determination is not a miss, i.e., if it is a jackpot (step S466: NO), the main CPU 100a proceeds to the next step 468.

If the result of the jackpot determination in step S407 is determined to be a miss (step S466: YES), the main CPU 100a performs reach determination processing (step S467). In the reach determination processing, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not to select a reach fluctuation pattern with a predetermined fluctuation time or more based on the obtained reach determination random number value. Then, following the processing of step S467, the main CPU 100a executes the processing of step S468.

In step S468, the main CPU 100a determines the variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, the main CPU 100a uses the set special symbol variation pattern table to select a variation pattern based on the random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern stored in the relevant determination area of the main RAM 100c. More specifically, the main CPU 100a determines a variation pattern in which the random number value for determining the special symbol variation pattern matches the value set for each variation pattern included in the set special symbol variation pattern table.

The determined variation pattern is set as setting information in the main RAM 100c (step S469). After processing in step S469, the main CPU 100a ends the special chart variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14, and proceeds to the process in and after step S409 in FIG. 13.

Returning to FIG. 13, following the processing of step S408, the main CPU 100a sets a change start command in the main RAM 100c (step S409). The change start command includes a special symbol designation command indicating the symbol set in the processing of step S407, a special symbol change pattern designation command indicating the change pattern set in the processing of step S408, a game state designation command indicating the current game state, the first reserved number U1 (U1 after subtraction in S406), and the second reserved number U2 (U2 after subtraction in S404). This change start command is a command that instructs the start of a performance associated with the display of the special symbol change, and is transmitted to the performance control unit 130 by executing the output control processing of step S820. This starts a change performance using the performance pattern 701.

Following the process of step S409, the main CPU 100a sets the special symbol variation time (set counter value) set in the special symbol variation pattern setting process in the main RAM 100c (step S410), and the main CPU 100a starts the variation display of the special symbol (step S411). Specifically, the main CPU 100a sets the counter value indicating the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol to "1". This counter value is incremented by "1" each time YES is determined in step S402. Note that this counter value is retained in the main RAM 100c even if the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off, and when the power supply is restored, it is updated from the value stored before the power supply was cut off. Then, based on this counter value, the data creation process of step S810 creates lighting data for the LED for performing the variation display of the special symbol, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S820, so that the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61. In addition, the display of the special symbol changes is performed using the second special symbol display 61 if the processing of steps S407 to S409 is performed following the processing of step S404, and is performed using the first special symbol display 60 if the processing of steps S406 is performed following the processing of step S406.

When the main CPU 100a judges "YES" in the process of step S402 or executes the process of step S411, it judges whether or not the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set in the process of step S408 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display in step S411 (step S412). Specifically, the main CPU 100a judges whether or not the current counter value has reached the set counter value set in step S410.

When the main CPU 100a determines that the change time has elapsed (step S412: YES), it sets a change stop command in the main RAM 100c to notify that the special symbol will be stopped (step S413). The change stop command includes a symbol determination command indicating the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot symbol or losing symbol) set when the special symbol started to change. The change stop command may also include a game state designation command indicating the current game state, information indicating the first reserved number U1, and information indicating the second reserved number U2. This change stop command is a command to instruct the end of the presentation accompanying the change display of the special symbol, and is sent to the presentation control unit 130 by executing the output control process of step S820. As a result, the presentation symbol 701, small symbol 702, etc. are stopped and the change presentation using the presentation symbol 701 is ended.

Then, the main CPU 100a ends the variable display of the special symbols (step S414) and resets the elapsed time (counter value) (step S415). As a result, the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 displays a static symbol (a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) according to the result of the jackpot determination process in step S407, and notifies the user whether or not a jackpot has been reached.

After processing step S415, the main CPU 100a executes processing during stoppage (step S416). Details of the processing during stoppage will be described later.

If step S401 is judged as "YES", if step S405 is judged as "NO", if step S412 is judged as "NO", or if the processing of step S416 is performed, the main CPU 100a ends the special pattern processing.

(Processing during stoppage by the main control unit 100)
Next, the process during stoppage in step S416 in FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 15, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not there is a jackpot based on the result of the jackpot determination process in step S407 (step S480). If the main CPU 100a determines that there is a jackpot (step S480: YES), it sets the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 100c to "ON" (step S481).

Following the processing of step S481, the main CPU 100a sets the time-saving flag and the probability change flag stored in the main RAM 100c to "OFF" (step S482). Following the processing of step S482, the main CPU 100a starts an opening (step S483) and sets an opening command in the main RAM 100c (step S484). This opening command is a command for causing the performance control unit 130 to perform an opening performance indicating that a jackpot game is about to start, and this command is sent to the performance control unit 130 by executing the output control processing of step S820.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 100a determines that the jackpot has not been reached (step S480: NO), it determines whether or not the time-saving flag is set to "ON" (step S485). If it determines that the time-saving flag is set to "ON" (step S485: YES), it subtracts "1" from the remaining number of auxiliary games J stored in the main RAM 100c, and updates J (step S486). The remaining number of auxiliary games J indicates the remaining number of times the special symbols will change while the auxiliary game state is maintained (the number of times the jackpot determination is performed), and is set in the game state setting process executed after the jackpot game has been reached. The game state setting process will be described in detail later.

Following the processing of step S486, the main CPU 100a determines whether the remaining number of auxiliary games J is "0" (step S487). If it is determined that the remaining number of auxiliary games J is "0" (step S487: YES), the main CPU 100a sets the time-saving flag to "OFF" (step S488).

When the processing of step S488 is executed, when it is determined that the time-saving flag is not "ON" (step S485: NO), or when it is determined that the remaining number of auxiliary games J is not "0" (step S487: NO), the main CPU 100a determines whether the special bonus flag is set to "ON" (step S489).

When it is determined that the high probability flag is set to "ON" (step S489: YES), the main CPU 100a subtracts "1" from the remaining number of high probability games X stored in the main RAM 100c, and updates X (step S490). The remaining number of high probability games X indicates the remaining number of times that a special symbol determination will be performed in a high probability state, and is set in the game state setting process (described later) that is executed after a jackpot game has been performed.

Following the processing of step S490, the main CPU 100a determines whether the remaining number of high-probability games X is "0" (step S491). If it is determined that the remaining number of high-probability games X is "0" (step S491: YES), the high probability flag stored in the main RAM 100c is set to "OFF" (step S492).

If the processing of step S492 is executed, if the processing of step S484 is executed, if it is determined that the probability bonus flag is not "ON" (step S489: NO), or if it is determined that the remaining number of high probability games X is not "0" (step S491: NO), the main CPU 100a ends the processing during the stop of FIG. 15.

(Jackpot Game Processing of the Main Control Unit)
Next, the details of the jackpot game process executed by the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 16. Fig. 16 is a detailed flow chart showing the jackpot game process of step S500 in Fig. 11. As shown in Fig. 16, the main CPU 100a judges whether or not the jackpot game flag (special game flag) is ON (step S501). If the jackpot game flag is ON (step S501: YES), the main CPU 100a judges whether or not the opening is in progress (step S502). Here, it is judged whether or not the jackpot game started in the above step S483 is in the opening state.

If the opening is in progress (step S502: YES), the main CPU 100a determines whether the opening time has elapsed (step S503). The opening time differs depending on the jackpot symbol. If the opening time has elapsed (step S503: YES), the main CPU 100a sets R (indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game) to "0" according to the result of the jackpot determination process, and sets the value of Rmax, the opening pattern of the jackpot opening (first jackpot opening 50 or second jackpot opening 56) (opening time, number of openings, interval time, etc.), etc. (step S504).

Here, as mentioned above, the value of Rmax differs depending on the jackpot symbol, and the main CPU 100a sets Rmax, which indicates the number of rounds of jackpot play, according to the jackpot symbol.

Following step S504, the main CPU 100a adds "1" to R and stores it in the main RAM 100c (step S505). Next, the main CPU 100a starts the opening control of the large prize opening based on the opening pattern set in step S504 (step S506), and sets a round start command indicating the start of the round in the main RAM 100c (step S507). This round start command is sent to the performance control unit 130 by executing the output control process of step S820. After the process of step S507, the main CPU 100a next executes the process of step S511.

On the other hand, if the game is not in the opening mode (step S502: NO), the main CPU 100a judges whether or not the game is ending (step S508). If the game is in the ending mode (step S508: YES), the main CPU 100a then executes the process of step S518. If the game is not in the ending mode (step S508: NO), the main CPU 100a judges whether or not the game is in an interval between rounds of play (step S509). If the game is in an interval (step S509: YES), the main CPU 100a judges whether or not the interval time has elapsed (step S510), and if the interval time has elapsed (step S510: YES), the main CPU 100a then executes the process of step S505. If the interval time has not elapsed (step S510: NO), the main CPU 100a ends the jackpot game process.

On the other hand, if it is not during an interval (step S509: NO), i.e., if a round is being played, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the round end condition is met (step S511). If the round end condition is not met (step S511: NO), the main CPU 100a ends the jackpot game process.

The round end condition is that a predetermined time (e.g., 29.5 seconds) has elapsed since the opening control of the large prize opening for this round was started in step S506, or that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening for this round since the opening control of the large prize opening was started in step S506 has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 10 balls). If either of these two conditions is met, the main CPU 100a determines that the round end condition has been met.

If the round end condition is met (step S511: YES), the main CPU 100a ends the control of opening the special prize opening for this round (step S512). Next, the main CPU 100a sets a round end command (step S513). This round end command is sent to the performance control unit 130 by executing the output control process of step S820.

The main CPU 100a then determines whether R is equal to Rmax (step S514). In other words, the main CPU 100a determines whether the current round is equal to the maximum number of rounds set in step S504.

If it is determined that R is not equal to Rmax (step S514: NO), the main CPU 100a starts measuring the interval time (step S515) and then ends the jackpot game processing.

If it is determined that R is equal to Rmax (step S514: YES), the main CPU 100a starts the ending (step S516) and sets an ending command in the main RAM 100c (step S517). This ending command is sent to the performance control unit 130 by executing the output control process of step S820.

When the main CPU 100a has performed the process of step S517, or when the process of step S508 has been judged as YES, the main CPU 100a judges whether or not a preset ending time has elapsed since the ending was started in step S516 (step S518). If the ending time has elapsed (step S518: YES), the main CPU 100a executes a game status setting process (step S519). Details of the game status setting process will be described later. When the game status setting process of step S519 has been executed, the main CPU 100a sets the jackpot game flag (special game flag) to OFF (step S520).

If the process of step S501 is judged as NO, if the process of step S511 is judged as NO, if the process of step S518 is judged as NO, if the process of step S503 is judged as NO, if the process of step S515 is executed, or if the process of step S520 is executed, the main CPU 100a ends the jackpot game process shown in FIG. 16.

(Game status setting process by main control unit)
Next, a description will be given of the game status setting process in step S519 in Fig. 16. Fig. 17 is a detailed flowchart showing the game status setting process in step S519 in Fig. 16.

As shown in FIG. 17, the main CPU 100a judges whether the type of the current jackpot is a high probability jackpot accompanied by a transition to a high probability state (step S530). Specifically, the main CPU 100a judges whether the current jackpot is a high probability jackpot based on the jackpot pattern set in the jackpot judgment process. If the jackpot is a high probability jackpot (step S530: YES), the main CPU 100a sets the high probability jackpot flag and the time-saving flag to ON (step S531), sets the remaining number of high probability games X to Xmax, and sets the remaining number of auxiliary games J to Jmax (step S532). Xmax and Jmax are predetermined values, and very large values, for example 10,000, are set as Xmax and Jmax. Since the very large value Xmax is set as X, the game is effectively controlled in the high probability game state until the next jackpot occurs.

When the process of step S532 has been performed, or when the result of step S530 is NO, the main CPU 100a determines whether the current jackpot is a normal jackpot that involves a transition to a time-saving game state (step S533). When the result of step S533 is YES, the main CPU 100a sets the time-saving flag to ON (step S534). Next, the main CPU 100a sets the remaining number of auxiliary games J to, for example, "100" (step S535).

If step S535 is performed, or if step S533 is judged as NO, the main CPU 100a ends the game status setting process shown in FIG. 17.

(Main control unit performance display data setting process)
The performance display data setting process (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 19. Fig. 19 is a flow chart showing the performance display data setting process in the main control unit 100.

First, in step S920-1, the main CPU 100a determines whether the display switching time counter saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 100c is a display switching value of "0" in order to determine whether the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is to be switched. If the display switching value is "0", the process proceeds to step 920-2 assuming that the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 will be switched, and if the display switching value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S920-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 will not be switched. Note that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the value of the display switching time counter is set to the display switching value of "0".

In step S920-2, the main CPU 100a determines whether a lighting confirmation flag has been saved in the information RWM area to determine whether lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed. If the lighting confirmation flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S920-4 with the intention of displaying the normal base value on the information display 113, and if the lighting confirmation flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S920-3 with the intention of checking whether the information display 113 is lit. Note that when this process is executed for the first time after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the lighting confirmation flag has not been saved.

In step S920-3, the main CPU 100a determines display data for lighting confirmation to light all segments (including the decimal point) of the four seven-segment displays (113a to 113d) that make up the information display 113.

In step S920-4, the main CPU 100a obtains a normal base value (for display on the information display 113) corresponding to the data selection counter value from a base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 100c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is obtained; if the data selection counter value is "1", the normal base value saved in the second area of the base storage area is obtained; if the data selection counter value is "2", the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area is obtained; and if the data selection counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is obtained.

In step S920-5, the main CPU 100a refers to a display data determination table (not shown) to determine the display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the information display 113 based on the interval counter value, the number of normal outs indicated by the normal out count counter, and the obtained normal base value.

In step S920-6, the main CPU 100a sets the determined display data in the output data area of the information RWM area as display information for the information display 113. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area in the output control process of step S940 described above is referenced, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. The display information of the information display 113 in each play area will be described later.

In step S920-7, the main CPU 100a adds 1 to the display switching time counter described above, and in step S920-8, it determines whether the display switching time counter is greater than an upper limit value (e.g., 5 seconds). If the display switching time counter is not greater than the upper limit value, it is determined that the time to switch the display on the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S920-15. If the display switching time counter is greater than the upper limit value, it is determined that the time to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113 has elapsed, and in step S920-9, the display switching time counter is cleared to 0 (initialized).

In step S920-10, the main CPU 100a determines whether the above-mentioned lighting confirmation flag is present in the information RWM area of the main RAM 100c. If the lighting confirmation flag is present, the process proceeds to step S920-12. If the lighting confirmation flag is not present, the lighting confirmation flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 100c in step S920-11.

In step S920-12, the main CPU 100a adds 1 to the data selection counter described above, and in step S920-13, it determines whether the data selection counter is greater than an upper limit (e.g., 3). If it is not greater than the upper limit, it moves to step S920-15, and if it is greater than the upper limit, it clears (initializes) the data selection counter to 0 in step S920-14.

In step S920-15, the main CPU 100a restores the registers that were saved to the information RWM area of the main RAM 100c during the above-mentioned game ball counting process, and in step S920-16, it restores the game stack pointers that were saved to the information RWM area of the main RAM 100c during the above-mentioned game ball counting process, and ends this performance display data setting process.

In this way, after the gaming machine 1 is powered on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed, all segments of the four seven-segment displays of the information display 113 are lit (lighting confirmation is performed), making it possible to check whether the information display 113 is malfunctioning and which segments are malfunctioning, etc.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence, making it possible to compare the performance information (normal base value) of the most recent four play sections, and to confirm the actual performance of the gaming machine and identify the possibility of fraudulent activity.

(Display information of the information display in each game area)
Next, the display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20 is a diagram showing the display information of the information display in each game section. In the table of display information in Fig. 20, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of outs during normal play, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113 includes "bL.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the current play section, "b1.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section one period before, "b2.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section two periods before, and "b3.", which indicates that it is the normal base value for the play section three periods before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical segment of the information display 113 includes "--", which indicates that no normal base value has been calculated; "00", which indicates that the normal base value is "0" or the normal out count is "0"; "01" to "99", which indicate that the normal out count is "1" or greater and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and "99.", which indicates that the normal base value is "100" or greater. Note that if the normal base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information will always be "0" and it will be displayed in two digits.

The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical segment does not change (it is displayed as a lit light) regardless of the play area or the number of outs during normal play, but the display mode of the identification information displayed in the identification segment changes (it is displayed as a flashing light or a lit light) depending on the play area or the number of outs during normal play (whether or not a calculated normal base value is present, and whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth play zones, when displaying the identification information of a play zone in which there is no calculated normal base value, the identification information will be displayed in a blinking manner. In addition, in the second play zone and onwards, when displaying the identification information of the current play zone ("bL."), if the period in which the reliability of the calculated normal base value is low (the number of normal outs is between 0 and 5999), the identification information will be displayed in a blinking manner. In all other cases, the identification information will be displayed in a lit manner.

Here, as an example of the display on the information display 113, if the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is within the range of 0 to 5999, the data selection counter value is "0", and the normal base value stored in the first area of the base memory area is "35", the identification segment of the information display 113 will flash "bL." and the numeric segment will light up and display "35".

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information displayed in the numeric segment does not use the decimal point DP of the seven-segment display, i.e., "00" to "99", whereas when the normal base value is "100" or more, the performance information displayed in the numeric segment uses the decimal point DP of the seven-segment display, i.e., "99.", making it easier to know that the normal base value is abnormal.

Also, when the base value is normally less than "10", a "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numeric segment, resulting in a two-digit display (e.g. "01"), making it possible to effectively use the two seven-segment displays as numeric segments and provide an easy-to-understand display.

In addition, when the normal base value for the current play area is displayed, if the number of normal outs for the current play area is between 0 and 5999, which is not enough to calculate the normal base value, the identification information "bL." displayed in the identification segment will flash, making it easier to understand that the currently displayed normal base value is unreliable information.

In addition, if no normal base value has been calculated, a non-numeric "- - " will be displayed in the numerical segment, making it easier to understand that no normal base value has been calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment.

In addition, rather than executing the game ball counting process, performance information calculation process, and performance display data setting process as information programs, it is also possible to execute one or two of them as game programs (for example, execute the game ball counting process within the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while executing the rest as information programs.

In addition, the process of outputting display data for displaying performance information on the information display 113 may be executed by the performance program, rather than by the output control process, which is the game program.

In addition, instead of using the out ball detection switch 39a to detect out balls consisting of game balls that have entered the general winning hole 43, the first start hole 45, the second start hole 47, the first large winning hole 50, and the second large winning hole 56, and game balls that have flowed into the out hole 39, the out ball detection switch 39a may be configured to detect only game balls that have flowed into the out hole. In that case, the number of outs (total number of outs, number of outs during normal play) may be incremented by one each time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the first start hole detection switch 45a, the second start hole detection switch 47a, the first large winning hole detection switch 50a, and the second large winning hole detection switch 56a.

(Reach performance, special chart change pattern table)
Here, the reach performance will be explained, and then an example of a special chart variation pattern table will be explained.

The first image display device 70 displays three performance symbols 701, one on the left, one in the center, and one on the right. When the three performance symbols 701 start to change in response to the start of the special symbol change, and when three of the same type of performance symbols 701 stop in a line (for example, "777" or "444"), a big win is announced. The state in which three of the same type of performance symbols 701 are lined up is called a "double number" or "pattern alignment." If the three of the same type of performance symbols 701 stop without being lined up, a miss is basically announced. The state in which three different performance symbols 701 stop without a reach performance being performed is called a "variable number" or "normal miss." In addition, when the result of the reach performance is that three of the same type of performance symbols 701 do not line up and a miss is announced, this is sometimes called a "reach miss."

The reach effect is an effect that uses the effect pattern 701 displayed on the first image display device 70, and is an effect that makes the player expect a big win. Specifically, the reach effect is an effect in which the same type of effect pattern 701 temporarily stops on the left and right, and the effect pattern 701 changes in the middle area, and is an effect that makes the player expect that the same type of effect pattern 701 as the temporarily stopped effect pattern 701 on the left and right will stop in the middle area.

Here, "temporary stop" refers to a state in which the performance pattern 701 does not stop completely but fluctuates slightly (e.g., swings up and down).

In this embodiment, the reach effects include normal reach effects (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "N reach"), SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, and special reach effects. The N reach effect is the effect with the lowest possibility of a subsequent jackpot (also called jackpot expectation or reliability) among multiple reach effects. For example, the jackpot expectation of an N reach effect is 1% or less. Note that there may be multiple N reach effects with different (or the same) performance times and/or jackpot expectation.

The SP reach performance is a performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the N reach performance, and is a reach performance with a longer performance time than the N reach performance. For example, the expectation of a jackpot for the SP reach performance is 5-10%. Note that there may be multiple SP reach performances as SP reach performances. The expectation of a jackpot differs depending on each SP reach performance, and the performance time may also differ. The longer the performance time of the SP reach performance, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

The SPSP reach performance is a performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the SP reach performance, and a longer performance time than the SP reach performance. For example, the expectation of a jackpot for the SPSP reach performance is 30-50%. Note that there may be multiple SPSP reach performances as the SPSP reach performance. The expectation of a jackpot differs depending on each SPSP reach performance, and the performance time may also differ. The longer the performance time of the SPSP reach performance, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

The special reach effect is the effect with the highest probability of a jackpot, for example, an effect that suggests a jackpot (a confirmed effect that indicates a confirmed jackpot). In other words, the special reach effect is an effect that is executed only when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, and the probability of a jackpot is 100%. The special reach effect is also an effect that suggests the most advantageous jackpot game for the player (a 10R guaranteed jackpot game).

(An example of a special chart variation pattern table)
Next, an example of a special symbol variation pattern table will be described. Fig. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal game state.

21, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination for the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol A1 is determined, one of the following jackpot fluctuation patterns is selected as the jackpot fluctuation pattern: fluctuation pattern OP1 (fluctuation time 30 seconds), fluctuation pattern OP2 (fluctuation time 60 seconds), fluctuation pattern OP3 (fluctuation time 90 seconds), or fluctuation pattern OP4 (fluctuation time 120 seconds). Specifically, fluctuation pattern OP1 is selected 2% of the time, fluctuation pattern OP2 is selected 8% of the time, fluctuation pattern OP3 is selected 88% of the time, and fluctuation pattern OP4 is selected 2% of the time. In the special chart fluctuation pattern table, a random number value (which varies in the range of 0 to 99) for determining the special chart fluctuation pattern is assigned to each fluctuation pattern, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on whether the random number value for determining the special chart fluctuation pattern obtained when the game ball enters the start hole (first start hole 45 or second start hole 47) matches any of the random number values for determining the special chart fluctuation pattern set in the special chart fluctuation pattern table.

The variation pattern OP1 is a variation pattern in which a normal reach (N reach) performance is performed as a reach performance by the performance control unit 130. When the variation pattern OP1 is selected, the three performance patterns start to vary in response to the start of the variation of the special pattern, and then the same type of performance pattern temporarily stops on the left and right, an N reach performance is performed, and a jackpot is announced. The variation of the special pattern due to the variation pattern in which an N reach performance is performed is sometimes called "N reach variation."

In addition, a pseudo-variable performance (pseudo-consecutive) may be performed before (or after) the N-reach performance is started. In this case, multiple variation patterns are prepared in advance as a variation pattern in which a variation performance including an N-reach performance and a pseudo-variable performance is performed. Here, the pseudo-consecutive is a performance in which at least one of the three performance patterns 701 (for example, a pseudo-consecutive pattern suggesting a pseudo-consecutive) temporarily stops and changes again. The more pseudo-consecutives, the higher the expectation of a big win. For example, the pseudo-consecutive may be performed by temporarily stopping the three performance patterns 701 and then changing again, or the pseudo-consecutive pattern suggesting a pseudo-consecutive may temporarily stop and the three performance patterns 701 change again. In addition, the pseudo-consecutive may be performed by operating a predetermined image or a role for the performance during the display of the change of the three performance patterns 701.

For example, one or more pseudo consecutive wins (re-changes) may be performed before a reach is established (similar performance patterns on the left and right temporarily stop), and then an N reach performance may begin. A reach may be established without a pseudo consecutive win, then one or more pseudo consecutive wins may be performed, a reach may be established again, and an N reach performance may begin. One or more pseudo consecutive wins may be performed before a reach is established, then a reach may be established, and then one or more pseudo consecutive wins may be performed, a reach may be established again, and a reach performance may be performed. Note that a pseudo consecutive win may be performed without any of the three performance patterns 701 temporarily stopping.

The variation pattern OP2 is a variation pattern in which a variation effect including an SP reach effect is performed as a reach effect. When the variation pattern OP2 is selected, the three performance symbols start to vary in response to the start of the variation of the special symbol, an N reach effect is performed, and then an SP reach effect is performed and a jackpot is announced. The variation of the special symbol due to the variation pattern in which the SP reach effect is performed is sometimes called "SP reach variation."

The variation pattern OP3 is a variation pattern in which a variation effect including an SPSP reach effect is performed as a reach effect. Specifically, when the variation pattern OP3 is selected, the three performance symbols start to vary in response to the start of the variation of the special symbol, an N reach effect is performed, then an SP reach effect is performed, and then an SPSP reach effect is performed, and a jackpot is announced. The variation of the special symbol due to the variation pattern in which the SPSP reach effect is performed is sometimes called "SPSP reach variation."

When the variation pattern OP4 is selected, a variation effect including a special reach effect is performed. Specifically, when the variation pattern OP4 is selected, the three effect patterns start to vary in response to the start of the variation of the special pattern, and the special reach effect is performed via either the N reach effect or the SP reach effect (or not), and a jackpot is announced. The special reach effect is an effect that varies when the three effect patterns 701 indicating a jackpot are aligned, and is an effect that suggests a jackpot.

When a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination for the first special symbol, and the jackpot symbol A2 or A3 is determined, one of the jackpot fluctuation patterns OP1, OP2, and OP3 is selected as the jackpot fluctuation pattern. Specifically, there is a 1% chance that fluctuation pattern OP1 is selected, a 9% chance that fluctuation pattern OP2 is selected, and a 90% chance that fluctuation pattern OP3 is selected. When the jackpot symbol A2 or A3 is determined, fluctuation pattern OP4 (a fluctuation pattern in which a special reach performance is performed) is not selected.

If a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination for the second special pattern, the same variation pattern is selected as when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination for the first special pattern. For this reason, a description of the case where a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination for the second special pattern will be omitted. Note that if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination for the second special pattern, a variation pattern different from the case where a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination for the first special pattern may be selected. For example, there may be an effect (exclusive effect for the second special pattern (jackpot)) that is executed only when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination for the second special pattern.

When the first special symbol is judged as a miss in the jackpot judgment and the random number value for reach judgment obtained when the game ball enters the starting hole is, for example, 0 to 9, one of the following reach fluctuation patterns is selected: fluctuation pattern RP1 (fluctuation time: 28 seconds), fluctuation pattern RP2 (fluctuation time: 58 seconds), or fluctuation pattern RP3 (fluctuation time: 88 seconds). Specifically, fluctuation pattern RP1 is selected 60% of the time, fluctuation pattern RP2 is selected 30% of the time, and fluctuation pattern RP3 is selected 10% of the time.

The RP1 variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a normal reach effect is performed. When the RP1 variation pattern is selected, the three effect patterns 701 start to vary in response to the start of the special pattern variation, and then the same type of effect patterns 701 temporarily stop on the left and right, an N reach effect is performed, and a miss is announced.

The RP2 variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a SP reach effect is performed. When the RP2 variation pattern is selected, the three effect patterns 701 start to vary in response to the start of the special pattern variation, and then the same type of effect patterns 701 on the left and right temporarily stop, and an N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed, and a miss is announced.

The RP3 variation pattern is a variation pattern in which variation effects including an SPSP reach effect are performed. When the RP3 variation pattern is selected, the three effect patterns 701 start to vary in response to the start of the special pattern variation, an N reach effect is performed, then an SP reach effect is performed, and then an SPSP reach effect is performed, and a miss is announced.

If the first special symbol is judged as a miss in the jackpot judgment and the reach judgment random number value is, for example, 10 to 99, a miss fluctuation pattern is selected. Specifically, when the first reserved number U1 is "0" to "2", fluctuation pattern HP1 (fluctuation time: 8 seconds) is selected, and when the first reserved number U1 is "3", fluctuation pattern HP2 (fluctuation time: 3 seconds) is selected.

The fluctuation patterns HP1 and HP2 are fluctuation patterns in which a performance indicating a normal miss is performed, and after the three performance symbols start to fluctuate, they are stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting a miss without a reach performance. Hereinafter, the fluctuation patterns HP1 and HP2 may be referred to as "normal miss fluctuations."

Even if the jackpot determination for the second special symbol is judged to be a miss, the same variation pattern is selected as when the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is judged to be a miss. For this reason, a description of the case where the jackpot determination for the second special symbol is judged to be a miss will be omitted. Note that if the jackpot determination for the second special symbol is judged to be a miss, a variation pattern different from the case where the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is judged to be a miss may be selected. For example, there may be an effect (exclusive effect for the second special symbol (miss)) that is executed only when the jackpot determination for the second special symbol is judged to be a miss.

Figure 22 shows an example of a special symbol variation pattern table used to select a special symbol variation pattern during a special symbol variation game state.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the guaranteed bonus game state, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol A1 is determined, the jackpot fluctuation pattern is selected as the jackpot fluctuation pattern, either fluctuation pattern OP5 (fluctuation time 40 seconds) or fluctuation pattern OP6 (fluctuation time 50 seconds). Also, if the jackpot symbol A2 is determined, either fluctuation pattern OP5 or fluctuation pattern OP7 (fluctuation time 40 seconds) is selected as the jackpot fluctuation pattern. If the jackpot symbol A3 is determined, then fluctuation pattern OP7 is selected as the jackpot fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in the guaranteed bonus game state, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol and the jackpot symbol B1 is determined, the jackpot fluctuation pattern is selected as the jackpot fluctuation pattern, either fluctuation pattern OP5 or fluctuation pattern OP6. In addition, if the jackpot symbol B2 is determined, the jackpot fluctuation pattern is selected as the jackpot fluctuation pattern, either fluctuation pattern OP5 or fluctuation pattern OP7. If the jackpot symbol B3 is determined, the jackpot fluctuation pattern is selected as the jackpot fluctuation pattern, either fluctuation pattern OP7.

The variation pattern OP5 is a variation pattern in which a battle reach effect is performed in which the player's own character and an enemy character fight, and as a result of the battle reach effect, a draw effect is performed in which the player's own character and the enemy character end in a draw. The draw effect is an effect that suggests a sure-win jackpot, and is an effect that suggests the possibility of a 4R sure-win jackpot.

The OP6 variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a battle reach effect is performed, and as a result of the battle reach effect, a victory effect is performed in which the player's character wins. The victory effect is an effect that suggests a 10R special jackpot.

The OP7 variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a battle reach effect is performed, and as a result of the battle reach effect, a defeat effect is performed in which the player's character is defeated. The defeat effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of a 4R normal jackpot.

In addition, in the guaranteed bonus game state, if the jackpot judgment for the first special symbol is judged as a miss, the miss fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern HP3 (fluctuation time 15 seconds). In addition, if the jackpot judgment for the second special symbol is judged as a miss, when the second reserved number U2 is "1" to "3", the miss fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern HP4 (fluctuation time 2 seconds) or HP5 (fluctuation time 8 seconds), and when the second reserved number U2 is "0", the miss fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern HP3.

When variation patterns HP3 to 5 are selected, the battle reach effect is not performed, and the three effect symbols 701 change and then stop in a losing state.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
Next, the details of the performance control based on various commands from the main control unit 100 will be described.

Figure 23 is a flow chart showing an example of a timer interrupt process performed in the performance control unit 130. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub-CPU 130a of the performance control unit 130 repeatedly executes the series of processes shown in Figure 23 at regular intervals (e.g., 4 milliseconds) by interruption.

The sub-CPU 130a first executes a command reception process (step E10). The command reception process of step E10 is a process for controlling the performance based on various commands from the main control unit 100. The performance control unit 130 receives a command from the main control unit 100, determines the content of the performance in accordance with the received command, generates a command for causing the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the determined performance, and sets the generated command in the sub-RAM 130c. The command reception process of step E10 will be described in detail later.

Following step E10, the sub-CPU 130a performs customer waiting control processing (step E20). Specifically, when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the sub-CPU 130a received a customer waiting command from the main control unit 100, the sub-CPU 130a starts a customer waiting demo performance. In this case, the performance control unit 130 stops the background music being output and outputs background music for the customer waiting demo performance.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a performs a command transmission process to transmit each command set in the sub-RAM 130c to the image/audio control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 (step E30). As a result, the image/audio control unit 140 performs effects such as image display and sound output, and the lamp control unit 150 controls the movable effect device 73, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, etc.

(Command Reception Processing by the Performance Control Unit 130)
Hereinafter, the command receiving process executed in the performance control unit 130 will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the command receiving process in step E10 in Fig. 23.

First, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 100 (step E101). If a command has been received (step E101: YES), the sub-CPU 130a proceeds to step E102, and if a command has not been received (step E101: NO), the sub-CPU 130a ends the current command reception process.

The sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting change command (step E102). If it is a setting change command (step E102: YES), the sub-CPU 130a performs a setting change notification process (step E103). Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a sets a notification instruction command to start the above-mentioned setting change notification in the sub-RAM 130c. This causes the notification instruction command to be sent to the image/audio control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the setting change notification is performed.

If step E103 is executed, or if step E102 is judged as NO, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether the received command is a setting confirmation command (step E104).

If it is a setting confirmation command (step E104: YES), the sub-CPU 130a performs a setting confirmation notification process (step E105). Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification in the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is sent to the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the setting confirmation notification is performed.

If step E105 is executed, or if step E104 is judged as NO, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether the received command is a power-on command or a power-restoration command (step E106).

If the received command is a power-on command or a power recovery command (step E106: YES), the sub-CPU 130a performs a power-on notification process (step E107). Specifically, if the received command is a power-on command, a notification instruction command for executing the above-mentioned power-on notification is set in the sub-RAM 130c, and if the received command is a power recovery command, a notification instruction command for executing the above-mentioned power recovery notification is set in the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is sent to the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the power-on notification or power recovery notification, and processing for executing an initial operation for operating the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) in a predetermined manner and an initial light emission for emitting light from the board lighting device 74 in a predetermined manner are performed.

If step E107 is executed, or if step E106 is judged as NO, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether the received command is an error command (step E108).

Error commands include unrecoverable error commands, illegal winning error commands, abnormal winning error commands, magnetic error commands, radio wave error commands, door opening error start commands, door opening error end commands, and operation error commands.

If it is an error-related command (step E108: YES), the sub-CPU 130a performs error notification processing (step E109). Specifically, a notification instruction command is set in the sub-RAM 130c to execute an error notification (unrecoverable error notification, improper winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door open error notification, operation error notification, etc.) according to the type of error-related command received. As a result, the notification instruction command is sent to the image/audio control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and various error notifications are performed.

When step E109 is executed, or when step E108 is judged as NO, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether the received command is a start winning command (first start winning command or second start winning command) (step E110). Here, the start winning command includes the first reserved number U1 and the second reserved number U2. In addition, the start winning command may include the first look-ahead information or the second look-ahead information.

If the received command is a start winning command (step E110: YES), the sub-CPU 130a executes the start winning command process (step E111). The start winning command process is a process that is executed when the game ball enters the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47. The details of the start winning command process will be described later.

When step E111 is executed, or when step E110 is judged as NO, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether the received command is a fluctuation start command (step E112). When it is a fluctuation start command (step E112: YES), the sub-CPU 130a executes fluctuation start command processing (step E113). The fluctuation start command processing is processing that is executed when the fluctuation display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern starts. When the fluctuation start command processing is executed, the start operation performance of the performance pattern 701 described later is performed, and the fluctuation performance using the performance pattern 701 is started. Details of the fluctuation start command processing and specific examples of the performance according to the fluctuation start command processing will be described later.

When step E113 is executed, or when step E112 is judged as NO, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether the received command is a fluctuation stop command (step E114). When it is a fluctuation stop command (step E114: YES), the sub-CPU 130a executes fluctuation stop command processing (step E115). The fluctuation stop command processing is processing that is executed when the first special pattern or the second special pattern is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the fluctuation stop command processing, the display pattern 701 or the small pattern 702 according to the result of the big win judgment is stopped and the fluctuation performance is ended. In addition, in the fluctuation stop command processing, the disappearance performance of the icon described later is performed. Specific examples of the performance according to this fluctuation stop command processing will be described later.

When step E115 is executed, or when step E114 is judged as NO, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether the received command is an opening command (step E116). When it is an opening command (step E116: YES), the sub-CPU 130a executes opening processing (step E117). Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a determines an opening effect indicating that a big win game is about to start, and sets a command in the sub-RAM 130c for causing the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the opening effect. This causes the command to be sent to the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing to execute the opening effect is performed.

When step E117 is executed, or when step E116 is judged as NO, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether the received command is an ending command (step E118). When it is an ending command (step E118: YES), the sub-CPU 130a executes ending processing (step E119). Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a determines an ending performance indicating that the big win game has ended, and sets a command in the sub-RAM 130c for causing the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the ending performance. This causes the command to be sent to the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing to execute the ending performance is performed.

(Start winning command processing by the performance control unit 130)
Hereinafter, the start winning command process executed in the performance control unit 130 will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the start winning command process in step E111 of Fig. 24.

The sub-CPU 130a updates the first reserved number N1 or the second reserved number N2 stored in the sub-RAM 130c based on the received start winning command (step E111-1). Here, the first reserved number N1 is a value indicating the reserved number for the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol, and the second reserved number N2 is a value indicating the reserved number for the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol. The first reserved number N1 is updated (increased) based on the first reserved number U1 in the start winning command, and the second reserved number N2 is updated (increased) based on the second reserved number U2. As a result, the first reserved number U1 stored in the main control unit 100 is set as the first reserved number N1, and the second reserved number U2 stored in the main control unit 100 is set as the second reserved number N2.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a analyzes the result of the advance judgment based on the first or second look-ahead information in the received start winning command (step E111-2). For example, if the received start winning command is based on a winning at the first start port 45, the sub-CPU 130a judges the result of the first advance judgment process (whether or not it is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern, the special chart change pattern, etc.) based on the first look-ahead information. Note that if the start winning command does not include look-ahead information, steps E111-3 to E111-6 are not executed, and the process of step E111-7 is executed next.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process based on the analysis result of step E111-2 (step E111-3). An "icon change effect" is an effect in which the reserved icon (first reserved icon or second reserved icon) or the icon changes. Here, based on the result of the pre-determination (whether or not it is a jackpot, the jackpot pattern, the special pattern change pattern), it is determined whether or not to change the reserved icon corresponding to the received start winning command to a special mode (blue, red, gold, rainbow) different from the normal mode, and the scenario of the change. The determined scenario is stored in the sub-RAM 130c. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to change the reserved icon to a special mode based on the result of the pre-determination and the effect random number. For example, if the pre-determination determines that it is a jackpot, the probability of determining that the reserved icon is changed to a special mode is higher than if it is determined that it is a miss. If it is determined that the reserved icon should be changed to a special mode, the sub-CPU 130a further performs a lottery based on the icon change scenario table and the random number for effect to determine the scenario for the change of the reserved icon (the final display mode and the process leading to the final display mode). An example of the icon change scenario table will be described later.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a performs a start-time effect performance determination process based on the analysis result of step E111-2 (step E111-4). Although details will be described later, the start-time effect performance is an example of a look-ahead continuous performance that can be executed across multiple special symbol variations, and is a performance in which an effect image is added to the performance symbol 701 when the variation of the performance symbol 701 begins. The effect image is an image that emphasizes the performance symbol 701, for example, an effect in which the performance symbol 701 emits light in a predetermined color. In step E111-4, the sub-CPU 130a first determines whether or not the condition for executing the look-ahead continuous performance is met. The condition for executing the look-ahead continuous performance is that a reach performance is not performed in the variation of the reserved special symbol until the variation of the special symbol related to this winning (the variation of the look-ahead target) is performed. In other words, the condition for executing the look-ahead continuous performance is that the variation before the variation of the look-ahead target is a normal miss variation (any of the variation patterns HP1 to HP5). When the conditions for executing the look-ahead continuous performance are met, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the start effect performance by a lottery based on random numbers, and when it is determined that the start effect performance is to be executed, it determines the scenario of the start effect performance by a lottery using a start effect performance scenario table. The determined scenario is stored in the sub-RAM 130c. An example of a start effect performance scenario table will be described later.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a performs a zone effect determination process based on the analysis results of step E111-2 (step E111-5). Although details will be described later, a zone effect is an example of a look-ahead continuous effect that can be executed across the variation of multiple special symbols, and is an effect that involves a change in the background image. Here, if the conditions for executing the look-ahead continuous effect are met, the sub-CPU 130a determines by lottery whether or not to execute a zone effect, and if it has decided to execute a zone effect, determines the scenario of the zone effect by holding a lottery using a zone effect scenario table. The determined scenario is stored in the sub-RAM 130c. An example of a zone effect scenario table will be described later.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a performs a chance eye effect determination process based on the analysis result of step E111-2 (step E111-6). Although details will be described later, the chance eye effect is an example of a look-ahead continuous effect that can be executed across multiple special symbol variations, and is an effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot in the next or subsequent special symbol variations by stopping three performance symbols 701 in a specific combination. Here, if the conditions for executing the look-ahead continuous effect are met, the sub-CPU 130a determines by lottery whether or not to execute the chance eye effect, and if it is determined that the chance eye effect should be executed, determines the scenario of the chance eye effect by drawing a lottery using a chance eye effect scenario table. The determined scenario is stored in the sub-RAM 130c. An example of a chance eye effect scenario table will be described later.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a performs additional display of the reserved icon (step E111-7). If it is determined in the icon change effect determination process of step E111-3 that the reserved icon is to be displayed in a special manner when the reserved icon is additionally displayed, the sub-CPU 130a sets a command to additionally display the reserved icon in the determined manner. When the command is sent to the image and sound control unit 140, an icon additional display effect is executed to additionally display the first reserved icon or the second reserved icon corresponding to the start winning command. Details of the icon additional display effect will be described later. The sub-CPU 130a checks the consistency of the number of reserved icons currently displayed and the first reserved number N1 or the second reserved number N2 updated in step S111-1, and if there is an inconsistency between them, controls so that the number of reserved icons is consistent with the first reserved number N1 or the second reserved number N2. This control will be described later.

When the processing of step E111-7 is executed, the sub-CPU 130a ends the processing shown in FIG. 25.

(An example of an icon change scenario table)
Here, an example of the icon change scenario table will be described. Fig. 26 is a diagram showing an example of the icon change scenario table. Here, the first reserved number N1 is "4", and the special chart change pattern OP3 or RP3 in which the SPSP reach performance is performed as the special chart change pattern is determined in advance.

In FIG. 26, "4 changes before" indicates the change four times before the change in the special pattern related to the received start winning command, "3 changes before" indicates the change three times before the change in the special pattern related to the received start winning command, "2 changes before" indicates the change two times before the change in the special pattern related to the received start winning command, and "1 change before" indicates the change one time before the change in the special pattern related to the received start winning command. Also, "the change" indicates the change in the special pattern related to the received start winning command. The colors such as "blue" and "red" written in each pattern indicate the reserved icon or the color of the icon during the period of each change.

For example, in scenario 1, all the icons from "4 changes before" to "the change in question" are "blue". This indicates that when the first reserved icon corresponding to the current winning is additionally displayed, it changes to "blue", and then remains "blue". Also, for example, scenario 9 indicates that when the first reserved icon corresponding to the current winning is additionally displayed, it is displayed in a normal state, "3 changes before" is also displayed in a normal state, it changes from the normal state to "blue" at "2 changes before", and it changes from "blue" to "red" at "1 change before". Also, scenario 15 indicates that when the first reserved icon corresponding to the current winning is additionally displayed, it is displayed in a normal state, "3 changes before" and "2 changes before", it changes from the normal state to "red" at "1 change before", and it changes from "red" to "gold" at "the change in question".

As is clear from the figure, if the result of the preliminary judgment is that there is a jackpot, the selection rate for the final display mode is gold > red > blue, and if it is judged to be a miss, the selection rate for the final display mode is blue > red > gold. Therefore, the display mode of the reserved icon or the icon in question has the highest probability of a jackpot in the order of "gold," "red," and "blue." Note that "rainbow" is only selected in the case of a jackpot, so the probability of a jackpot for "rainbow" is 100%. Also, "rainbow" can only change during "the relevant change." In other words, it will not change to "rainbow" while it is displayed as the first reserved icon, and it can only change to "rainbow" when it is displayed as the relevant icon.

26 is merely an example, and the performance control unit 100 stores icon change scenarios corresponding to the reserved number and the special chart change pattern. For example, an icon change scenario table for SP reach corresponding to the special chart change pattern OP2 or RP2 in which the reserved number is "4" and the SP reach performance is performed, and an icon change scenario table for N reach corresponding to the special chart change pattern OP1 or RP1 in which the reserved number is "4" and the N reach performance is performed, etc. are prepared in advance. In each table, the selection rate of each icon mode is different. For example, in the icon change scenario table for SP reach and the icon change scenario table for N reach, the rate at which "gold" is selected as the final display mode may be "0". In this case, when the reserved icon or the icon changes to "gold", it will always develop into an SPSP reach performance. Note that instead of preparing multiple icon change scenario tables corresponding to the reserved number and the special chart change pattern, one icon change scenario table including conditions related to the reserved number and the special chart change pattern may be prepared.

(Example of a start effect scenario table)
Here, an example of the start-time effect performance scenario table will be described. Fig. 27 is a diagram showing an example of the start-time effect performance scenario table. Here, the first reserved number N1 is "4", and the special chart fluctuation pattern OP3 or RP3 in which the SPSP reach performance is performed as the special chart fluctuation pattern is determined in advance.

Details will be given later, but there are two start-up effect modes, for example, "blue" and "red," with red indicating a higher chance of winning than blue.

As shown in FIG. 27, for example, in scenario 1, everything from "3 changes ago" to "the change in question" is "blue". This indicates that the current special symbol change (4 changes ago) has ended, and the start effect performance of the "blue" mode is performed in the next special symbol change (i.e., 3 changes ago), the start effect performance of the "blue" mode is also performed in "2 changes ago" and "1 change ago", and the start effect performance of the "blue" mode is also performed in the "change in question". Also, in scenario 14, the start effect performance of the "blue" mode is performed "1 change ago", and the start effect performance of the "red" mode is performed in the "change in question".

As is clear from the diagram, if the result of the pre-determination indicates a jackpot, red is more likely to be selected than blue as the start-up effect mode, and if a miss is determined, blue is more likely to be selected than red as the start-up effect mode. For this reason, the start-up effect mode "red" has a higher chance of being a jackpot than "blue." Note that there may be multiple other start-up effect modes in addition to these.

Also, like FIG. 26, the table in FIG. 27 is merely an example, and a start effect performance scenario table for SP reach and a start effect performance scenario table for N reach are prepared. Each table has a different rate at which the "blue" and "red" modes are selected. For example, in the start effect performance scenario table for N reach, even in the case of a jackpot, the probability that the "red" mode is selected is low, for example, "0". Note that a start effect performance scenario table that combines the SPSP reach table, SP reach table, and N reach table may be stored in advance in the performance control unit 130. Also, it is not necessary for the tables to be separated according to the number of reserved balls, and one table may be prepared regardless of the number of reserved balls.

(An example of a zone production scenario table)
Here, an example of the zone performance scenario table will be described. Fig. 28 is a diagram showing an example of the zone performance scenario table. Here, the first reserved number N1 is "4", and the special chart fluctuation pattern OP3 or RP3 in which the SPSP reach performance is performed as the special chart fluctuation pattern is determined in advance.

There are two types of zone effects, for example, a "strong zone" and a "weak zone," and the "strong zone" indicates a higher probability of winning than the "weak zone."

As shown in FIG. 28, for example, in scenario 1, the "weak zone" is displayed from "3 changes before" to the "relevant change". This indicates that the current special symbol change (4 changes before) will end, and a "weak zone effect" will be displayed at the next special symbol change (i.e., 3 changes before), and "weak zone effect" will also be displayed at "2 changes before" and "1 change before", and a "weak zone effect" will also be displayed at the "relevant change". Also, for example, in scenario 7, a "weak zone" effect will be displayed "1 change before", and a "strong zone effect" will be displayed at the "relevant change".

As is clear from the figure, if the result of the pre-determination indicates a jackpot, the "strong zone effect" is more likely to be selected as the zone effect mode than the "weak zone effect," and if the result indicates a miss, the "weak zone effect" is more likely to be selected than the "strong zone effect." For this reason, the "strong zone effect" has a higher chance of resulting in a jackpot than the "weak zone effect." Note that there may be multiple other zone effect modes in addition to these.

Also, like FIG. 26, the table in FIG. 28 is merely an example, and a zone performance scenario table for SP reach and a zone performance scenario table for N reach are prepared, with each table having a different rate at which "strong zone performance" and "weak zone performance" are selected. For example, in the zone performance scenario table for N reach, even in the case of a jackpot, the probability that "strong zone performance" will be selected is low, for example "0." Note that a zone performance scenario table that combines the SPSP reach table, SP reach table, and N reach table may be stored in advance in the performance control unit 130. Also, it is not necessary for the tables to be separated according to the number of reserved balls, and one table may be prepared regardless of the number of reserved balls.

(An example of a chance scenario table)
Here, an example of the chance eye performance scenario table will be described. Figure 29 is a diagram showing an example of the chance eye performance scenario table. Here, the first reserved number N1 is "4", and the special chart variation pattern OP3 or RP3 in which the SPSP reach performance is performed as the special chart variation pattern is determined in advance.

There are two types of chance eye effects, for example, "blue" and "red," with red indicating a higher chance of winning than blue.

As shown in FIG. 29, for example, in scenario 1, everything from "3 changes before" to "the change in question" is "blue". This indicates that the current special symbol change (4 changes before) has ended, and the next special symbol change (i.e., 3 changes before) will have a chance eye effect in the "blue" form, and chance eye effects in the "2 changes before" and "1 change before" will also have a chance eye effect in the "change in question" will also have a chance eye effect in the "blue" form. Also, in scenario 14, a chance eye effect in the "blue" form is performed "1 change before", and a chance eye effect in the "red" form is performed in the "change in question".

As is clear from the figure, if the result of the preliminary judgment is that there is a jackpot, red is more likely to be selected as the mode of the chance eye presentation than blue, and if it is judged to be a miss, blue is more likely to be selected than red. Therefore, as a mode of the chance eye presentation, "red" has a higher chance of leading to a jackpot than "blue." Note that there may be multiple other modes of the chance eye presentation other than these.

Also, like FIG. 26, the table in FIG. 29 is merely an example, and a chance eye performance scenario table for SP reach and a chance eye performance scenario table for N reach are prepared, with each table having a different rate at which the "blue" and "red" aspects are selected. For example, in the chance eye performance scenario table for N reach, even in the case of a jackpot, the probability that "blue" will be selected is low, for example, "0." Note that a chance eye performance scenario table that combines the SPSP reach table, SP reach table, and N reach table may be stored in advance in the performance control unit 130. Also, it is not necessary for the tables to be separated according to the number of reserved balls, and one table may be prepared regardless of the number of reserved balls.

(Processing of variable start command by the performance control unit 130)
Hereinafter, the fluctuation start command processing executed in the performance control unit 130 will be described with reference to Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the fluctuation start command processing in step E113 in Fig. 24.

The sub-CPU 130a analyzes the received fluctuation start command and determines the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot symbol or losing symbol), the special symbol fluctuation pattern, the current game state, the first reserved number U1, and the second reserved number U2 (step E113-1).

Next, the sub-CPU 130a performs a presentation mode setting process (step E113-2). Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, there are multiple presentation modes corresponding to the normal game state, a presentation mode corresponding to the probability game state, and a presentation mode corresponding to the time-saving game state. Here, when the presentation mode indicating the normal game state is currently set, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether the presentation mode change condition is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, changes the presentation mode. The presentation mode change condition may be, for example, that a predetermined number of jackpot judgments have been made since the current presentation mode was set, that a specific presentation has been made in the previous special pattern variation, etc. Note that each of the multiple presentation modes in the same game state may be referred to as a "stage." That is, in step E113-2, when the presentation mode change condition (stage change condition) is satisfied, one of the multiple stages in the presentation mode indicating the normal game state is selected, and the selected stage is set. In addition, if the current presentation mode does not correspond to the current game state determined in step E113-1, the sub-CPU 130a sets a presentation mode that corresponds to the game state.

The sub-CPU 130a then determines a variable presentation pattern based on the special chart variable pattern (step E113-3). The presentation control unit 130 stores a variable presentation pattern corresponding to the special chart variable pattern, and determines a variable presentation pattern corresponding to the special chart variable pattern. For example, if the special chart variable pattern is variable pattern OP3, a variable presentation pattern including an SPSP reach presentation is determined as the variable presentation pattern.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a determines the preview performance based on the variation performance pattern (step E113-4). For example, preview performances include a line preview, a step-up preview, a cut-in preview, etc., which indicate the possibility of a jackpot. Preview performances also include a confirmed performance, which indicates a jackpot. The sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to perform a preview performance based on the special chart variation pattern, and determines which preview performance to perform at what timing of the variation performance.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a determines the start-up action presentation (step E113-5). The start-up action presentation is a presentation using the presentation pattern 701 at the start of the special pattern variation. Details of the start-up action presentation will be described later.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a determines the pre-stop action display (step E113-6). The pre-stop action display is a display using the display pattern 701 that is performed before the special pattern is stopped and displayed. Details of the pre-stop action display will be described later.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a sets the icon change effect (step E113-7). Here, the icon change effect that changes the reserved icon or the icon in question is set according to the scenario determined in the icon change effect determination process. For example, if it is determined that the reserved icon will be changed when the current special pattern changes, the sub-CPU 130a sets the timing for changing the reserved icon, the mode of the icon change suggestion effect to be performed before changing the reserved icon, and the like. As a result, the icon change effect is performed while the current special pattern is changing. The sub-CPU 130a also sets the mode of the icon movement display effect for moving and displaying the reserved icon. Details of the icon movement display effect will be described later.

In the above, the display mode of the icon was determined in the icon change effect determination process of the start winning command process, but only the display mode of the reserved icon is determined in the icon change effect determination process, and the display mode of the icon may be determined in the processing of this step E113-7. In other words, the display mode of the icon may be determined when the special pattern related to that icon starts to change.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a sets the zone presentation (step E113-8). Here, the zone presentation is controlled according to the scenario determined in the above-mentioned zone presentation judgment process. For example, if it has been determined that a zone presentation will be started or the mode of the zone presentation will be changed during the current special pattern change, the sub-CPU 130a sets the timing for starting the zone presentation, the timing for changing the mode of the zone presentation, the mode of the zone suggestion presentation to be performed before starting (or changing) the zone presentation, and the like. In this way, the zone presentation is controlled (started or changed) during the current special pattern change.

In the above, the zone presentation (whether or not there is a zone presentation and its type) during the change of the pre-read target is determined in the zone presentation determination process of the start winning command process, but the zone presentation during the change prior to the change of the pre-read target is determined in the zone presentation determination process, and the zone presentation during the change of the pre-read target may be determined in the processing of this step E113-8. In other words, at the start of the change of the special pattern, it may be determined whether or not there is a zone presentation during that change, and its type.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a sets the start effect performance (step E113-9). Here, if the start effect performance determination process determines that a start effect performance is to be executed for the current variation of the special symbol, the sub-CPU 130a sets the start effect performance. This causes the start effect performance to be executed when the variation of the special symbol starts.

In the above, the start effect performance (whether or not to execute the start effect performance, and its mode) for the change of the pre-read target was determined in the start effect performance determination process of the start winning command process, but the start effect performance for the change prior to the change of the pre-read target is determined in the start effect performance determination process, and the start effect performance for the change of the pre-read target may be determined in the processing of this step E113-9. In other words, at the start of the change of the special pattern, it may be determined whether or not to execute the start effect performance for that change, and its mode.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a sets the chance eye effect (step E113-10). Here, if it is determined in the chance eye effect determination process that a chance eye effect will be executed in the current variation of the special symbol, the sub-CPU 130a sets the chance eye effect. As a result, the chance eye effect is executed before the variation of the special symbol stops.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a updates the first reserved number N1 or the second reserved number N2 (step E113-11). As a result, if the fluctuation start command is a command indicating the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the first reserved number N1 is decremented by "1", and if the command is a command indicating the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol, the second reserved number N2 is decremented by "1". Note that the sub-CPU 130a checks the consistency between the number of reserved icons currently displayed and the first reserved number N1 or the second reserved number N2 updated in step S113-11, and if there is an inconsistency, controls the number of reserved icons to be consistent with the first reserved number N1 or the second reserved number N2. This will be described in detail later.

Next, the sub-CPU 130a sets various commands for executing each of the set effects (step E113-12). The various commands are sent to the image/sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, whereby each of the set effects is executed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the image and audio control unit)
Next, a timer interrupt process performed in the image/audio control unit 140 will be described.

Figure 31 is a flow chart showing an example of a timer interrupt process performed in the image/audio control unit 140. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the overall CPU 141a of the image/audio control unit 140 repeatedly executes the series of processes shown in Figure 31 at regular intervals (e.g., 4 milliseconds) by interruption.

The general CPU 141a performs a changeover switch process (step E401). Here, when the changeover switch 22, which can be operated by a gaming store staff member, is operated, the volume value and/or the light intensity value is adjusted. Specifically, the general CPU 141a determines whether the changeover switch 22 has been operated based on a signal from the changeover switch 22, and when the changeover switch 22 has been operated, adjusts the volume value of the performance sounds (BGM and sound effects) output from the sound output device 9, the light intensity value of the backlights of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, and the light intensity value of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74. The volume value and light intensity value can be set within a predetermined adjustment range (for example, 1 to 5).

Next, the overall CPU 141a performs a volume adjustment process (step E402). Here, the volume value of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 is adjusted in response to an operation performed on the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the left button 192A or the right button 194A of the cross key 19 has been pressed based on a signal from the cross key detection switch 19a, and if the left button 192A or the right button 194A has been pressed, adjusts the volume value within the above-mentioned predetermined adjustment range.

Next, the overall CPU 141a performs a light intensity adjustment process (step E403). Here, in response to an operation performed on the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player, the light intensity values of the backlights of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, and the light intensity values of the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 74 are adjusted. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a determines whether the up button 191A or the down button 193A of the cross key 19 has been pressed based on a signal from the cross key detection switch 19a, and if the up button 191A or the down button 193A has been pressed, adjusts the light intensity value within the above-mentioned predetermined adjustment range.

At the start and end of the variable presentation, adjustments to the volume and light values using the cross key 19 are restricted (suppressed). Adjustments to the volume and light values using the cross key 19 are also restricted from the time the power to the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the main control unit 100 starts controlling the game (for example, during setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode, during the initial operation of each drive source of the board unit 500, etc.).

Next, the overall CPU 141a sets the animation (step E404). Specifically, when a command to execute various effects is received from the performance control unit 130, the overall CPU 141a determines the animation that corresponds to the received command.

Next, the overall CPU 141a sets the sound (step E405). Specifically, when a command to execute various effects is received from the performance control unit 130, the overall CPU 141a determines the sound that corresponds to the received command.

Next, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the frame time has elapsed (step E406). Here, the frame time is the time to display one frame of image, and is, for example, 1/30 seconds. That is, here, it is determined whether or not it is frame update timing to update the images displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71.

If the frame time has elapsed (step E406: YES), the overall CPU 141a performs drawing control processing (E407). Here, the overall CPU 141a causes the VDP 145 to generate an image according to the set animation. This causes the image next to the currently displayed image to be generated and displayed. By generating and displaying one frame of image at frame time (e.g., 1/30 seconds) intervals, for example, the first image display device 70 displays the changing effect pattern 701 and the movement of the hold icon. Specific examples of effects displayed on the first image display device 70 will be described later.

For example, when the main control unit 100 starts the variable display of the special symbol, a variable start command is sent from the main control unit 100. This variable start command is received by the performance control unit 130, and the variable performance pattern is determined by the above-mentioned variable start command processing. Then, a command to start the variable performance is sent from the performance control unit 130 to the image and audio control unit 140, and an image is generated by the VDP 145 at the next frame update timing after the command is received. Therefore, the start timing of the variable performance using the performance pattern 701 is delayed from the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol. Also, the start timing of the performance directly controlled by the performance control unit 130 or the lamp control unit 150 (for example, the display using the sub information display 80) may be shifted from or may coincide with the start timing of the variable performance using the performance pattern 701.

Next, the overall CPU 141a performs audio control processing (step E408). This causes the sound effects to be output. This concludes the explanation of the processing shown in FIG. 31.

(Lamp control unit timer interrupt processing)
Next, the timer interrupt process performed in the lamp control unit 150 will be described.

Figure 32 is a flow chart showing an example of a timer interrupt process performed in the lamp control unit 150. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the lamp CPU 150a of the lamp control unit 150 repeatedly executes the series of processes shown in Figure 32 at regular intervals (e.g., 4 milliseconds) by interruption.

The lamp CPU 150a controls the display of the sub information display 80 (step E501). For example, when the performance control unit 130 receives a command to start the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the lamp CPU 150a receives a command indicating the start of fluctuation from the performance control unit 130. In response to the command, the lamp CPU 150a performs a fluctuation display using the sub first fluctuation display 81 by blinking the LED of the sub first fluctuation display 81 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.5 second cycle). After the performance control unit 130 receives the fluctuation start command, the lamp CPU 150a continues to perform the fluctuation display using the sub first fluctuation display 81. In addition, when the performance control unit 130 receives a command to stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the lamp CPU 150a receives a command indicating the stop of fluctuation from the performance control unit 130, and ends the fluctuation display using the sub first fluctuation display 81 in response to the command.

In addition, in step E502, the lamp CPU 150a controls the movable performance device 73. The lamp CPU 150a operates the movable performance device 73 at the timing determined by the performance control unit 130.

In addition, in step E503, the lamp CPU 150a controls other devices. For example, the lamp CPU 150a causes the frame lighting device 10 to emit light in a predetermined manner, causes the board lighting device 74 to emit light, operates the button driving device 17b to operate the performance button 17, and causes the performance button light-emitting LED to emit light, at the timing determined by the performance control unit 130.

Next, we will explain specific examples of initializing various drive sources while changing settings, preparing to clear the RWM, checking settings, after changing settings, after clearing the RWM, and after checking settings.

(Example of initializing various drive sources while changing settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during a setting change will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during a setting change.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and a setting change operation (setting key switch 112a is ON and RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed, the setting change mode is started in the main control unit 100, and the state becomes a pre-start state before the control of the progress of the game is started.

At this time, the status confirmation display 68 displays a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed, and the various drive sources start operating (drive sources = ON) as their initial operation. In addition, a setting change notification is started to indicate that the settings are being changed and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (display of the setting change screen, and alternating output of the setting change voice "Settings are being changed" and the initial operation confirmation voice "Please also check the operation of the solenoid"). In addition, the current setting value (here, "4") is displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the time T2, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

If, at time T10, the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at time T9 has elapsed, the setting change mode and setting change notification are terminated, and the operation of the various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is terminated, and the display of the setting value on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is also terminated. Then, the main control unit 100 transitions from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the main information display 59, and the power-on notification described above begins. In addition, the initial operation of the various performance props (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second image display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control unit 130 begins, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are fully lit to begin confirmation of their illumination. Note that the initial operation of the various performance props ends after confirmation of their illumination on the information display 113 ends.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, all illumination of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Specific example of initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing RWM)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing the RWM will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of a performance when initializing various drive sources during preparation for clearing the RWM.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and an RWM clear operation (the RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed, the main control unit 100 starts an RWM clear preparation mode and enters a pre-start state before control of the progress of the game begins.

At this time, the status confirmation display 68 displays a status confirmation display indicating that preparations are being made to clear the RWM, and the various drive sources start operating (drive sources = ON) as their initial operation. In addition, an RWM clear preparation notification is started to inform the user that preparations are being made to clear the RWM and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (display of the clear preparation screen, alternating output of the notification voice saying "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and the initial operation confirmation voice saying "Please check the operation of the solenoid").

At the time T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

At time T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at time T9 has elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation notification end, and the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the main control unit 100 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the main information display 59, and the power-on notification described above begins. In addition, the initial operation of the various performance props (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second image display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control unit 130 begins, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are fully lit to begin confirmation of their illumination. Note that the initial operation of the various performance props ends after confirmation of their illumination on the information display 113 ends.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, all illumination of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Example of initializing various drive sources while checking settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation will be described with reference to Fig. 35. Fig. 35 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources during setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At timing T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and a setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned on) is performed, the main control unit 100 starts a setting confirmation mode and enters a pre-start state before control of the progress of the game begins.

At this time, the status confirmation display 68 displays a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being confirmed, and the various drive sources start operating (drive sources = ON) as their initial operation. Also, a setting confirmation notification is started to indicate that the settings are being confirmed and to prompt the user to confirm the operation of the various drive sources (display of the setting confirmation screen, alternating output of the setting confirmation voice "Settings are being confirmed" and the initial operation confirmation voice "Please also check the operation of the solenoid"). Also, the current setting value (here, "4") is displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the time T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF), and thereafter, the operation and stopping of the various drive sources is repeated from the time T3 to the time T10.

If, at time T10, the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed before the operation time of the various drive sources that began at time T9 has elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification end, and the operation of the various drive sources immediately stops (drive sources = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the display of the setting value on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 also ends. The main control unit 100 then transitions from the pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the main information display 59, and the power restoration notification described above begins. In addition, the initial operation of the various performance props (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second image display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control unit 130 begins, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are fully lit to begin confirmation of their illumination. Note that the initial operation of the various performance props ends after confirmation of their illumination on the information display 113 ends.

At timing T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, all illumination of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

In this way, according to this embodiment, in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening member 51, second large prize opening opening opening member 57) are initialized, so that when the game machine 1 (including only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 or only the board unit 500), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game results are being initially operated (in the pre-start state), the main information displays 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, round count display 66, right hit display 67) except for the status confirmation display 68 are in a non-display (non-operating) state, which prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control unit 100 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome are being initially operated, a setting change notification is issued to indicate that a setting change is being made and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (an RWM clear preparation notification to indicate that RWM clear is being prepared and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources, and a setting confirmation notification to indicate that a setting confirmation is being made and to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources). This allows the worker (factory worker, game store employee) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 to be informed that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, and allows the worker to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this embodiment, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game are initialized in the setting change modes (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode), so there is no need to create multiple states in the pre-start state before the game progress control begins, making it possible to reduce the development costs of the gaming machine 1 (shortening the development period, etc.).

In addition, according to this embodiment, when the pre-start state ends with a setting value confirmation operation (RWM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation), the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. This means that the initial operation of the various drive sources is not performed to a playable state, making it possible to avoid the inconvenience of confusing the operation of the various drive sources with the operation of the various drive sources according to the progress of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, in the pre-start state before the progress of the game is controlled, the initial operation of various drive sources is performed to operate movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game, and in the playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled, the initial operation of the movable presentation device 73 that does not affect the outcome of the game is performed. Therefore, two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are being initially operated, the large prize opening LED is kept off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57, and makes it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, an open signal is not output even though the first large prize opening 50 and the second large prize opening are open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control unit 100, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device, such as a hall computer, which collects information output from the gaming machine 1 collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from when the gaming machine is powered on until the control of the game progress begins, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control unit 100.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after the game progress control has started, so it is possible to check whether the game progress control has started and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, according to this embodiment, during the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on any of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d that displays the current setting value, so that the current setting value can be properly notified, ensuring convenience for the gaming establishment.

In this embodiment, the setting change notification, RWM clear preparation notification, and setting confirmation notification are configured not to display the text "Initial operation of drive sources" or "Please check the operation of solenoids" to encourage visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources, but such text may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the game progress control is started, all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are fully lit to check whether they are lit, but after the setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, or setting check mode, the lighting check may not be performed.

(Operation comparison table)
Using Fig. 36, the operation of the various drive sources (second start opening opening solenoid 48b, first big prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b, second big prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 at various operation timings (initial operation, big win game operation, auxiliary game operation in normal game state, auxiliary game operation in time-saving game state) is compared. Fig. 36 is a diagram showing the operation comparison at various operation timings of the various drive sources.

The time for one drive of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b is longer during initial operation than during auxiliary game operation during normal game mode. Therefore, it is possible to check during initial operation whether or not auxiliary game operation can be performed during normal game mode, which improves the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the driving time for each of the first large prize opening opening and closing solenoid 51b and the second large prize opening opening opening and closing solenoid 57b during initial operation is set to a value smaller than the driving time for each of the first large prize opening opening opening and closing solenoid 51b and the second large prize opening opening opening and closing solenoid 57b during jackpot game operation. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time during initial operation of the first large prize opening opening opening and closing solenoid 51b and the second large prize opening opening opening and closing solenoid 57b.

The time taken for one drive of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the time taken for one drive during auxiliary game operation during normal game mode. In this way, it is possible to check whether the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform auxiliary game operation during normal game mode during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the time required for one drive of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b during initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the time required for one drive of the auxiliary game operation during normal game mode. In this way, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time required for the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b during initial operation.

In addition, the time for one drive of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the time for one drive during auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to check whether the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the time for one drive of the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b during initial operation may be set to a value greater than the time for one drive during auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to check during initial operation whether the second start port opening/closing solenoid 48b can perform auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the driving time of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b and the second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b during initial operation may be set to the same value or approximately the same (similar) value as the driving time of one operation during jackpot game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b and the second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b are capable of jackpot game operation during initial operation, which makes it possible to improve the accuracy of the operation check.

In addition, the driving time of the first large prize opening opening solenoid 51b and the second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b during initial operation may be set to a value greater than the driving time during jackpot game operation. In this way, it is possible to check whether the first large prize opening opening opening solenoid 51b and the second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b are capable of jackpot game operation during initial operation, thereby improving the accuracy of the operation check.

(Modification of Initial Operation of Various Driving Sources)
A modified example of the initial operation of the various drive sources will be described below. This modified example differs from the above in that the various drive sources are initialized after the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, and the setting check mode are completed.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after changing settings)
A specific example of initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings will be described with reference to Fig. 37. Fig. 37 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing the various drive sources after changing the settings.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and a setting change operation (setting key switch 112a is ON, RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed, the setting change mode is started in the main control unit 100, and the state becomes a pre-start state before control of the progress of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the setting change notification described above is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "4") is displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the setting value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed, the setting change mode and setting change notification are terminated, the initial operation of the various drive sources is started, and the setting value displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and an initial operation notification (display of an initial operation in progress screen, output of an initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is initiated to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the main control unit 100 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the main information display 59, and the power-on notification described above begins. In addition, the initial operation of the various performance props (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, first image display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control unit 130 begins, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are fully lit to begin confirmation of their illumination. Note that the initial operation of the various performance props ends after confirmation of their illumination on the information display 113 ends.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Example of initializing various drive sources after clearing RWM)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources after clearing the RWM will be described with reference to Fig. 38. Fig. 38 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources after clearing the RWM.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and an RWM clear operation (the RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed, the main control unit 100 starts the RWM clear preparation mode and enters a pre-start state before the control of the game progress is started. At this time, the above-mentioned RWM clear preparation notification is started.

When the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed at timing T2, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operation of the various drive sources is started. At this time, an initial operation notification is started to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources (display of an initial operation screen and output of an initial operation confirmation voice saying "Please check the operation of the solenoids").

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the main control unit 100 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the main information display 59, and the power-on notification described above begins. In addition, the initial operation of the various performance props (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second image display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control unit 130 begins, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are fully lit to begin confirmation of their illumination. Note that the initial operation of the various performance props ends after confirmation of their illumination on the information display 113 ends.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

(Example of initial operation of various drive sources after checking the settings)
A specific example of initializing various drive sources after setting confirmation will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a diagram showing a timing chart and a performance example when initializing various drive sources after setting confirmation.

First, at timing T0, the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies (second start opening opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51, second large prize opening opening opening opening member 57) that affect the outcome of the game, such as by changing whether or not the game ball will enter a specific area (second start opening 47, first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) (ball entry difficulty), are in a stopped state.

In addition, the large prize opening LEDs that illuminate the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) in a predetermined manner during a round of play are turned off, and the main information display 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67, status check display 68), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display state (not activated, turned off, erased).

At the timing of T1, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and a setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is turned ON) is performed, the main control unit 100 starts a setting confirmation mode and enters a pre-start state before control of the progress of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is started. In addition, the current setting value (here, "4") is displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is turned OFF) is performed, the setting confirmation mode and setting confirmation notification are ended, the initial operation of the various drive sources is started, and the setting value displayed on the seven-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is erased and becomes hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is ended, and an initial operation notification (display of an initial operation in progress screen, output of an initial operation confirmation voice "Please check the operation of the solenoid") is started to prompt the user to check the operation of the various drive sources.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (here, 7 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial operation notification, the first operation of the various drive sources (drive sources = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, when the operation time of the various drive sources (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive sources = OFF).

At time T5, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at time T6, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At the timing T7, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing T8, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) of the various drive sources has elapsed, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive sources = OFF).

At timing T9, when the stop time (here, 0.512 seconds) has elapsed since the operation of the various drive sources stopped, the initial operation of the various drive sources and the notification of the initial operation end, and the main control unit 100 transitions from a pre-start state to a playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbols, display of normal symbols, display of number of reserved special symbols, display of number of reserved normal symbols, etc.) begin on the main information display 59, and the power-on notification described above begins. In addition, the initial operation of the various performance props (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second image display device 71, performance button 17) controlled by the performance control unit 130 begins, and all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d on the information display 113 are fully lit to begin confirmation of their illumination. Note that the initial operation of the various performance props ends after confirmation of their illumination on the information display 113 ends.

At timing T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the illumination check of the information display 113, the illumination of all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d ends and the display of performance information (here, the normal base value of the current play section) begins. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four play sections consisting of the current play section and the three previous play sections is displayed in sequence.

In this way, according to this modified example, in the pre-start state before the control of the game progress is started, various drive sources (second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, second large prize opening opening opening/closing solenoid 57b) for operating the movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game (second start opening/closing member 48, first large prize opening opening opening member 51, second large prize opening opening opening member 57) are initialized, so that when the gaming machine 1 (including only the gaming board 5 or only the board unit 500) is shipped from the factory or when it is replaced at the gaming facility (including replacement of only the gaming board 5 or only the board unit 500), it is possible to easily check the operation of the drive sources controlled by the main control means that controls the game progress.

In addition, according to this modified example, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome are being initially operated (in the pre-start state), the main information displays 59 (first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, first special symbol reserved display 63, second special symbol reserved display 64, normal symbol reserved display 65, number of rounds display 66, right hit display 67) except for the status confirmation display 68 are in a hidden (non-operated) state, which prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control unit 100 and allows it to concentrate on checking the operation of the various drive sources.

In addition, according to this modified example, when various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of a game are initially operated, an initial operation notification is issued to prompt the operator to check the operation of the various drive sources. This notifies the operator (factory worker, game store staff) who checks the operation of the gaming machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of the various drive sources, enabling the operator to appropriately check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game results are initialized after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is finished, so it is possible to appropriately check the operation without having to do complex operations such as checking the operation of various drive sources while changing the settings (RWM clear, setting confirmation).

In addition, according to this modified example, after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) ends, the operation of various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game begins after an operation standby time has elapsed. This allows for ample time between the end of the setting change (setting confirmation) and the start of operation checks of the various drive sources, making it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, the same initial operation notification is made regardless of whether the initial operation of the various drive sources for operating movable bodies that affect the game outcome is after the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, or the setting confirmation mode has ended. This simplifies the control of the initial operation notification, making it possible to reduce the development costs of the gaming machine 1 (shortening the development period, etc.).

In addition, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are being initially operated, the large prize opening LED is kept off, which avoids the inconvenience of the light from the large prize opening LED making it difficult to check the operation of the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57, and makes it possible to properly check the operation.

In addition, according to this modified example, in the pre-start state before the progress of the game is controlled, the various drive sources are initialized to operate the movable bodies that affect the outcome of the game, and in the playable state in which the progress of the game is controlled, the movable performance device 73 is initialized to not affect the outcome of the game. Therefore, the two types of initial operations can be checked in sequence, making it possible to properly check the operations.

In addition, according to this modified example, when the various drive sources for operating the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 and the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 are initially operated, no open signal is output even though the first large prize opening 50 and the second large prize opening are open. This prevents unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control unit 100, and also makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collection device, such as a hall computer, which collects information output from the gaming machine 1 collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

In addition, according to this modified example, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 (the display of the performance information is restricted) from when the gaming machine is turned on until the control of the progress of the game begins, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing burden from being placed on the main control unit 100.

In addition, according to this modified example, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of performance information is permitted) after the game progress control has started, so it is possible to check whether the game progress control has started and to inform the user that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, according to this modified example, during the setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, and setting confirmation mode, performance information is not displayed on any of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d that displays the current setting value, making it possible to properly notify the current setting value and ensuring convenience for the gaming establishment.

In addition, according to this modified example, the information display 113 is designed not to display setting values or performance information about the gaming machine during the initial operation of the various drive sources, so that the attention of the employees of the gaming establishment can be focused on checking the initial operation of the various drive sources, making it possible to accurately determine failures of the various drive sources.

In this modified example, after game progress control has started, all 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are fully lit to check whether they are on or off. However, after the setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, or setting check mode, the lighting check may not be performed.

(Special symbols change cyclically)
Next, a description will be given of the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61. Fig. 40 is a diagram for explaining the cyclical fluctuation of the special symbols.

As described above, the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of eight LEDs. The lighting patterns of these eight LEDs change at predetermined time intervals to display the changing special symbols. Note that, although the following describes the changing display of the first special symbol, the same applies to the second special symbol.

Specifically, when the gaming machine 1 is powered OFF, all eight LEDs are off (Figure 40(a)), but when the gaming machine 1 is powered ON and in the initial state (i.e., when the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner and a special game is not being played), the rightmost LED of the eight LEDs is on and the other LEDs are off (Figure 40(b)). The lighting state in Figure 40(b) indicates that the result of the jackpot determination is a miss.

When the first special symbol starts to change, the first and second LEDs from the left of the eight LEDs turn on, and the other LEDs turn off (Figure 40(c)). This state is maintained for 32 ms from the start of the first special symbol change.

When 32 ms have passed since the start of the display of the first special symbol, the second and third LEDs from the left of the eight LEDs will light up and the other LEDs will be turned off (Figure 40(d)). When another 32 ms have passed from the state of Figure 40(d), the third and fourth LEDs from the left of the eight LEDs will light up and the other LEDs will be turned off (Figure 40(e)). When another 32 ms have passed from the state of Figure 40(e), the fourth and fifth LEDs from the left of the eight LEDs will light up and the other LEDs will be turned off (Figure 40(f)). When another 32 ms have passed from the state of Figure 40(f), the fifth and sixth LEDs from the left of the eight LEDs will light up and the other LEDs will be turned off (Figure 40(g)). When another 32 ms have passed from the state of FIG. 40(g), the sixth and seventh LEDs from the left of the eight LEDs will be lit, and the other LEDs will be turned off (FIG. 40(h)). When another 32 ms have passed from the state of FIG. 40(h), the seventh and eighth LEDs from the left of the eight LEDs will be lit, and the other LEDs will be turned off (FIG. 40(i)). When another 32 ms have passed from the state of FIG. 40(i), the first and eighth LEDs from the left of the eight LEDs will be lit, and the other LEDs will be turned off (FIG. 40(j)). Then, when another 32 ms have passed from the state of FIG. 40(j), it returns to the state of FIG. 40(c). After that, the lighting modes of FIG. 40(c) to (j) are repeated until the variation time of the first special pattern has elapsed.

This type of LED lighting control is performed by the main control unit 100 in a timer interrupt process that is executed every 4 ms. For example, the main control unit 100 increments a counter by 1 each time it executes a timer interrupt process, and when the counter value becomes a multiple of 8, it controls the LED to be lit to be shifted one position to the right.

In this way, the first special symbol is displayed in a varying manner by changing the lighting state of the LEDs every 32 ms. The LED changes from (c) to (j) in Figure 40 are called cycle fluctuations. The period of the cycle fluctuation is 32 ms x 8 = 256 ms. The change in the lighting state of the LEDs in one cycle fluctuation (for example, a change from a state in which the first and second LEDs are lit to a state in which the second and third LEDs are lit) is sometimes called a "unit change." The period of one unit change is 32 ms. The period of the unit change is not limited to 32 seconds, and may be, for example, 28 ms.

The first special symbol repeats multiple cycles of fluctuation until the fluctuation time determined based on the result of the jackpot determination has elapsed. Then, after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate and the fluctuation time has elapsed, each LED lights up in a manner indicating a miss or a jackpot based on the result of the jackpot determination.

Note that, although two LEDs are lit at the same time in the cyclic variation of the special symbol here, the number of LEDs lit during the cyclic variation is not limited to this, and for example, one LED may be lit during the cyclic variation, and the lit LED may be changed every 32 ms or 28 ms. Also, although a case where multiple LEDs are lit in order from the left in the cyclic variation has been described here, the cyclic variation may also be executed by lighting multiple LEDs randomly.

(Image displayed on the first image display device 70)
Next, an image displayed on the first image display device 70 will be described. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a presentation mode corresponding to a game state is set. Specifically, in a normal game state, one of presentation modes A to C (stages A to C) is set. In a probability game state, presentation mode D is set, and in a time-saving game state, presentation mode E is set.

Figure 41 shows an example of an image displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in presentation mode A, which is set during normal game play.

As shown in FIG. 41, a background image is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70. The background image is an image that serves as the background for each image displayed on the screen (performance pattern 701, small pattern 702, first reserved icon HA, icon TI, first reserved number SHA, second reserved number SHB, and other preview images displayed during variable performances, etc.), and is an image with a lower display priority than each image. The images displayed on the screen are managed by multiple layers, and the background image is drawn on the innermost layer (the layer with the lowest display priority). The background image differs depending on the performance mode. In performance mode A (stage A), normal background image A is displayed, in performance mode B (stage B), normal background image B is displayed, and in performance mode C (stage C), normal background image C is displayed.

In each presentation mode, the background image operates in a predetermined manner (this is called "background presentation"). For example, characters or objects included in the background image may move on the screen, or part or the entire background image may move in a predetermined direction or rotate. This background presentation may be based on the result of a jackpot determination or on the result of a prior determination, and is performed while the special symbols are displayed in a changing state. Furthermore, the background presentation may be performed not only while the special symbols are displayed in a changing state, but also while they are still displayed. In this case, the presentation will not be based on the result of a jackpot determination. For example, a background presentation in which a predetermined character acts may be performed when a predetermined time arrives.

In the approximate center area of the screen of the first image display device 70, a performance pattern 701 corresponding to the special pattern is displayed. The performance pattern 701 is displayed superimposed on the background image (given priority over the background image). The performance pattern 701 is composed of three performance patterns 701 (each performance pattern 701 is referred to as a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern, from the left). For example, the performance pattern 1 701 is composed of a number image showing the numbers from "1" to "9" and a character image corresponding to the number image. Note that a pattern showing the alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be used as the performance pattern 701. In response to the start of the variable display of the special pattern executed by the first special pattern display device 60 or the second special pattern display device 61, the multiple performance patterns 701 start to display the variable, and in response to the stop of the variable display of the special pattern, the multiple performance patterns 701 are displayed in a stopped state.

The effect symbols 701 are displayed stationary for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a state that indicates the result of the jackpot determination (miss state, jackpot state). A jackpot state is a combination of the same effect symbols 701, such as "777" or "555," and a miss state is any other state.

The display mode of the performance pattern 701 differs depending on the performance mode. For example, in performance mode A, the display mode of the character image included in the performance pattern 701 is a first display mode, in performance mode B, it is a second display mode, and in performance mode C, it is a third display mode. Note that the character included in the performance pattern 701 may differ depending on the performance mode.

Details will be described later, but the performance pattern 701 performs a start-up action performance for a predetermined time from the start of the special pattern change, and after the start-up action performance, it performs, for example, a scrolling change in the vertical direction (changing display performance). Then, after the scrolling change, the performance pattern 701 performs a pre-stop action performance, and then displays a stop.

In addition, during the changing effects (starting action effects, scroll changes, etc.) of the effect pattern 701, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 depending on the result of the jackpot determination, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the execution of the jackpot game (special game).

In addition, a small pattern 702 is displayed in the lower left area of the screen. The small pattern 702 is a type of effect pattern corresponding to the first special pattern (or the second special pattern), and is composed of three small patterns 701 (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern). The small pattern 702 is a pattern smaller than the effect pattern 701, and is composed of number images showing numbers from "1" to "9" like the effect pattern 701, but does not include character images like the effect pattern 701. The small pattern 702 changes and displays according to the changing display of the special pattern, and is displayed stationary according to the stationary display of the special pattern. The display mode of the small pattern 702 is the same in all of the effect modes A to C. The display mode of the small pattern 702 may be the same regardless of the game state, or may differ depending on the game state.

In addition, a first hold icon display area 703A is provided in the lower left area of the screen. In the first hold icon display area 703A, a number of first hold icons HA corresponding to the first hold number (U1) of the first special pattern are displayed. The first hold icon display area 703A is divided into four areas. The first hold icon display area 703A is composed of a first area for displaying the rightmost first hold icon HA1, a second area for displaying the second-right first hold icon HA2, a third area for displaying the third-right first hold icon HA3, and a fourth area for displaying the fourth-right first hold icon HA4.

The icon display area 704 is provided to the right of the first hold icon display area 703A. While the special pattern is changing, the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 704. The icon TI has the same display form (similar shape) as the first hold icon HA, but the icon TI is a larger image than the first hold icon HA.

Each first reserved icon HA is an image indicating the reservation of the right to display the change of the first special pattern (determining a big win based on winning at the first starting hole 45). The icon TI is an image indicating the current change of the special pattern (also called the "change in question"). The first reserved icons HA are consumed in order starting from the side closest to the icon display area 704. Specifically, when the change of the current special pattern ends, the first reserved icon HA1 displayed in the first area of the first reserved icon display area 703A moves to the icon display area 704 and is displayed as the icon TI. At the same time that the first reserved icon HA1 moves to the icon display area 704, the first reserved icons HA2 to HA4 shift one area to the right, respectively, and are displayed as the first reserved icons HA1 to HA3.

The first hold icon HA and the icon TI are displayed in different display modes depending on the presentation mode. For example, in presentation mode A, diamond-shaped images are displayed as the first hold icon HA and the icon TI. In presentation mode B, fan-shaped images are displayed as the first hold icon HA and the icon TI. In presentation mode C, square images are displayed as the first hold icon HA and the icon TI.

In addition, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI operate in a predetermined display mode during the varying display and stationary display of the special pattern. Specifically, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI operate at a fixed cycle. Hereinafter, the operation of the first hold icon HA or the icon TI may be referred to as "periodic operation." The first hold icon HA and the icon TI perform periodic operations in the same or nearly the same manner. The mode of periodic operation differs depending on the presentation mode.

For example, in the performance mode A, during the variable display and stop display of the special pattern, the diamond-shaped first reserved icon HA and the icon TI repeat a first periodic operation in which the icon HA shifts from a first state tilted 25 degrees to the left to a second state tilted 25 degrees to the right over one second, and then returns to the first state over one second. That is, in the performance mode A, the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI perform a first periodic operation with a period of two seconds. Also, in the performance mode B, the fan-shaped first reserved icon HA and the icon TI perform a second periodic operation different from the first periodic operation during the variable display and stop display of the special pattern. For example, the fan-shaped first reserved icon HA and the icon TI repeat an enlarged state and a reduced state at a fixed period (the same or different period as when set in the performance mode A) as a second periodic operation. In addition, in presentation mode C, the square first hold icon HA and the icon TI perform a third periodic action (e.g., a rotation action) at a fixed cycle (the same as or different from when presentation mode A is set).

In addition, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI can change from the normal state (white) to a special state (blue, red, gold, rainbow) different from the normal state in any of the presentation modes A to C. The special state indicates a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal state, with blue, red, gold, and rainbow indicating higher expectation in that order. The first hold icon HA and the icon TI perform periodic operations in the same manner whether they are displayed in the normal state or in the special state. Note that the manner of periodic operation of the first hold icon HA and the icon TI may be different when they are displayed in the special state and when they are displayed in the normal state. In addition, the manner of periodic operation of the first hold icon HA and the icon TI may be different depending on whether they are blue, red, gold, or rainbow among the multiple special states. For example, when the icon is blue, the icon may perform periodic operations in a first state, and when the icon is red, the icon may perform periodic operations in a second state in which the movement is larger (or the movement speed is faster) than the first state. Also, there may be a change suggestion mode (e.g., a blinking mode) that suggests the possibility that the first hold icon HA or the icon TI may change to a special mode. When the first hold icon HA or the icon TI is displayed in a change suggestion mode, the same periodic operation as when in the normal mode may be performed, or a different periodic operation may be performed. Also, when the first hold icon HA or the icon TI is displayed in a change suggestion mode, the same periodic operation as when in the special mode may be performed, or a different periodic operation may be performed.

The lower right area of the screen also displays a first number reserve SHA, which is a numerical representation of the first reserved number (U1) indicating the reserved number of variable displays of the first special symbol, and a second number reserve SHB, which is a numerical representation of the second reserved number (U2) indicating the reserved number of variable displays of the second special symbol. The display manner of the first number reserve SHA and the second number reserve SHB is the same in any presentation mode and in any game state.

The icon display area 704 is formed on a predetermined pedestal image. The first hold icon display area 703 may also be formed on a predetermined pedestal image.

In addition, in the normal game state, a game ball does not generally enter the second starting hole 47, but if a game ball enters the second starting hole 47, a second hold icon HB indicating a hold on the variable display of the second special pattern (a jackpot determination based on a ball entering the second starting hole 47) is displayed in an area different from the first hold icon display area 703A (for example, the area to the right of the icon display area 704). Up to four second hold icons HB are displayed depending on the second hold number (U2).

In addition, in this embodiment, the first image display device 70 displays the changes in the performance pattern 701, but the first image display device 70 and/or the second image display device 71 may display the changes in the performance pattern 701. Also, the first image display device 70 may display the changes in the performance pattern 701, and the second image display device 71 may display the changes in the small pattern 702. Also, the first image display device 70 may display the changes in the performance pattern 701 and the small pattern 702, and the second image display device 71 may display the first hold icon HA, the second hold icon HB, and the hold icon TI.

Figure 42 shows an example of an image displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in presentation mode D, which is set when the game is in a guaranteed bonus game state.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the high probability game state, presentation mode D is set, and a background image for presentation mode D (high probability game background image) is displayed. In addition, presentation pattern 701 that is different from the presentation pattern in the normal game state is displayed. Specifically, presentation pattern 701 in the high probability game state includes number images showing the numbers "1" to "9," and does not include a character image.

In addition, a small symbol 702 is displayed in the lower left area of the screen. The display mode and display position of the small symbol 702 in presentation mode D (high probability game state) are the same as in presentation modes A to C (normal game state). Note that the display mode and display position of the small symbol 702 may be different between the normal game state and the high probability game state, the display mode may be the same but the display position may be different, or the display position may be the same but the display mode may be different.

In addition, in the performance mode D, a second reserved icon display area 703B is provided in the lower right area of the screen for displaying a number of second reserved icons HB corresponding to the second reserved number (U2) of the second special pattern. To the left of the second reserved icon display area 703B, a corresponding icon display area 704 is provided for displaying the corresponding icon TI.

The second reserve icon HB is an image indicating the reservation of the right to display the change in the second special pattern (determining a jackpot based on winning at the second starting hole 47), and up to four are displayed (HB1 to HB4). Like the first reserve icon HA, the second reserve icons HB are consumed in order starting from the side closest to the icon display area 704. Specifically, when the change in the current special pattern ends, the leftmost second reserve icon HB1 moves to the icon display area 704 and is displayed as the icon TI. At the same time that the second reserve icon HB1 moves to the icon display area 704, the second reserve icons HB2 to HB4 shift leftward and are displayed as the second reserve icons HB1 to 3.

The first reserved number SHA and the second reserved number SHB are also displayed in the lower right area of the screen. The display mode and display position of the first reserved number SHA and the second reserved number SHB are the same as in the normal game mode. Note that the display mode and/or display position of the first reserved number SHA and the second reserved number SHB may differ between the normal game mode and the special game mode.

Although not shown, during the time-saving game state, presentation mode E is set. During presentation mode E, the background image is different from that during the high probability game state, but the presentation symbol 701, small symbol 702, second reserved icon HB, icon TI, first reserved number SHA, and second reserved number SHB are the same as during the high probability game state. The display mode and/or display position of any of these may be different between the time-saving game state and the high probability game state. For example, the display mode and/or display position of presentation symbol 701 may be different between the time-saving game state and the high probability game state, and the display mode and display position of small symbol 702 may be the same.

(Performance accompanying the changing display of special symbols)
Next, the effects associated with the display of the special symbols will be described. Figures 43 and 44 are timing charts showing an example of the effects from the start of the first special symbol's change to its stop when the big win determination in the normal game state determines that the big win is a miss. Figures 43 and 44 explain the effects when the normal miss change is performed in the normal game state. Figures 45 to 49 are diagrams showing examples of the effects at each timing in Figures 43 and 44.

As shown in FIG. 43, before time t0, the first special symbol display 60 (and the second special symbol display 61) displays a stopped special symbol, and the first reserved number U1 shown by the first special symbol reserved display 63 (and the second reserved number U2 shown by the second special symbol reserved display 64) is zero (FIG. 45(a)). Specifically, only the rightmost LED of the eight LEDs on the first special symbol display 60 is lit, indicating a miss. The two LEDs on the first special symbol reserved display 63 are turned off. The LED on the sub-first variable display 81 is turned off, and the two LEDs on the sub-first reserved display 83 are also turned off. In addition, in the first image display device 70, the customer waiting performance is not being performed, and the performance pattern 701 and the small pattern 702 are displayed stopped in a manner indicating a miss (for example, "144"), superimposed on the normal background image. Additionally, the first hold icon HA and the corresponding icon TI are not displayed, and the first number hold SHA and the second number hold SHB are set to "0." Additionally, no background music is being output from the speaker. Additionally, a background effect is being performed in which the normal background image operates in a predetermined manner.

At time t0, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, a jackpot determination is made for the first special symbol, and the first special symbol display 60 starts displaying the first special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45(b), the first and second LEDs from the left of the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display 60 are lit and the other LEDs are turned off until 32 ms have elapsed since the start of the display of the first special symbol. After time t0, the first special symbol repeats the above-mentioned cycle of fluctuation until the special symbol fluctuation time set by the fluctuation pattern setting process has elapsed. Also, at time t0, the LED of the sub first fluctuation display 81 remains turned off, and the performance symbol 701 and the small symbol 702 remain stopped and displayed. Also, the BGM remains unoutputted. Meanwhile, the background performance continues.

Next, at time t1, the performance control unit 130 receives a change start command from the main control unit 100, and the performance starts in response to the reception of this change start command (FIG. 45(c)). Specifically, before the first cycle change of the first special symbol ends, a start-up action performance using the performance symbol 701 starts. In addition, a change display performance using the small symbol 702 and a change display (flashing display) of the sub first change display 81 start. In addition, an icon addition display performance in which the first hold icon HA1 is additionally displayed is performed. In addition, normal BGM starts to be output from the speaker. The type of normal BGM differs depending on the performance mode. In addition, when the performance symbol 701 starts to change, a performance sound indicating the expectation of a jackpot may be output based on the result of the jackpot judgment. In addition, the background performance is performed at time t1 as well, and the background performance continues thereafter.

More specifically, in the start-up action performance using the performance symbols 701, the performance symbols 701 move in a predetermined manner. For example, as each performance symbol 701 starts to move toward the top of the screen, the character image in the performance symbol 701 moves. This start-up action performance is performed over a predetermined time (e.g., 30 to 45 frame times; 1 to 1.5 seconds) and over multiple cycles of the special symbol. Specifically, the image and sound control unit 140 stores an animation video (data showing the action pattern at the start of the change) consisting of multiple frames for causing the performance symbol 701 to move in a predetermined action pattern, and the start-up action performance is performed by playing the animation video. In FIG. 45(c), an image of the moment when each performance symbol 701 starts moving is displayed.

There are multiple modes of start-up action presentation, and animation videos (data showing the action pattern at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to each mode are pre-stored in the gaming machine 1 (specifically, the image and audio control unit 140). For example, one of the multiple modes of start-up action presentation is to move one performance pattern 701 upward a predetermined distance, then stop it, and move it downward while accelerating. The execution time (performance time) may be different or the same depending on each mode of start-up action presentation. Examples of the multiple modes of start-up action presentation will be described later.

The three performance patterns 701 on the left, center, and right may each perform the starting action in the same manner, or the three performance patterns 701 on the left, center, and right may each perform the starting action in a different manner. Also, the three performance patterns 701 may each perform the starting action at the same timing, or they may perform the starting action at different timing. Here, an example of a performance in which the three performance patterns 701 perform the starting action at the same timing is shown.

The mode of the start-up action presentation using the presentation symbol 701 may differ depending on the type of presentation symbol 701 (any of "1" to "9"), the presentation mode, or the expected probability of a jackpot (the variation pattern of the special symbol). The mode of the start-up action presentation may also suggest the content of the presentation that will follow. For example, a particular mode of the start-up action presentation may suggest that there is a high probability that a reach presentation will follow.

In the start-up action presentation using the performance pattern 701, unlike the variable display presentation using the performance pattern 701 described below, the character images and numbers in the performance pattern 701 are displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to see. Specifically, in the variable display presentation using the performance pattern 701, the performance pattern 701 is displayed semi-transparently and moves at high speed, making it difficult for the player to recognize which number of the performance pattern 701 from "1" to "9" is currently displayed. In contrast, in the start-up action presentation using the performance pattern 701, the performance pattern 701 is displayed in a normal manner that is not semi-transparent, and is not displayed moving at high speed, making it easy for the player to recognize which number of the performance pattern 701 from "1" to "9" is currently operating.

The variable display performance using the small pattern 702 is a performance in which three small patterns, left, center, and right, are scrolled from top to bottom. In each of the left, center, and right columns, the small patterns "1" to "9" are repeatedly displayed in a variable display at high speed in a predetermined cycle. The predetermined cycle of the small patterns is different from the cycle of the periodic operation of the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI. The predetermined cycle of the small patterns may be shorter or longer than the cycle of the periodic operation of the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI. During the variable display performance of the small pattern 704, each small pattern is displayed semi-transparently and moves at high speed, making it difficult for the player to recognize the numbers of each small pattern. When the variable display performance using the small pattern 702 is started, the small pattern 702 transitions from a stopped display state to a scrolling display state (high-speed changing state) as shown in FIG. 45(c).

At time t1, an icon addition display performance is started to display the first reserved icon HA1. The icon addition display performance is an animated video that is performed over a plurality of frame times (e.g., 10 frame times; 1/3 seconds) that are shorter than the start operation performance. There are a plurality of modes of the icon addition display performance. For example, in a first mode of the icon addition display performance, the first reserved icon HA1 with a transparency of 50% is displayed at the start of the display, the transparency decreases as time passes, and the first reserved icon HA1 with a transparency of 0% (i.e., the normal first reserved icon HA1) is displayed after a predetermined time (e.g., after 10 frame times). In a second mode of the icon addition display performance, a relatively small first reserved icon HA1 is displayed at the start of the display, and is enlarged as time passes, and the first reserved icon HA1 with a normal size is displayed after a predetermined time (e.g., after 10 frame times). In which of the plurality of modes the icon addition display performance is performed may be determined according to the performance mode, or may be determined by lottery. In addition, during the icon addition display performance, the icon may operate in a predetermined operation mode different from the above-mentioned periodic operation. For example, the first hold icon HA1 may appear to rotate, creating an additional display effect for the first hold icon HA1, and after the additional display effect for the first hold icon HA1 ends, a periodic operation in which the first hold icon HA1 oscillates at a predetermined cycle may be performed.

In addition, together with the icon addition display effect, a winning sound may be output in response to the game ball entering the starting hole. The winning sound may be output according to the result of a jackpot determination or a pre-determination, and the winning sound may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.

At time t1, a change display (flashing LED display) using the sub-first change display 81 is started. The shaded circle in FIG. 45(c) represents a flashing LED display. The period of the flashing display of the sub-first change display 81 is shorter than the period of the cyclic operation of the first hold icon HA. At time t1, the LED on the left side of the sub-first hold display 83 lights up. The value indicated by the first number hold SHA remains at "0", and similarly, the value indicated by the second number hold SHB remains at "0".

Next, at time t2 (e.g., during the second cycle of the first special symbol), the animation of the first reserved icon HA1 being added ends and the first reserved icon HA1 being added is completed, and an icon moving display effect is started in which the first reserved icon HA1 being added moves from the first area of the first reserved icon display area 703A to the icon display area 704 (Figure 45(d)). The icon moving display effect is an animated video that is performed over multiple frame times (e.g., 15 frame times; 0.5 seconds).

Note that there are multiple modes of the icon movement display performance. Specifically, the mode of the icon movement display performance is determined according to the performance mode. Note that the mode of the icon movement display performance may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, when a specific first reserved icon HA performs an icon movement display performance in a specific mode, it may indicate that there is a high possibility of a jackpot occurring when the special pattern corresponding to that specific first reserved icon HA changes. Also, when multiple first reserved icons HA perform an icon movement display performance in a specific mode, it may indicate that there is a high possibility of a jackpot occurring when the special pattern corresponding to any of the multiple first reserved icons HA changes.

At time t2, the start-up action presentation using the presentation pattern 701 continues, with each presentation pattern 701 being moved upward from time t1, and the character image in the presentation pattern 701 moving further. The variable display presentation using the small pattern 702 and the variable display (flashing LED display) using the sub-first variable display 81 also continue. Meanwhile, at time t2, the LED on the left side of the sub-first hold display 83 goes out. That is, the LED on the left side of the sub-first hold display 83 lights up when the first hold icon HA1 starts to be displayed, and goes out when the first hold icon HA1 starts to move to the icon TI. The LED on the left side of the sub-first hold display 83 may be lit until the first hold icon HA1 is displayed as the icon TI (between times t1 and t3).

From time t2 to t3, as shown in FIG. 45(e), the performance pattern 701 moves further upward. The variable display performance using the small pattern 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 continue. The icon moving display performance continues, and the first pending icon HA1 becomes semi-transparent and is displayed moving.

Next, at time t3, the icon movement display effect ends, and the movement of the first hold icon HA1 to the icon display area 704 ends (Figure 45 (f)). As a result, the first hold icon HA1 is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the icon TI is displayed larger than the first hold icon HA1. Specifically, the first hold icon HA1 is gradually enlarged as it moves toward the icon display area 704, and is displayed at the size of the icon TI when it is displayed in the icon display area 704. At time t3, the start-up operation effect using the effect pattern 701 continues, and the effect pattern 701 moves further upward. In addition, the variable display effect using the small pattern 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 also continue.

Here, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 704 performs a predetermined periodic operation at a fixed cycle (for example, every 2 seconds). Specifically, animation data (for example, an animation consisting of 60 frames) for the periodic operation of the icon TI is stored in the gaming machine 1, and this animation is repeatedly played while the icon TI is displayed. That is, when the last frame of the animation for the periodic operation of the icon TI is displayed, the display starts again from the first frame (the beginning). Similarly, animation data for the periodic operation of the reserved icon HA is stored in advance in the gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, the periodic operation of the icon TI and the periodic operation of the reserved icon HA are the same operation. When one or more first reserved icons HA and the icon TI are displayed simultaneously, these icons (multiple first reserved icons HA and the icon TI) perform periodic operations in synchronization.

The animation data for the periodic movement of the icon TI and the animation data for the periodic movement of the hold icon HA may be the same data or different data. In addition, the manner of the periodic movement differs depending on the presentation mode that is set.

The first hold icon HA1 performs the same periodic operation while it is being moved (time t2 to t3). The first hold icon HA1 also performs the same periodic operation at the time it is additionally displayed (time t1 to t2). The first hold icon HA does not have to perform a predetermined periodic operation while it is being moved (while the icon moving display performance is being executed). That is, when the special pattern starts to change, the first hold icon HA may temporarily stop its periodic operation. In this case, the first hold icon HA starts its periodic operation from the beginning (from the first state) after moving to the right one area by the icon moving display performance. The first hold icon HA also does not have to perform a periodic operation while it is being additionally displayed (while the icon additional display performance is being executed).

From time t3 to t4, as shown in FIG. 46(g), the initial operation of the performance pattern 701 continues to be executed. Specifically, the performance pattern 701 reverses its upward movement and gradually accelerates downward. In addition, the variable display performance using the small pattern 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 continue. In addition, the icon TI continues to operate in a predetermined cycle.

Next, at time t4, the start-time operation performance of the performance pattern 701 ends, and the variable display performance using the three performance patterns 701 begins (FIG. 46 (h)). In this variable display performance using the performance pattern 701, the performance pattern 701 is displayed semi-transparently and scrolled at high speed. Specifically, in each of the left area, the center area, and the right area, a pattern row in which multiple performance patterns 701 including the numbers "1" to "9" are arranged vertically is displayed and moved downward at high speed. The image sound control unit 140 stores animation videos (data showing the operation pattern during the variable display) for the variable display performance (scroll display) of the performance pattern 701, and when the playback of the animation corresponding to the start-time operation performance ends, the playback of the animation for the variable display performance begins. In addition, the variable display performance using the small pattern 702 and the variable display using the sub first variable display 81 continue. In addition, the icon TI continues a predetermined periodic operation.

There are multiple modes of the variable display performance using the performance pattern 701, and animation videos (data showing the movement pattern during the variable display) corresponding to each mode are stored in advance. For example, one of the multiple modes of the variable display performance is a mode in which multiple types of performance patterns 701 (performance patterns of "1" to "9") lined up in the vertical direction are displayed moving at high speed from top to bottom. Examples of the multiple modes of the variable display performance of the performance pattern 701 will be described later.

In contrast, there is only one mode of the variable display performance using the small symbols 702. In the variable display performance using the small symbols 702, a vertical row of the small symbols 702 "1" to "9" is displayed moving downward at high speed in each of the left, center, and right areas. There is also only one mode of the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81. In the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81, the LED blinks at a predetermined time interval (for example, 0.5 second intervals).

In addition, there may be multiple modes of the variable display performance using the small pattern 702, and there may be multiple modes of the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81. In this case, the number of modes of the variable display performance using the performance pattern 701 is greater than the number of modes of the variable display performance using the small pattern 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81.

The three performance patterns 701 on the left, center, and right each perform a variable display performance in the same manner. Note that there may be cases where the three performance patterns 701 on the left, center, and right each perform a variable display performance in a different manner.

In addition, the manner in which the variable display effect using the effect pattern 701 is performed may differ depending on the type of effect pattern 701 (any of "1" to "9"), may differ depending on the effect mode, or may differ depending on the expectation of a jackpot (variation pattern of the special pattern).

At time t5, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the left LED of the two LEDs on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 lights up (Figure 46 (i)). This notifies that the first reserved number U1 has become "1" (i.e., one right to determine a jackpot related to the first special symbol has been reserved). Even at time t5, the variable display performance using the performance symbol 701, the variable display performance using the small symbol 702, and the variable display using the sub first variable indicator 81 continue. Also, the icon TI continues to operate in a predetermined cycle.

Next, at time t6, in response to the performance control unit 130 receiving the start winning command from the main control unit 100, the left LED of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 lights up and the first number reserved SHA increases from "0" to "1" (Figure 46 (j)). The increase of the first number reserved SHA from "0" to "1" occurs in one frame time. In other words, at the next frame update timing after the performance control unit 130 receives the start winning command, the first number reserved SHA is updated from "0" to "1".

At time t6, the additional icon display performance of the first reserved icon HA1 is started. This causes an additional display animation of the first reserved icon HA1 to be displayed, and over a number of frame times (e.g., 10 frame times; 0.33 seconds), the manner in which the first reserved icon HA1 is additionally displayed (e.g., changing from a semi-transparent state to a normal, non-transparent state) is displayed. In addition, a winning sound may be output in conjunction with this additional icon display performance.

From time t6 to t7, the variable display performance using the performance pattern 701, the variable display performance using the small pattern 702, and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 continue. In addition, the first hold icon HA1 continues to be displayed after being additionally displayed by the icon additional display performance. In addition, the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI perform a predetermined periodic operation in synchronization (Figure 46 (k)).

Here, while the icon TI is performing a predetermined periodic operation, a game ball may enter the first start hole 45 at any timing. No matter when the first hold icon HA1 is additionally displayed while the icon TI is performing a predetermined periodic operation, the first hold icon HA1 after the additional display performs a predetermined periodic operation in synchronization with the icon TI. That is, when the icon TI is in the first state, the first hold icon HA1 also becomes the first state, and when the icon TI is in the second state, the first hold icon HA1 also becomes the second state. The same is true when the first hold icons HA2 to HA4 are additionally displayed. That is, each first hold icon HA and the icon TI perform a periodic operation in synchronization with each other, regardless of the timing at which they are additionally displayed. In other words, no matter when the game ball enters the first start hole 45, each first hold icon HA and the icon TI perform a periodic operation in synchronization with each other.

Any method may be used to synchronize the first hold icon HA and the icon TI. For example, when the icon TI is tilted 25 degrees to the right due to a predetermined periodic operation, when the icon additional display performance of the first hold icon HA1 is started (FIG. 46(j)), the first hold icon HA1 may be displayed in a state tilted 25 degrees to the right at the start of the additional display of the first hold icon HA1. Specifically, at the start of the additional display of the first hold icon HA1, it is determined which frame of the animation for the periodic operation of the icon TI is displayed, and the playback of the animation for the periodic operation of the first hold icon HA1 is started from the same frame. Thereafter, the two animations are displayed one frame at a time at the frame update timing, so that the icon TI and the first hold icon HA1 perform a predetermined periodic operation in synchronization. Even during the additional display of the first hold icon HA1, the first hold icon HA1 performs a periodic operation in synchronization with the icon TI. In addition, the animation for the icon addition display effect may be part of the animation for the periodic operation of the first hold icon HA1.

In addition, after the additional display of the first hold icon HA1 is completed by the icon additional display performance, the first hold icon HA1 may start a periodic operation in synchronization with the periodic operation of the icon TI. In this case, during the icon additional display performance of the first hold icon HA1, the first hold icon HA1 may not perform a periodic operation, or may perform a periodic operation without synchronizing with the icon TI. For example, when the additional display of the first hold icon HA1 is completed by the icon additional display performance, it is determined which frame of the animation for the periodic operation of the icon TI is being displayed, and the playback of the animation for the periodic operation of the first hold icon HA1 may start from the same frame. Thereafter, by playing the two animations according to the passage of time, the icon TI and the first hold icon HA1 will perform a predetermined periodic operation in synchronization.

In addition, after the additional display of the first hold icon HA1 is completed by the icon additional display performance, the first hold icon HA1 may not perform a periodic operation until the last frame of the animation for the periodic operation of the icon TI is displayed, and at the point where the animation for the periodic operation of the icon TI is played from the beginning, the animation for the periodic operation of the first hold icon HA1 may start playing from the beginning. Thereby, thereafter, the icon TI and the first hold icon HA1 will perform a predetermined periodic operation in synchronization.

Next, at time t7, for example, the left performance pattern 701 (left pattern) of the three performance patterns 701 starts a pre-stop operation performance (Figure 46 (l)). At this point, the right pattern and the middle pattern continue the variable display performance. In addition, the variable display performance using the small pattern 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 also continue. Specifically, all three small patterns 702 continue the variable display performance. In addition, the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI continue to operate in a predetermined cycle in sync (Figure 46 (l)).

Here, the pre-stop action effect is an effect in which the performance pattern 701 is operated in a predetermined manner after the performance pattern 701 has been changed (scrolled) and before the performance pattern 701 is stopped (temporarily or permanently stopped). In the pre-stop action effect, the performance pattern 701 is displayed in a normal manner that is not translucent, and moves slowly, for example, from the top to the bottom of the screen. In addition, the character image in the performance pattern 701 moves in a predetermined manner. Because the performance pattern 701 is displayed in a normal manner that is not translucent and moves at a relatively slow speed, the player can easily recognize which of the performance patterns 701 from "1" to "9" is performing the pre-stop action effect. In addition, because the character image in the performance pattern 701 moves, interest is increased.

Note that a "temporary stop" of the performance pattern 701 refers to a state in which the performance pattern 701 is fluctuating slightly, for example by swaying slightly up and down or left and right, or by deforming slightly, and refers to a state in which the performance pattern 701 has not stopped completely. In contrast, a "full stop" of the performance pattern 701 refers to a state in which the performance pattern 701 has stopped completely.

There are multiple modes of pre-stop motion performance using performance pattern 701, and animation videos (data showing the motion pattern before the movement stops) corresponding to each mode are stored in advance. For example, there is a mode in which the performance pattern 701 moves slowly from top to bottom while the character waves its hands and stops at a predetermined position. Depending on each mode, the execution time (performance time) may be different or the same.

The three performance patterns 701 on the left, center, and right may each perform the pre-stop action performance in the same manner, or the three performance patterns 701 on the left, center, and right may each perform the pre-stop action performance in a different manner. Also, the three performance patterns 701 may each perform the pre-stop action performance at the same timing, or they may perform the pre-stop action performance at different timing. Here, an example of a performance in which the three performance patterns 701 each perform the pre-stop action performance at different timing is shown.

The manner in which the pre-stop action is performed may differ depending on the type of performance symbol 701, the performance mode, or the expected probability of a jackpot (the variation pattern of the special symbol).

Here, the combination of the start operation performance, the change display performance, and the pre-stop operation performance using the performance pattern 701 is determined according to the pattern data stored in advance. For example, in the change performance based on the first pattern data, after the start operation performance of the first mode is performed, the change display performance of the first mode is performed, and after a predetermined time has passed, the pre-stop operation performance of the first mode is performed. Pattern data that determines the flow of such a series of performances is stored in advance. For this reason, for example, after the start operation performance of the first mode, the change display performance of the first mode or the second mode is performed, but the change display performance of the third mode is not performed. The relationship between the change display performance and the pre-stop operation performance is the same. In other words, after the change display performance of the first mode, the pre-stop operation performance of the first mode or the second mode is performed, but the pre-stop operation performance of the third mode is not performed. An example of a series of start operation performance, change display performance, and pre-stop operation performance using the performance pattern 701 will be described later.

In this way, by storing in advance pattern data that stores combinations of start-time action effects, variable display effects, and pre-stop action effects using the performance pattern 701, the start-time action effects, variable display effects, and pre-stop action effects using the performance pattern 701 can be performed in sequence without any awkwardness. Note that, instead of using such pattern data to select the start-time action effects, variable display effects, and pre-stop action effects, a start-time action effect, variable display effects, and pre-stop action effects of any one of multiple aspects may be selected by lottery using random numbers, for example. In this case, a specific combination of aspects may be prevented from being selected by prohibition processing. For example, a combination of a start-time action effect of a first aspect, a variable display effect of a second aspect, and a pre-stop action effect of a third aspect may be prevented from being selected by prohibition processing.

Between times t7 and t8, the left pattern performs a pre-stop action performance for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) (FIG. 47(m)), and at time t8, the left pattern temporarily stops (FIG. 47(n)). When the left pattern temporarily stops, an effect may be added to the left pattern for just a moment (e.g., 0.5 seconds) as shown in FIG. 47(n). This effect is an image that is different from the effect image in the start effect performance, and is an image that emphasizes the performance pattern 701. Between times t7 and t8, the right pattern and the middle pattern continue the variable display performance, and the variable display performance using the small pattern 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 also continue. In addition, the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI continue to operate in a predetermined cycle in synchronization.

After that, at time t9, the pre-stop action performance by the right pattern starts (Figure 47 (o)). The pre-stop action performance by the right pattern may be the same as the pre-stop action performance by the left pattern, or it may be different. While the pre-stop action performance by the right pattern is being executed (times t9 to t10), the left pattern is temporarily stopped, and the middle pattern is performing a variable display performance (Figure 47 (p)). During this time, the variable display performance using the small pattern 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 continue, and the first pending icon HA1 and the icon TI continue to operate in a predetermined cycle.

Then, at time t10, the right symbol temporarily stops (Figure 47 (q)). When the right symbol temporarily stops, an effect may be added to the right symbol for just a moment, as when the left symbol temporarily stops. Even at time t10, the middle symbol continues the variable display performance, and the variable display performance using the small symbol 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 also continue. Also, the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI continue to operate in a predetermined cycle.

Next, at time t11, the pre-stop action performance using the middle symbol begins (Figure 47 (r)). The pre-stop action performance using the middle symbol may be the same as the pre-stop action performance using the left and right symbols, or it may be different. While the pre-stop action performance using the middle symbol is being executed (times t11 to t12), the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped (Figure 48 (s)). During this time, the variable display performance using the small symbol 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 continue, and the first pending icon HA1 and the icon TI continue to operate in a predetermined cycle.

Then, at time t12, the middle symbol temporarily stops, and the three performance symbols 701 temporarily stop (Figure 48 (t)). Note that when the middle symbol temporarily stops, an effect may be added to the middle symbol for just a moment. Also, when the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol temporarily stop, no effect may be added, and when the three performance symbols 701 temporarily stop (i.e., when the third performance symbol 701 temporarily stops), an effect may be added to each of the three performance symbols 701. Even at time t12, the variable display performance using the small symbol 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 continue. Also, the first pending icon HA1 and the icon TI continue to operate in a predetermined cycle.

At time t13, a predetermined period of time (e.g., 1 second) after the three performance symbols 701 temporarily stop, the first special symbol is displayed as stopped in a losing state on the first special symbol display 60 (Figure 48 (u)). At this time t13, the temporary stop of the three performance symbols 701, the variable display performance using the small symbol 702, and the variable display using the first variable display 81 are continuing. Also, the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI are continuing their predetermined cyclical operation.

Next, at time t14, in response to the performance control unit 130 receiving a fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 100, the three performance symbols 701 come to a complete stop and the small symbols 702 are displayed as stopped (Figure 48 (v)). In other words, the three small symbols 702 go from a state in which they are displaying fluctuations (high-speed fluctuations) to a stopped display without going through a stop-time operation display like the performance symbol 701. Also, the LED of the sub-first fluctuation display 81 goes out, and a stop display is performed using the sub-first fluctuation display 81.

When the three performance symbols 701 stop, the small symbol 702 stops, and the sub-first variable display 81 stops (or after these stops), the icon TI starts disappearing. Here, the icon TI disappears as an animation that is performed over a number of frames (e.g., 10 frames), and the icon TI gradually disappears. In this disappearance, for example, the transparency of the icon TI gradually increases, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.4 seconds) has passed, the icon TI disappears (is erased) (i.e., is made invisible). Note that another aspect of the icon TI disappearance may be to gradually reduce the size of the icon TI and make it disappear after a predetermined time has passed.

Next, at time t15, the disappearance effect of the icon TI ends, and the icon TI completely disappears (FIG. 48 (w)). Between times t14 and t15, the first special symbol is still displayed. The icon TI and the first reserved icon HA continue to operate periodically even while the disappearance effect of the icon TI is being executed. The first reserved icon HA continues to operate periodically even when the disappearance effect of the icon TI ends. Note that the icon TI and the first reserved icon HA may temporarily stop operating (end animation) during the disappearance effect of the icon TI. That is, when the special symbol is displayed temporarily, the icon TI and the first reserved icon HA may temporarily stop operating periodically. After the icon TI disappears, the first reserved icon HA may temporarily stop operating periodically, or the icon TI may disappear after the icon TI and the first reserved icon HA temporarily stop operating periodically.

Then, at time t16, a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, a jackpot determination is made for the reserved first special symbol, and the first special symbol display 60 starts to display the first special symbol in a variable manner based on the result of the jackpot determination (Figure 48 (x)). Also, of the two LEDs on the first special symbol reserved display 63, the left LED goes out.

Between time t14 and t16, the main stop of the three performance symbols 701, the stopped display of the small symbols 702, and the stopped display of the sub-first variable display 81 continue. The first pending icon HA1 also continues its predetermined cyclical operation. The background performance also continues during this time. The output of normal BGM also continues. Note that while the disappearance performance of the icon TI is being performed, the icon TI may continue to perform the predetermined cyclical operation, or may not perform the predetermined cyclical operation.

Next, at time t17, the performance control unit 130 receives a change start command from the main control unit 100, and each performance is started in the same manner as described above (Fig. 49 (y)). Specifically, before the first cycle of the first special symbol is completed, the start operation performance using the performance symbol 701 and the change display performance using the small symbol 702 are started. In addition, the icon movement display performance of the first reserved icon HA1 is started. In addition, of the two LEDs of the sub first reserved indicator 83, the left LED is turned off, and the first number reserved SHA is decreased from "1" to "0". The decrease of the first number reserved SHA from "1" to "0" is performed in one frame time. In other words, at the next frame update timing after the performance control unit 130 receives the change start command, the first number reserved SHA is updated from "1" to "0". In addition, the background performance continues even at time t17. In addition, the output of the normal BGM is also continued.

Then, in the same manner as above, at time t18, the movement of the first hold icon HA1 to the icon display area 704 ends, and the first hold icon HA1 is displayed as the icon TI (Fig. 49 (z)). Next, at time t19, the start-up operation performance using the performance pattern 701 ends, and the variable display performance using the performance pattern 701 begins (Fig. 49 (z2)). In addition, when the periodic operation of the first hold icon HA and the icon TI is temporarily stopped in response to the stopping of the special pattern, the first hold icon HA and the icon may be cyclically operated from the beginning after the first hold icon HA is shifted in response to the start of the next special pattern. In other words, the animation for the cyclic operation may be started from the beginning. Alternatively, when the periodic operation of the first hold icon HA and the icon TI is temporarily stopped in response to the stopping of the special pattern, the first hold icon HA may be shifted in response to the start of the next special pattern, and the periodic operation of the first hold icon HA and the icon may be resumed from the state before the temporary stop.

In addition, in Figures 45 to 49, an example of a performance in which the three performance patterns 701 simultaneously perform a start-time action performance, and after the variable display performance, the performance patterns 701 perform a pre-stop action performance in the order of left, right, and center has been described. In other performances, the three performance patterns 701 may each perform a start-time action performance at a different timing. Also, the order in which the three performance patterns 701 stop is not limited to this. For example, the three performance patterns 701 may simultaneously perform a pre-stop action performance and temporarily stop at the same time. Also, for example, the performance patterns 701 may perform a pre-stop action performance in the order of right, left, and center, and the performance patterns 701 may temporarily stop in this order. Also, for example, the left and right patterns may simultaneously perform a pre-stop action performance, and the left and right patterns may temporarily stop first, and then the center pattern may perform a pre-stop action performance and temporarily stop. Also, the order in which the performance patterns 701 perform a pre-stop action performance and the order in which the performance patterns 701 temporarily stop may be different. For example, if the left symbol starts its pre-stop motion performance and then the right symbol starts its pre-stop motion performance, the right symbol may temporarily stop at the same time as the left symbol, or the right symbol may temporarily stop first.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second period in which at least one of the three performance patterns 701 performs the pre-stop operation performance is longer than the first period in which at least one of the three performance patterns 701 performs the start-time operation performance. For example, in the first period, the three performance patterns 701 may start the start-time operation performance at the same time and then end the start-time operation performance at the same time, or the three performance patterns 701 may start the start-time operation performance at the same time and then end the start-time operation performance at different timings. In addition, in the second period, the three performance patterns 701 may start the pre-stop operation performance at different timings and then end the pre-stop operation performance at different timings, or the three performance patterns 701 may start the pre-stop operation performance at the same time and then end the pre-stop operation performance at the same time. In any case, the second period is longer than the first period. In addition, the period in which one performance pattern 701 performs the pre-stop operation performance is longer than the period in which one performance pattern 701 performs the start-time operation performance. The relationship between these periods may be reversed. That is, the first period during which at least one of the three performance patterns 701 performs a start-up motion performance may be longer than the second period during which at least one of the three performance patterns 701 performs a pre-stop motion performance. Also, the period during which one performance pattern 701 performs a start-up motion performance may be longer than the period during which one performance pattern 701 performs a pre-stop motion performance.

Here, we will explain several examples of a series of start action effects, changing display effects, and pre-stop action effects using the effect pattern 701.

Default change In the default change, when the special pattern starts to change, the performance pattern 701 floats upward for a moment, then moves downward in a start-up action. After the start-up action, a change display effect is performed in which the semi-transparent performance pattern 701 moves from top to bottom at high speed (vertical scrolling). After that, in the pre-stop action effect, the performance pattern 701 moves from top to bottom, changing from a semi-transparent state to a non-semi-transparent state, and stops with an effect.

Reverse vertical scroll fluctuation In the reverse vertical scroll fluctuation, when the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the performance pattern 701 sinks down for a moment, then moves upward in a start-up action performance. After the start-up action performance, a variable display performance is performed in which the semi-transparent performance pattern 701 moves from bottom to top at high speed (scrolls vertically in reverse). After that, in the pre-stop action performance, the performance pattern 701 moves from bottom to top, changing from a semi-transparent state to a non-semi-transparent state, and stops with an effect.

Horizontal rotation change In the horizontal rotation change, when the special pattern starts to change, the performance pattern 701 turns to the right for a moment, then flips to the left and rotates horizontally in a start-up action performance. After the start-up action performance, a change display performance is performed in which the semi-transparent performance pattern 701 rotates horizontally at high speed in place. After that, in the pre-stop action performance, the performance pattern 701 changes from a semi-transparent state to a non-semi-transparent state while rotating horizontally at a relatively slow speed, and stops with an effect.

・Expansion change In the expansion change, the performance pattern 701 expands when the special pattern starts to change, and a start-time action performance is performed in which the performance pattern 701 expands and moves from top to bottom while remaining expanded. After the start-time action performance, a change display performance is performed in which the semi-transparent performance pattern 701 moves from top to bottom at high speed (vertical scrolling). After that, in the pre-stop action performance, the performance pattern 701 moves from top to bottom while remaining expanded, stops with an effect, and returns to its original size.

Reel Fluctuation In the reel fluctuation, when the special pattern 701 starts to fluctuate, reel-shaped images appear in the left, center, and right areas, and a start-up action is performed in which each reel-shaped image starts to rotate. The reel-shaped image 1 includes a performance pattern showing the numbers "1" to "9." After the start-up action, a change display performance is performed in which the reel-shaped images rotate at high speed in the left, center, and right areas. After that, in the pre-stop action performance, the three reel-shaped images stop with an effect. The performance patterns contained in each reel stop in a horizontal row, and the three performance patterns stop.

The multiple operating modes of these performance patterns 701 ("default change", "reverse vertical scroll change", "horizontal rotation change", "expansion change", "reel change") may suggest the result of the jackpot determination. Specifically, "default change" is normally selected, and "default change" does not suggest the result of the jackpot determination. When a performance other than "default change" is performed, the possibility of a jackpot occurring in that change may be higher than when "default change" is performed. Furthermore, a performance other than "default change" may be executed based on the result of a prior determination. In other words, a performance other than "default change" may be performed as a look-ahead performance.

Furthermore, the multiple operation modes of these performance symbols 701 ("default change", "reverse vertical scrolling change", "horizontal rotation change", "expansion change", "reel change") may not indicate the result of the jackpot determination. For example, the multiple operation modes of the performance symbols 701 may be determined according to the performance mode. Furthermore, regardless of the result of the jackpot determination, a performance other than "default change" (for example, reverse vertical scrolling change) may be selected with a predetermined probability, and when a performance other than "default change" is selected, the selected performance (reverse vertical scrolling change) may be performed continuously across the changes of multiple special symbols.

The timing at which the effect is added to each performance pattern 701 in the pre-stop action performance may be the same or different. For example, when the performance patterns 701 stop in the order of left, right, and center, the left pattern may perform the pre-stop action performance and then temporarily stop with an effect, the right pattern may perform the pre-stop action performance and then temporarily stop with an effect, and then the center pattern may perform the pre-stop action performance and then temporarily stop with an effect. Also, when the performance patterns 701 stop in the order of left, right, and center, the left pattern may perform the pre-stop action performance and then temporarily stop without an effect, then the right pattern may perform the pre-stop action performance and then temporarily stop without an effect, and then the center pattern may perform the pre-stop action performance and then temporarily stop, and an effect may be added to each of the three performance patterns 701.

In the above example, when the special symbol is displayed as stopped and the first reserved number (U1) is "0", if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the LED on the left side of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 is momentarily lit. In another example, when the special symbol is displayed as stopped and the reserved number is zero, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the LED on the left side of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 may not be lit.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance symbol performs a start-up action performance in a predetermined manner in response to the start of the special symbol variation. After that, the performance symbol starts a variation display performance. While the start-up action performance by the performance symbol is being performed, the small symbol 702 and the sub-first variation display 81 have already started their variation display. The start-up action performance can draw attention to the performance symbol, increasing interest. Since the start-up action performance is performed before the variation display performance of the performance symbol, it may be difficult for the player to know whether the variation display of the special symbol has started, but since the small symbol 702 and the sub-first variation display 81 start their variation display first, the player can easily recognize the start of the variation of the special symbol.

In addition, for the performance symbol 701, after a start-up action performance in which the performance symbol 701 is operated in a predetermined manner, the variable display performance of the performance symbol 701 begins, but for the small symbol 702, the variable display performance begins without a start-up action performance in which the small symbol 702 is operated in a predetermined display manner. While the start-up action performance of the performance symbol 701 increases interest, the small symbol 702 starts its variable display without a start-up action performance, allowing the player to easily recognize the start of the special symbol's change.

In addition, after the performance pattern performs a start-up action performance in response to the start of the special pattern change, the change display begins, and while the start-up action performance of the performance pattern is being executed, the pending information (first number pending SHA, first pending icon HA, sub-first pending display 83) controlled by the performance control unit 130 is reduced. Since the start-up action performance is performed before the performance pattern change display performance, depending on the start-up action performance, it may be difficult for the player to know that the pending has been consumed (that the special pattern has started to change); however, since the pending information is reduced during the start-up action performance, the player can easily recognize that the pending has been consumed (that the special pattern has started to change).

In addition, after the performance pattern performs a start-up action performance in response to the start of the special pattern change, the change display begins, and while the start-up action performance of the performance pattern is being executed, each first hold icon HA starts to shift (for example, movement from the first hold icon HA1 to the icon TI, movement from the first hold icon HA2 to the first hold icon HA1, movement from the first hold icon HA3 to the first hold icon HA2, etc.). Since the start-up action performance is performed before the change display performance of the performance pattern, depending on the start-up action performance, it may be difficult for the player to know that the hold has been consumed (that the special pattern has started to change), but since the first hold icon HA moves first, the player can easily recognize that the hold has been consumed (the special pattern has started to change).

In addition, after the performance pattern performs a start-up operation performance in response to the start of the special pattern change, the change display begins, and while the start-up operation performance of the performance pattern is being executed, the shift movement of each first hold icon HA (for example, movement from the first hold icon HA1 to the icon TI, movement from the first hold icon HA2 to the first hold icon HA1, movement from the first hold icon HA3 to the first hold icon HA2, etc.) is completed. Since the start-up operation performance is performed before the change display performance of the performance pattern, depending on the start-up operation performance, it may be difficult for the player to know that the hold has been consumed (that the special pattern has started to change), but since the movement of the first hold icon HA is completed first, the player can easily recognize that the hold has been consumed (the special pattern has started to change).

In addition, after the performance pattern performs a start-up action display in response to the start of the special pattern change, the change display begins, and while the start-up action display of the performance pattern is being executed, the first hold icon HA1 begins to move to the corresponding icon TI. Because the start-up action display is performed before the performance pattern change display display, depending on the start-up action display, it may be difficult for the player to know that the hold has been consumed (that the special pattern has started to change); however, because the first hold icon HA1 begins to move to the corresponding icon display area 704 first, the player can easily recognize that the special pattern has started to change.

In addition, after the performance symbol performs a start-up action display in response to the start of the special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation display begins, and the icon TI is displayed while the start-up action display of the performance symbol is being executed. Because the start-up action display is performed before the fluctuation display display of the performance symbol, depending on the start-up action display, it may be difficult for the player to know that the reserved amount has been consumed (that the special symbol fluctuation has started); however, because the icon TI indicating the current special symbol fluctuation is displayed first, the player can easily recognize that the special symbol fluctuation has started.

In addition, after the performance pattern performs a start-up operation performance in response to the start of the special pattern change, the change display begins, and while the start-up operation performance of the performance pattern is being executed or while the change display is being executed, the first hold icon HA performs a cyclic operation in a predetermined display mode. Therefore, the start-up operation performance can draw attention to the performance pattern, and by operating the first hold icon HA in a predetermined display mode before the change display of the performance pattern, attention can also be drawn to the first hold icon HA, improving interest.

In addition, if a game ball enters the first start hole 45 when there is no reserved change of the special pattern, the first reserved icon HA1 is additionally displayed during the start operation presentation, and after the first reserved icon HA1 is additionally displayed, the first reserved icon HA1 moves to the icon display area 704. This additional display of the first reserved icon HA1 allows the player to easily recognize that a change has started due to a new game ball entering. Furthermore, the additionally displayed first reserved icon HA1 moves to the icon display area 704 and is displayed as the icon IT, allowing the player to intuitively recognize that a jackpot determination corresponding to this icon has been made. Also, the additional display of the first reserved icon HA1, along with the LED on the left side of the sub first reserved indicator 83 turning on and off, allows the player to easily recognize that a change based on a new winning has started.

While the first hold icon HA1 is additionally displayed and the LED on the left side of the sub-first hold display 83 is lit, the value indicated by the first number hold SHA remains at "0" (Figure 45 (c)). The additional display of the first hold icon HA1 and the lighting of the LED on the left side of the sub-first hold display 83 may give the player the misconception that the first hold number U1 has increased (i.e., the right to determine the jackpot has been reserved in the main control unit 100), but by displaying the actual first hold number U1 using the first number hold SHA, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

In addition, after the performance pattern performs a start-up action performance in response to the start of the special pattern variation, the variation display begins, and while the performance pattern's start-up action performance or variation display is being executed, the icon TI performs a cyclical operation in a predetermined display mode. Therefore, the start-up action performance can draw attention to the performance pattern, and by operating the icon TI in a predetermined display mode before the variation display of the performance pattern, attention can also be drawn to the icon TI, improving interest.

In addition, after the performance symbol performs a start-up action display in response to the start of the special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation display begins, and while the start-up action display is being executed, BGM output begins. Because BGM output begins before the performance symbol fluctuation display begins, the player can be made aware of the fluctuation of the special symbol. In addition, because BGM output begins before the performance symbol fluctuation display begins, the start of the game can be made smoother, and the player can become more immersed in the game than if the performance symbol fluctuation display began suddenly.

In addition, after the special symbol starts to change, the effect symbol performs a start-up action effect, and the change display starts. When the start-up action effect is executed, background music can be output. Because background music is output when the start-up action effect is executed, the start of the game can be made smoother, and the player can easily become immersed in the game compared to when the effect symbol changes and displays suddenly start.

In addition, after the performance symbol performs the start-up action performance in response to the start of the special symbol variation, the variation display begins, and the BGM that was being output before the start-up action performance was executed continues to be output during the start-up action performance. Because the BGM is output before the start-up action performance is executed, the start of the game can be made smoother, and the player can easily become immersed in the game compared to when the start-up action performance of the performance symbol or the variation display starts suddenly.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the variable display of the special symbol, it is possible to execute a variable display by the performance symbol and a variable display by the small symbol, and during the stopped display of the special symbol, it is possible to execute a stop display by the performance symbol and a stop display by the small symbol. After the variable display by the performance symbol (pre-start action display and variable display display), a pre-stop action display is executed in which the performance symbol is operated in a predetermined manner, and during the pre-stop action display, a variable display by the small symbol is executed. By executing a pre-stop action display using the performance symbol before the stopped display of the performance symbol, it is possible to draw attention to the performance symbol and increase interest. In addition, the pre-stop action display may confuse the player as to whether the special symbol is variable or has stopped, but by executing a variable display by the small symbol during the pre-stop action display, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special symbol is variable, and to maintain the expectation of a big win.

In addition, in this embodiment, while a performance pattern is performing a pre-stop action performance in one area (e.g., the right area), the performance pattern may perform a pre-stop action performance in the same or different manner in another area (middle area), or a variable display performance may be performed in another area (middle area). This allows the pre-stop action performance to be performed with different timing for each performance pattern (left, middle, right pattern), or pre-stop action performances to be performed simultaneously, improving interest. For example, if one performance pattern (e.g., the right pattern) is performing a pre-stop action performance while another performance pattern (middle pattern) is performing a variable display performance, the change will not end as it is, but rather expectations for another development will increase.

In addition, in this embodiment, a variable performance using the performance pattern can be executed while the special pattern is being displayed while it is being displayed while it is stopped. After the variable performance using the performance pattern (pre-start action performance and variable display performance), a pre-stop action performance is executed in which the performance pattern is operated in a predetermined manner, and then the performance pattern is displayed stopped. During the pre-stop action performance, the special pattern is executing a variable performance. By performing a pre-stop action performance using the performance pattern before the performance pattern is displayed stopped, attention can be drawn to the performance pattern, increasing interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, on the premise that the performance pattern stops and is displayed after the pre-stop action performance, the icon disappears after the pre-stop action performance is performed. By performing a pre-stop action performance using the performance pattern, attention can be drawn to the performance pattern, increasing interest. When the performance pattern is stopped after being operated by the pre-stop action performance, it may be difficult to understand the timing of the stop because it changes from a moving state to a stopped state, but by disappearing the icon after the pre-stop action performance of the performance pattern, it is possible to clearly notify that the fluctuation of the special pattern has ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the icon is displayed during the pre-stop action performance, on the premise that the performance pattern stops and is displayed after the pre-stop action performance, and the icon disappears after the performance pattern stops and is displayed. By performing a pre-stop action performance using the performance pattern, it is possible to draw attention to the performance pattern and increase interest. By making the icon disappear after the performance pattern stops and is displayed, it is possible to clearly notify that the variation of the special pattern has ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, on the premise that the performance symbol and small symbol are stopped and displayed after the performance symbol performs a pre-stop action performance, after the small symbol is stopped and displayed, a disappearance performance is executed in which the icon disappears. By performing a pre-stop action performance using the performance symbol, attention can be drawn to the performance symbol, and interest can be increased. By disappearing the icon after the small symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to clearly notify that the variation of the special symbol has ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance symbols and small symbols are stopped and displayed after the performance symbols perform a pre-stop action performance. The small symbols are stopped and displayed without performing a pre-stop action performance that causes the small symbols to move in a predetermined manner. By performing a pre-stop action performance using the performance symbols, attention can be drawn to the performance symbols, increasing interest. Since the small symbols are stopped and displayed without performing a pre-stop action performance, it is not confusing for the player, and it is possible to clearly notify that the variation of the special symbols has ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the premise is that the performance pattern stops after performing the pre-stop action performance, and BGM continues to be output during the pre-stop action performance of the performance pattern and while the performance pattern is stopped and displayed. This ensures continuity of the performance and allows for a smooth transition to the next change.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are multiple operation modes for the start-up action performance using the performance pattern, and the start-up action performance is performed in any of the multiple operation modes. Regardless of the operation mode in which the start-up action performance is performed, the variable display using the small pattern 702 and the sub-first variable display 81 starts first. Also, depending on the operation mode of the start-up action performance using the performance pattern, the time until the variable display performance of the performance pattern differs. Also, regardless of the operation mode in which the start-up action performance is performed, the variable display mode of the small pattern 702 and the sub-first variable display 81 is the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are multiple operation modes for the start-up action performance using the performance patterns, and regardless of the operation mode, there is a pattern in which the order in which the three performance patterns, left, center, and right, perform the start-up action performance is the same. For example, regardless of the operation mode of the start-up action performance, there is a pattern in which the three performance patterns start the start-up action performance simultaneously. Also, regardless of the operation mode, there is a pattern in which the start-up action performance starts in the order of the left pattern, right pattern, and center pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are multiple operation modes for the pre-stop action performance using the performance patterns, and regardless of the operation mode, there is a pattern in which the order in which the three performance patterns, left, center, and right, perform the pre-stop action performance is the same. For example, regardless of the operation mode of the pre-stop action performance, there is a pattern in which the three performance patterns start the pre-stop action performance simultaneously. Also, regardless of the operation mode, there is a pattern in which the pre-stop action performance starts in the order of the left pattern, right pattern, and center pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, the icon movement display effect that moves the hold icon (first hold icon HA or second hold icon HB) has multiple operating modes. For example, there may be a pattern in which the hold icon shifts straight to the side, and a pattern in which the hold icon rises slightly and moves sideways. Also, for example, the operating mode of the icon movement display effect may differ depending on the effect mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the likelihood of winning a jackpot varies depending on the operation mode of the start-up operation performance using the performance pattern. For example, the likelihood of winning a jackpot is higher in the second operation mode of the start-up operation performance than in the first operation mode. On the other hand, the likelihood of winning a jackpot does not vary depending on the operation mode of the icon movement display performance of the pending icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, the expectation level (the expectation level of a jackpot in the current special pattern fluctuation, or the expectation level of a jackpot in the next or subsequent special pattern fluctuation) differs depending on the operation mode of the pre-stop operation performance using the performance pattern. For example, the expectation level is higher in the second operation mode than in the first operation mode of the pre-stop operation performance. On the other hand, the expectation level does not differ depending on the operation mode of the icon movement display performance of the reserved icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation mode of the start-up action performance using the performance pattern is selected and executed from among multiple operation modes regardless of the set performance mode (stage), but the operation mode of the icon movement display performance may be selected according to the performance mode (stage).

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation mode of the pre-stop action performance using the performance pattern is selected and executed from among multiple operation modes regardless of the set performance mode (stage), but the operation mode of the icon movement display performance may be selected according to the performance mode (stage).

In addition, regardless of which action mode is being performed, the start-up action will end after the icon movement display has ended.

In this embodiment, the icon TI is made to disappear in response to the reception of a stop fluctuation command, but the timing of the icon TI disappearance is not limited to this. For example, the icon TI may be made to disappear when the fluctuation time included in the fluctuation start command has elapsed after the fluctuation start command is received. Also, the icon TI may be made to disappear when the next fluctuation start command is received or when a customer waiting command is received.

In addition, in the above, in the case of a normal miss fluctuation, the icon TI is made to disappear in response to receiving a fluctuation stop command, but as described below, the icon TI may be made invisible at a specified timing during the fluctuation of the special pattern other than when the special pattern stops.

(Volume and light adjustment operations when fluctuation starts and stops)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the volume of the sound related to the performance (BGM, sound effects, character voice, etc.) can be adjusted during the variable display of the special symbol and during the stopped display of the special symbol by operating a predetermined button of the cross key 19 (for example, the up button 191A or the down button 193A). In addition, the light intensity of the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74 can be adjusted during the variable display of the special symbol and during the stopped display of the special symbol by operating another button of the cross key 19 (for example, the left button 192A or the right button 194A). The volume of the sound related to various errors (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.) is not changed by operating the cross key 19, and the volume of the sound related to the error (error notification sound) is always set to the maximum value. Below, the control when the cross key 19 is operated during the variable display of the special symbol and during the stopped display will be described.

Figure 50 is a timing chart showing an example of a performance when a volume adjustment operation is performed during the variable display and the stationary display of the special symbol. Figures 51 and 52 are diagrams showing examples of images displayed on the first image display device 70 at each timing of Figure 50. Note that, below, a case where a volume adjustment operation is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol is described, but the same applies when the operation is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Also, below, only the part related to the volume adjustment operation is described in detail, and the operation of the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol reserved display 63, and each object (performance symbol 701, small symbol 702, first reserved icon HA, icon TI, first number reserved SHA) is the same as above, so a detailed description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 50, assume that at time t0, the machine is waiting for customers. That is, assume that the first reserved number U1 and the second reserved number U2 are zero, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Also assume that BGM is not being output (FIG. 51(a)). In this state, if a volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19 at time t0, the volume value is set, for example, from "2" to "3", and a volume value image OG indicating the current volume value is displayed (FIG. 51(b)). In this embodiment, the volume value can be set to five levels, for example, from "1" to "5". The volume value image OG is an image indicating which level of the currently set volume value is from "1" to "5". For example, the current volume value may be indicated by displaying an image indicating the volume value in a number corresponding to the volume value, or the volume value may be indicated directly as a number. Also, the output of the volume adjustment sound begins the moment the volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19. The volume adjustment sound is a sound indicating that a volume adjustment operation has been performed using the cross key 19, and is output for, for example, 0.8 seconds. The volume adjustment sound will be output at the newly set volume value.

The volume value image OG is displayed, for example, in the right region of the screen of the first image display device 70, for example, in a region that overlaps with the display region of the right pattern. In the figure, part of the right pattern overlaps with the volume value image OG. In this case, the volume value image OG is drawn on a layer in front of the right pattern. In other words, the volume value image OG is displayed with priority over the right pattern, and part of the right pattern is made invisible or difficult to see by the volume value image OG. If the variable display of the special pattern has not started, the volume value image OG will continue to be displayed until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start of display.

Now, let us assume that a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45 and the varying display of the first special symbol begins within a predetermined time (10 seconds) after the volume value image OG is displayed (time t1, Figure 51 (c)).

At time t2, in response to the performance control unit 130 receiving the change start command, a change performance using the performance pattern 701 etc. is started (Fig. 51(d)), and the BGM starts to be output at the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment operation. At this time, the volume value image OG is erased even before the predetermined time (10 seconds) has elapsed since the volume value image OG was displayed.

Specifically, in response to receiving the fluctuation start command, the volume value image OG that is being displayed is erased. Furthermore, if a volume adjustment sound is being output when the fluctuation start command is received, the output of the volume adjustment sound is stopped. Furthermore, for a predetermined time (time t2 to t3; for example, 1 second) after receiving the fluctuation start command, the display of the volume value image OG is suppressed (restricted or limited), and changes to the volume value itself are suppressed. In other words, during this period, even if a volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19, the volume value will not change, and therefore the volume value image OG will not be displayed, and the volume adjustment sound will not be output.

Next, at time t3, for example, the icon TI is displayed, and before the start-up action performance using the performance pattern 701 ends, volume adjustment operation can be performed again using the cross key 19. Note that volume adjustment operation may also be possible after the start-up action performance using the performance pattern 701 ends (i.e., after the variable display performance using the performance pattern 701 begins).

After that, at time t4 during the variable display performance using the performance pattern 701, when a volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19, the volume value is changed from "3" to "4" and the volume value image OG is displayed (Figure 51 (f)). At this time, the volume adjustment sound is also output.

Next, if the game ball enters the first start hole 45 at time t5 during the variable display performance using the performance pattern 701, an icon addition display performance is performed in response to receiving the start winning command (Figure 52 (g)). If a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has not elapsed since the volume value image OG began to be displayed, the volume value image OG will continue to be displayed even when the icon addition display performance is performed. In addition, a winning sound corresponding to the current volume value may be output in conjunction with the icon addition display performance.

Next, at time t6, a pre-stop action display is performed using the display pattern 701 (FIG. 52 (h)). If a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has not elapsed since the volume value image OG started to be displayed, the volume value image OG continues to be displayed during this pre-stop action display.

At time t7, the first special symbol is displayed as stopped (Figure 52 (i)). At this point, the performance symbol 701 has not stopped, and the volume value image OG continues to be displayed.

Then, at time t8, in response to the performance control unit 130 receiving the fluctuation stop command, the performance pattern 701 is stopped, the small pattern 702 is stopped, etc. are displayed, and the volume value image OG is erased (Figure 52 (j)). Even if a predetermined time (10 seconds) has not elapsed since the volume value image OG was displayed, the volume value image OG is forcibly erased. For a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) after the fluctuation stop command is received, the display of the volume value image OG is suppressed, and the change in the volume value itself is also suppressed.

Furthermore, the display of the next special symbol begins to change, and at time t9, in response to the performance control unit 130 receiving the next change start command, a start-up action performance using the performance symbol 701 is performed, and the display of the small symbol 702 begins to change (Figure 52 (k)). During this time, changes to the volume value are suppressed, and the display of the volume value image OG is also suppressed.

After that, at time t10, during the start-up action presentation using the presentation pattern 701 (or after the start-up action presentation), volume adjustment operation becomes possible using the cross key 19 (Figure 52 (l)).

As described above, in this embodiment, the player can adjust the volume using the cross key 19 while the special symbols are changing and while they are stopped. However, volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is restricted for a predetermined time from when the special symbols start to change and for a predetermined time from when the special symbols stop.

The same applies to light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19. Specifically, while the special symbols are varying and are stopped, the player can adjust the light intensity using the cross key 19. The light intensity values of the first image display device 70, the second image display device 70, the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 74, etc. can be adjusted in five steps, for example, from "1" to "5". When a light intensity adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19, the light intensity value is adjusted, a light intensity value image showing the current light intensity value is displayed, and a light intensity adjustment sound is output. This light intensity adjustment is suppressed for a predetermined period from the start of the special symbols' variation and for a predetermined period from the stop of the special symbols' variation. In other words, the light intensity adjustment itself is suppressed, and the display of the light intensity value image and the output of the light intensity adjustment sound are suppressed.

This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in visibility of the performance pattern 701 due to the volume value image OG or light value image being displayed when the special pattern starts to change and when it stops changing. Also, if a volume adjustment sound or light adjustment sound is output when the special pattern starts to change and when it stops changing, the player may be misled into thinking that the sound was output when the special pattern starts to change or when it stops changing (i.e., that the sound is based on the result of the jackpot determination). For this reason, volume adjustment and light adjustment are suppressed so that the volume adjustment sound and light adjustment sound are not output for a predetermined time after the special pattern starts to change and when it stops changing. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being misled in this way.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in addition to the volume adjustment and light adjustment using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player, the volume adjustment and light adjustment can be basically performed using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the gaming store clerk. Even if it is a predetermined time from the start or stop of the special pattern fluctuation, if the changeover switch 22 is operated, the volume adjustment and light adjustment may be performed. In other words, for a predetermined time from the start or stop of the special pattern fluctuation, the volume adjustment and light adjustment using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player may be suppressed, but the volume adjustment and light adjustment using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the gaming store clerk may not be suppressed. In this case, if the volume adjustment (or light adjustment) is performed using the changeover switch 22 at a predetermined time from the start or stop of the special pattern fluctuation, the volume adjustment (or light adjustment) itself is possible, but the display of the volume value image (or light value image) may be suppressed, and the output of the volume adjustment sound (or light adjustment sound) may be suppressed. Conversely, even in this case, the display of the volume value image (or light quantity value image) and the output of the volume adjustment sound (or light quantity adjustment sound) may not be suppressed.

In addition, when the volume or light amount is adjusted using the changeover switch 22, the volume value image OG or the light amount value image is displayed in the same manner as when the volume or light amount is adjusted using the cross key 19. For example, even if the volume is adjusted using the changeover switch 22 while the volume value image OG is displayed, or even if the volume is adjusted using the cross key 19, the display of the volume value image OG is updated. In addition, when the volume value image OG is not displayed, if the volume is adjusted using the changeover switch 22, the volume value image OG is displayed. Even in this case, when the special pattern starts to change or stops changing, the volume value image OG is erased, and the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is suppressed for a predetermined period from the start or stop of the special pattern to change. Note that, when the volume is adjusted using the changeover switch 22 while the volume value image OG is not displayed, the volume value image OG is not displayed, whereas when the volume is adjusted using the changeover switch 22 while the volume value image OG is displayed, the display of the volume value image OG may be updated. The same applies to the light amount adjustment.

In addition, while the error notification sound is being output, volume adjustment (or light intensity adjustment) using the changeover switch 22 is possible, but volume adjustment (or light intensity adjustment) using the cross key 19 may be suppressed. The error notification sound is a sound that is output when various errors (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error, etc.) occur, and is output at maximum volume. Even if the volume is adjusted using the changeover switch 22 while the error notification sound is being output, the volume of the error notification sound being output is not adjusted. In addition, while a performance sound other than the error notification sound (a sound related to a performance based on the result of a jackpot determination, such as the voice of a character, a sound effect suggesting the result of a jackpot determination, etc.) is being output, volume adjustment (or light intensity adjustment) using the changeover switch 22 and volume adjustment (or light intensity adjustment) using the cross key 19 are possible, and when a volume adjustment is performed, the volume of the performance sound changes. As described above, volume adjustment (or light intensity adjustment) using the cross key 19 is suppressed for a predetermined time from the start or end of the special pattern fluctuation.

In addition, while the error notification sound is being output, the effect sound may not be output or the volume of the effect sound may be reduced, and volume adjustment using the cross key 19 may be suppressed. In other words, while the error notification sound is being output, the output of the effect sound is suppressed, and volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is also suppressed. Methods for suppressing the output of the effect sound while the error notification sound is being output may include a method of internally playing the effect sound but setting the volume to zero (i.e., muting; in other words, outputting an inaudible sound), a method of not playing the effect sound, or a method of reducing the volume of the effect sound.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the output of the error notification sound starts, even if the current volume value is set to a volume value lower than the maximum volume value, the effect sound is output at a volume value lower than the current volume value (including a volume value of zero), and when the output of the error notification sound ends, the volume of the effect sound is returned to the volume before it was reduced (i.e., the volume value that was set). When the volume value of the effect sound returns, the volume value image is not displayed.

In the above embodiment, the display of the volume value image is suppressed by erasing the volume value image when the special pattern starts to change and when it stops changing. However, in a modified example, the display of the volume value image may be suppressed by moving the volume value image displayed on the layer in front of the performance pattern 701 to a layer behind the performance pattern 701 (toward the background image) when the special pattern starts to change and when it stops changing. In other words, the performance pattern 701 may be displayed in preference to the volume value image when the special pattern starts to change and when it stops changing.

In addition, in the above embodiment, if the special pattern starts to change or stops changing while the volume adjustment sound is being output, the volume adjustment sound being output is stopped, but in a modified example, if the special pattern starts to change or stops changing while the volume adjustment sound is being output, the volume adjustment sound may be continued to be output until the output period of the volume adjustment sound (e.g., 0.8 seconds) has elapsed. Even in this case, the volume value image may be erased. In other words, if the special pattern starts to change or stops changing while the volume value image is being displayed and the volume adjustment sound is being output by adjusting the volume using the cross key 19, the display of the volume value image may be suppressed, but the output of the volume adjustment sound may continue.

In addition, in the above embodiment, if a volume adjustment operation (or light intensity adjustment operation) is performed using the cross key 19 during a period other than when the special symbol starts or ends its change, a volume value image (or light intensity value image) is displayed and a volume adjustment sound (light intensity adjustment sound) is output, but in a modified example, the volume value image (or light intensity value image) may not be displayed and only the volume adjustment sound (light intensity adjustment sound) may be output. Even in this case, volume adjustment (or light intensity adjustment) using the cross key 19 is suppressed and the output of the volume adjustment sound (light intensity adjustment sound) is suppressed for a predetermined time (e.g., one second) from when the special symbol starts or ends its change.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance symbol stops after performing the pre-stop action performance, and the BGM continues to be output during the pre-stop action performance of the performance symbol and while the performance symbol is stopped and displayed. Even during the pre-stop action performance of the performance symbol, it is possible to adjust the volume of the BGM using the cross key 19. Since the BGM output continues even while the performance symbol is performing the pre-stop action performance, it is possible to ensure continuity of the performance and to make the transition to the next variation smooth. In addition, since the volume can be adjusted even during the pre-stop action performance, the volume can be adjusted at any time to suit the player's preferences.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance symbol stops after performing the pre-stop action performance, and BGM continues to be output during the pre-stop action performance of the performance symbol and while the performance symbol is stopped and displayed. Even during the pre-stop action performance of the performance symbol, it is possible to adjust the volume of the BGM using the cross key 19. Also, if an error notification sound is output during the pre-stop action performance, the BGM being output is suppressed (volume reduced, muted, or playback stopped). This allows volume adjustment even during the pre-stop action performance, but if an error notification sound is output, the BGM is suppressed, so the error notification sound can be heard by the player.

(Example of SPSP reach performance)
Next, an example of a reach effect will be described. In the following, a case where an SPSP reach effect is performed among the reach effects will be described.

(Example of a performance when a miss is announced from the SPSP reach performance)
Fig. 53 is a timing chart showing an example of the performance when the SPSP reach performance is performed. Fig. 54 is a timing chart following Fig. 53, and shows a timing chart when the SPSP reach performance results in a miss. Figs. 55 to 58 are diagrams showing examples of the performance at each timing of Figs. 53 and 54.

Before time t0, three rights to determine a big win related to the first special symbol are reserved. As shown in FIG. 53, when the first special symbol starts to change at time t0, a start-time action effect using the effect symbol 701, a change display effect using the small symbol 702, a change display using the sub first change display 81, an icon movement display effect in which each first reserved icon HA shifts to the right, and the like are started (FIG. 55(a)). Note that, in reality, after the first special symbol starts to change, a start-time action effect using the effect symbol 701, a change display effect using the small symbol 702, and an icon movement display effect of each first reserved icon HA are started, but since the difference between the start timing of the change of the special symbol and the start timing of each effect is as described above, it will be omitted here.

When the start-up action performance using the performance pattern 701 starts, at time t1, a start-up effect performance is performed in which an effect image 705a is added to each performance pattern 701 (FIG. 55(b)). In this start-up effect performance, a change start sound may be output together with the display of the effect image 705a. The change start sound may differ depending on the display mode (blue or red) of the effect image 705a.

The start effect effect is an effect in which a blue or red effect image 705a is displayed superimposed on each of the three effect symbols 701, and the relatively small effect image 705a gradually expands. The gaming machine 1 stores data showing an animated video spanning multiple frames (e.g., 45 to 60 frames; 1.5 to 2 seconds) in which the effect image 705a gradually expands. The start effect effect may be performed at the start of each variation across multiple special symbols based on the results of a pre-determination, or may be performed at the start of a variation of one special symbol based on the results of a pre-determination or a jackpot determination. Here, the start effect effect is performed at the start of a variation of one special symbol.

The start effect performance begins after the start action performance using performance pattern 701 has started, and ends during the start action performance. For example, the start timing of the start action performance (time t0) and the start timing of the start effect performance (t1) may be offset by about 0.5 seconds. By executing the start effect performance after starting the start action performance in this way, it is possible to prevent interference with the visibility of the start action performance using performance pattern 701, and to improve the interest at the time when performance pattern 701 begins to change.

The start timing of the start action effect (time t0) and the start timing of the start effect effect (t1) may be the same. Also, while an example of a start effect effect starting during the first cycle change of the special symbol is described here, in another example, the start effect effect may start after the special symbol has cycled one or more times.

Next, at time t2, the movement from the first reserved icon HA1 to the icon TI is completed. At this point, the start operation effect and the start effect effect are ongoing (FIG. 55(c)). In addition, when the icon TI is displayed, the icon change effect of the icon TI may be started. For example, as shown in FIG. 55(c), when the first reserved icon HA1 moves to the icon display area 704 and is displayed as the icon TI, the icon change effect of the icon TI changing from "white" to "blue" is started. The icon change effect is an effect in which the first reserved icon HA or the icon TI changes, and for example, an effect is displayed around the changing icon and then the icon changes over a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds). The gaming machine 1 stores data indicating an animation consisting of multiple frames (e.g., 15 frames) for the icon change effect of the icon TI, and data indicating an animation for the icon change effect of the first reserved icon HA.

The data showing the animation for the icon change effect of the icon TI may be the same as the data showing the animation for the icon change effect of the first reserved icon HA. In addition, the icon change effect of the icon TI may be executed at any timing during the change of the special pattern, not limited to when the change of the special pattern begins.

Next, at time t3, the start effect ends (Figure 55 (d)). The start effect ends after the special symbol undergoes multiple cycles of change. Even when the start effect ends, the start action continues. Also, at time t3, the icon change effect of the icon TI has already ended, and the icon TI is displayed, for example, in blue.

After that, at time t4, the start action presentation ends and the variable display presentation using the presentation pattern 701 begins (Figure 55 (e)). When an SPSP reach presentation is performed, the execution time of the start action presentation may be longer than in the case of a normal miss variation described in Figure 43 etc. For example, the start action presentation in the case of a normal miss variation is performed for 1 to 1.5 seconds, whereas the start action presentation in the case of an SPSP reach presentation may be performed for 2 to 3 seconds. Also, when an SPSP reach presentation is performed, a start action presentation of a different type from that in the case of a normal miss variation may be performed.

After a predetermined time has elapsed, at time t5, the left and right symbols perform pre-stop motion effects (Fig. 55(f)). Next, at time t6, the left and right symbols temporarily stop with the same effect pattern 701 (for example, a "1" symbol), and a reach is established (Fig. 56(g)). When a reach is established, a reach notification effect is performed from time t6 to t7 (Fig. 56(h)).

The reach notification effect is an effect in which the same type of effect patterns 701 on the left and right temporarily stop to notify that a reach has been achieved, and is performed for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds). Specifically, in the reach notification effect, an effect image 705b is added to the temporarily stopped left and right patterns, causing the left and right patterns to emit light. Also, in the reach notification effect, a horizontally long image (an image with "reach" written on it) that spans the display area of the left and right patterns is displayed superimposed on the left and right patterns. Also, in the reach notification effect, the sound of a character saying, for example, "reach" is output from the speaker.

Next, at time t7, the N-reach (normal reach) performance starts (Fig. 56(i)). Specifically, in the N-reach performance, the left and right symbols temporarily stop, and a plurality of performance symbols 701 as the center symbols move from the top to the bottom of the screen at a relatively slow speed, so that the player can expect the same type of performance symbol as the left and right symbols to stop as the center symbols. During the N-reach performance, the normal background image that was displayed before the execution of the N-reach performance continues to be displayed. In addition, in response to the start of the N-reach performance, the output of N-reach BGM, which is different from the normal BGM, starts. In addition, during the N-reach performance, a lamp lighting performance may be performed in which the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 are lit in a predetermined manner (e.g., blue) that suggests the possibility of a big win. The N-reach performance is performed for a predetermined time (time t7 to t8; e.g., 10 seconds).

Next, at the end of the N reach performance, the middle symbol, which had been moving at a relatively slow speed, accelerates, suggesting the development into a SP reach performance (Figure 56 (j)).

Next, at time t8, an SP development performance is executed, suggesting that the performance will develop into an SP reach performance (Figure 56 (k)). In the SP development performance, for example, the character images in the left and right patterns are peeled off, and the left and right patterns, which are composed of number images, shrink and move left and right on the screen. During the SP development performance, a background image for the SP development performance is displayed. Note that a normal background image may also be displayed during the SP development performance.

Then, at time t9, the SP reach performance starts (Fig. 56(l)). In the SP reach performance, the left and right symbols 701 and 701, which are made up of reduced number images, temporarily stop in the left and right areas of the upper area of the screen, respectively, and an SP reach video performance (for example, a performance in which a 2D animated character moves) corresponding to the SP reach performance is performed in the center of the screen. In addition, at the start of the SP reach performance, an effect image 705c is added to each of the left and right symbols 701 and 701 so that the left and right symbols 701 emit light. In addition, in response to the start of the SP reach performance, the background image changes from the normal background image to the SP reach background image, and the output of the SP reach BGM, which is different from the normal BGM and the N reach BGM, starts.

Between times t9 and t10, a SP reach effect is executed, and an effect is performed that makes the player expect that the effect pattern 701 of the same type as the left and right patterns will stop as the center pattern (Fig. 57 (m)). During the SP reach effect, a lamp lighting effect may be performed in which the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 are lit in a predetermined manner (e.g., blue or green) that suggests the possibility of a jackpot.

Next, at time t10 at the end of the SP reach effect, a blackout effect may be performed (Figure 57 (n)). The blackout effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of an SPSP reach effect being performed, and is an effect that suggests a high possibility of development into an SPSP reach effect. In a blackout effect, the entire screen goes black (a black or gray image is displayed on the entire screen), and a button operation prompting image PBG is displayed to encourage the player to operate the effect button 17. In addition, a valid period image YKG is displayed, indicating the valid period of operation on the effect button 17. During the blackout effect, the effect pattern 701 is hidden. Meanwhile, the small pattern 702 continues to be displayed, and a variable display effect is performed. In addition, the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI are displayed, and the first number reserved SHA and the second number reserved SHB also continue to be displayed. During the blackout effect, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI may be hidden, the first hold icon HA may be hidden while the icon TI is displayed, or the first hold icon HA may be displayed while the icon TI is hidden. Also, during the blackout effect, the lamp lighting effect in which the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 are lit in a predetermined manner may be stopped (i.e., the lamps are turned off), or the lamp lighting effect may be continued during the blackout effect.

During a blackout performance, the background music (here, the SP reach background music) that was being output before the start of the blackout performance is interrupted, resulting in a silent state in which no background music is output. In this silent state, performance sounds other than background music (for example, character voices, sounds encouraging button operation, other sound effects, etc.) may be output. Also, if various errors occur, error notification sounds are output at maximum volume even during a blackout performance. If the output of the SP reach background music is interrupted during a blackout performance and then the performance progresses to an SPSP reach performance, the SP reach background music is not resumed, and a sound corresponding to the SPSP reach performance is output. On the other hand, if the output of the SP reach background music is interrupted during a blackout performance and then the performance does not progress to an SPSP reach performance, the output of the SP reach performance and the SP reach background music are resumed, and then a miss is announced. Specifically, if the blackout effect does not progress to an SPSP reach effect, the SP reach BGM continues to be played during the blackout effect, but the volume is set to zero or reduced to suppress the output of the SP reach BGM, and then the SP reach effect is resumed, and the volume of the SP reach BGM is restored to its original volume and the output of the SP reach BGM is resumed. If the blackout effect progresses to an SPSP reach effect after the blackout effect, the SP reach BGM is stopped during the blackout effect (the playback of the SP reach BGM is ended), and then sounds (BGM and sound effects) related to the SPSP reach effect are output according to the progress of the SPSP reach effect. Note that, whether or not the blackout effect progresses to an SPSP reach effect after the blackout effect, the SP reach BGM continues to be played during the blackout effect, but the volume is set to zero or reduced to suppress the output of the SP reach BGM.

Here, if the effect button 17 is pressed during the valid period after the blackout effect has started, or if the valid period has elapsed without any operation being performed on the effect button 17, an SPSP development effect will be performed, indicating that the effect will progress to an SPSP reach effect.

After the SPSP development performance, at time t11, the SPSP reach performance starts (FIG. 57(o)). In response to the start of the SPSP reach performance, the background image for the SPSP reach is displayed, and the output of the BGM for the SPSP reach is started. In addition, in response to the start of the SPSP reach performance, the first reserved icon HA is hidden. In addition, during the SPSP reach performance, the small pattern 702 continues the variable display performance, the icon TI continues to be displayed, and the first number reserved SHA and the second number reserved SHB also continue to be displayed. In addition, during the SPSP reach performance, a lamp lighting performance may be performed in which the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 are lit in a predetermined manner (for example, a red manner) that suggests that the possibility of a jackpot is relatively high. In addition, during the SPSP reach performance, in addition to the first reserved icon HA, the icon TI may also be hidden. In addition, during the SPSP reach performance, the first reserved icon HA may be displayed while the icon TI may be hidden.

During the SPSP reach effect, a relatively small left pattern 701 and a relatively small right pattern 701 made up of number images temporarily stop in the left and right areas of the upper area of the screen, and a video effect for the SPSP reach effect (for example, an effect in which a 3D character moves) is displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, at time t12 at the end of the SPSP reach effect, a deciding effect is executed (FIG. 57(p)). Here, the deciding effect is an effect that is executed just before it is announced whether or not there is a jackpot, and is an effect that makes the player look forward to a jackpot. Immediately after the deciding effect, it is announced whether or not there is a jackpot. For example, as a deciding effect, an operation promotion effect to encourage the player to operate the effect button 17 is executed, or instead of an operation promotion effect, an effect is executed in which an effect pattern 701 of the same type as the left and right patterns moves at a low speed in the center of the screen, encouraging the player to look forward to stopping in the center of the screen. Here, for example, as an example of a deciding effect, an operation promotion effect to encourage the player to operate the effect button 17 is executed.

Specifically, at time t12, a button operation prompting image PBG that prompts the player to operate the effect button 17 is displayed together with a valid period image YKG indicating the valid period for the operation (Fig. 57 (p)). As the button operation prompting image PBG, an image that imitates the effect button 17 in a normal state, or an image that imitates the effect button 17 in a protruding state is displayed. When an image that imitates the effect button 17 in a protruding state is displayed as the button operation prompting image PBG, the effect button 17 changes to a protruding state. When the effect button 17 changes to a protruding state, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the effect button 17 is in a normal state.

Note that the effect button 17 may change to a protruding state during periods other than during the deciding effect (the first half of the reach effect, for example, during the blackout effect shown in FIG. 57(n) before the start of the SPSP reach effect), but the effect button 17 is more likely to change to a protruding state during the second half of the reach effect (for example, during the deciding effect) than during the first half of the reach effect.

During the operation prompting performance, the output of the SPSP reach BGM stops, resulting in a silent state in which no BGM is output. In this silent state, a predetermined sound effect other than BGM or an operation prompting sound that prompts the player to operate the performance button 17 may be output. In addition, if any type of error occurs, the error notification sound is output at maximum volume even during the operation prompting performance as the deciding performance. In response to the execution of the operation prompting performance as the deciding performance, the SPSP reach BGM that was output before the execution of the operation prompting performance stops, and is not played internally. During the operation prompting performance as the deciding performance, the playback of the SPSP reach BGM continues, but the output of the SPSP reach BGM may be suppressed by setting the volume to zero or lowering it.

Then, at time t13, if the performance button 17 is pressed during the valid period, or if the valid period has elapsed without any operation being performed on the performance button 17, the result of the jackpot determination is notified. Here, since the result of the jackpot determination is a miss, a failure performance is performed to notify the miss (FIG. 57(q)). Specifically, the miss is notified by the performance pattern 701, which is different from the left and right patterns, temporarily stopping as the middle pattern. At this point, the small pattern 702 continues the variable display performance. Also, during the execution of the failure performance, background music and sound effects corresponding to the failure performance (miss notification performance) are output. Note that, during the execution of the failure performance, the output of the SPSP reach background music that was stopped (suppressed) during the operation promotion performance may be resumed. Also, during the failure performance, a lamp lighting performance may be performed in which the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 are lit in a predetermined manner (white manner) that suggests a miss.

Next, at time t14, a switching image is displayed on the entire screen (Figure 57 (r)). In this switching image, the performance pattern 701 is hidden, and the icon TI is also hidden. Meanwhile, the small pattern 702 continues to be displayed, and a variable display performance is performed. In addition, the first number reserve SHA and the second number reserve SHB also continue to be displayed.

At the next time t15, the background image for the SPSP reach is switched to the normal background image, and the three performance symbols 701 return to their normal size including number images and character images, and the three performance symbols 701 temporarily stop in a losing state (Figure 58 (s)). The first reserved icon HA is also displayed again, and the icon TI is also displayed. The small symbols 702 continue the variable display performance, and the first number reserved SHA and second number reserved SHB also continue to be displayed.

Next, at time t16, the first special symbol is displayed as stopped (Fig. 58 (t)), and at the following time t17, the performance control unit 130 receives a fluctuation stop command, and the three performance symbols 701 are stopped and the small symbols 702 are also displayed as stopped (Fig. 58 (u)). In addition, in response to the reception of the fluctuation stop command, the disappearance performance of the icon TI is also started.

Then, at time t18, 0.5 seconds after the first special symbol is stopped, the next special symbol starts to change, and similarly to the above, in response to the performance control unit 130 receiving the change start command, a start-up action performance using the performance symbol 701 is executed.

(Example of a presentation when a jackpot is announced from an SPSP reach presentation)
Next, the performance when the big win is notified as a result of the SPSP reach performance will be described. Figure 59 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the big win is notified as a result of the SPSP reach performance. Figure 60 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when the big win is notified as a result of the SPSP reach performance.

Until the deciding performance at time t12, the performance is performed in the same manner as in FIG. 55(a) to FIG. 57(p). As shown in FIG. 59, after the deciding performance of FIG. 57(p), if the performance button 17 is pressed at time t13 during the valid period of operation on the performance button 17, or if the valid period has elapsed without operation on the performance button 17, a successful performance notifying a jackpot is executed (FIG. 60(q-2)). Specifically, the middle pattern (here, the "1" pattern) of the same type as the left and right patterns is temporarily stopped, so that three of the same type of performance patterns 701 are temporarily stopped, and a jackpot is notified. During this successful performance, an effect image 705d is added to the middle pattern. At this point, the small pattern 702 continues the variable display performance. Also, during the execution of the successful performance, background music and sound effects notifying a jackpot are output. Instead of displaying the image shown in FIG. 60(q-2), a success effect that notifies a jackpot may be executed by operating the movable effect device 73. In this case, the movable effect device 73 operates and appears in front of the screen of the first image display device 70, and an image notifying a jackpot (an image other than the effect pattern 701, for example, a rainbow-colored background image) is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70. Also, during the success effect, a lamp lighting effect may be executed in which the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 are lit in a predetermined manner (rainbow-colored manner) that suggests a jackpot.

Next, at time t14, the screen switches to a jackpot background image indicating a jackpot, and a pattern enlargement effect is performed in which three performance symbols 701 are enlarged and displayed across the entire screen (Fig. 60 (r-2)). In this pattern enlargement effect, three performance symbols 701 consisting of enlarged number images are displayed in the center of the screen, and effect images 705e are added around each performance symbol 701. In addition, the icon TI is erased according to the execution of the pattern enlargement effect. Also, even during the pattern enlargement effect, the small symbol 702 continues the variable display effect, and the first number reservation SHA and the second number reservation SHB also continue to be displayed. Also, during the pattern enlargement effect, background music and sound effects that notify of a jackpot are output. Also, during the pattern enlargement effect, a lamp lighting effect may be performed in which the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 are lit in a predetermined manner (rainbow-colored manner) that suggests a jackpot.

Next, after the pattern enlargement effect, the three effect patterns 701 consisting of number images shrink, and at time t15, the three effect patterns 701 temporarily stop (Fig. 60 (s-2)). While the three effect patterns 701 are temporarily stopped, an effect image 705f is added to each of the three effect patterns 701, and a big win light-up effect is performed in which the effect patterns 701 light up. Even during this big win light-up effect, the small patterns 702 continue to display a variable effect. In addition, the frame lighting device 10 and/or the board lighting device 74 may continue to perform a lamp lighting effect in which the lamps are lit up in a predetermined manner (rainbow-colored manner).

After that (for example, one second after the end of the jackpot light-up display), at time t16, the first special symbol is displayed as stopped in the form of a jackpot (Figure 60 (t-2)), and at the following time t17, in response to the display control unit 130 receiving a variation stop command, the three display symbols 701 come to a complete stop, and the small symbol 702 is also displayed as stopped (Figure 60 (u-2)).

Note that, unlike in the case of a miss, in the case of a jackpot, the icon TI is not displayed while the special pattern is stopped. Also, in the case of a miss, the background image for the SPSP reach is switched to the normal background image, and the appearance of the performance pattern 701 returns to the normal appearance including a number image and a character image. In contrast, in the case of a jackpot, the background image for the SPSP reach is switched to the jackpot background image, and the appearance of the performance pattern 701 is displayed in the appearance of a number image without a character image. Note that, even in the case of a jackpot, while the performance pattern 701 is temporarily stopped in the jackpot appearance (time t15 to t16), the appearance of the performance pattern 701 may be displayed in the normal appearance including a number image and a character image. Also, while the performance pattern 701 is temporarily stopped in the jackpot appearance, the icon TI may be displayed. In this case, even if the performance pattern 701 is stopped in the actual appearance in response to the reception of the variable stop command, the disappearance of the icon TI may not be performed. Also, in the case of a jackpot, for example, after FIG. 60 (q-2), the background image returns to the normal one, the appearance of the performance pattern 701 is displayed in the normal manner including a number image and a character image, and the icon TI and the first hold icon HA may be displayed.

Then, 0.5 seconds after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the main control unit 100 sends an opening command to the performance control unit 130, indicating the start of the jackpot game, and in response to receiving the opening command, the opening performance begins (time t18, Figure 60 (v)).

Although not shown, if the SP Reach performance does not progress to the SPSP Reach performance and a jackpot or miss is reported as a result of the SP Reach performance, after FIG. 57(n), the SPSP Reach performance is not performed, and the middle pattern stops to report a jackpot or miss. Alternatively, after FIG. 57(m), the middle pattern stops to report a jackpot or miss without a blackout performance. Specifically, in the case of a jackpot, the middle pattern temporarily stops as a result of the SP Reach performance, and the three same performance patterns 701 temporarily stop to report a jackpot. While the three same performance patterns 701 are temporarily stopped, the small pattern 702 continues to display in a variable manner, and the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI continue to be displayed, maintaining the periodic operation. After that, in response to the reception of the variable stop command, the three same performance patterns 701 stop permanently and the small pattern 702 stops and displays, during which the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed. At this time, the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI may continue to operate periodically, or the periodic operation may be stopped. Then, as in FIG. 60(v), an opening performance is started, and a big win game is started. On the other hand, in the case of a miss, as a result of the SP reach performance, a different type of middle pattern from the left and right is temporarily stopped to notify the miss. While the three performance patterns 701 are temporarily stopped in a miss mode, the small pattern 702 continues to display variable, and the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI continue to be displayed, and the periodic operation is maintained. After that, the background image for the SP reach is switched to the normal background image, and in response to the reception of the variable stop command, the three performance patterns 701 are stopped in a miss mode, and the small pattern 702 is displayed stopped. During that time, the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed. At this time, the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI may continue to operate periodically, or the periodic operation may be stopped.

Although not shown, if the SP reach performance is not developed and a big win or a miss is announced as a result of the N reach performance, after FIG. 56(j), the SP reach performance is not performed, and the middle pattern stops and the big win or a miss is announced. In this case, the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI are not hidden, but continue to be displayed while the big win or a miss is announced. Specifically, in the case of a big win, as a result of the N reach performance, the middle pattern temporarily stops and the three same type of performance patterns 701 temporarily stop, and the big win is announced. While the three same type of performance patterns 701 are temporarily stopped, the small pattern 702 continues to be displayed in a variable manner, and the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI continue to be displayed, maintaining the periodic operation. After that, in response to the reception of the variable stop command, the three same type of performance patterns 701 stop permanently and the small pattern 702 stops and displays, during which the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed. At this time, the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI may continue to operate periodically, or the periodic operation may be stopped. Then, as in FIG. 60(v), an opening performance is started, and a big win game is started. On the other hand, in the case of a miss, as a result of the N-reach performance, a different type of middle pattern from the left and right is temporarily stopped to notify the miss. While the three performance patterns 701 are temporarily stopped in a miss mode, the small pattern 702 continues to display variable, and the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI continue to be displayed, and the periodic operation is maintained. After that, in response to the reception of the variable stop command, the three performance patterns 701 are stopped in a miss mode, and the small pattern 702 is displayed as stopped, during which the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed. At this time, the first reserved icon HA and the icon TI may continue to operate periodically, or the periodic operation may be stopped.

When a variation pattern that executes an SPSP reach effect is selected, the SPSP reach effect may be performed after the N reach effect without going through the SP reach effect. Also, when variation pattern OP4 that executes a special reach effect is selected, the special reach effect is performed after the N reach effect or the SP reach effect (or without the N reach effect or the SP reach effect). The special reach effect is an effect that suggests that a jackpot game will be played (a jackpot game is confirmed), and is an effect in which a pattern row (for example, "111" or "222") with three identical performance patterns 701 aligned moves in a specified direction (from top to bottom) for a specified period of time, and then the three identical performance patterns 701 stop.

The above effects are merely examples, and various effects may be used to indicate the results of the jackpot determination while the special symbols are changing.

For example, if a jackpot is determined, a revival effect suggesting that a jackpot game will be played may be played after an effect suggesting that there is a high possibility of a miss as a result of an N reach effect, an SP reach effect, or an SPSP reach effect (a reach miss effect). Regardless of whether a revival effect is played after a reach miss effect, a revival suggestion effect suggesting that a revival effect may be played before the reach miss effect is played (for example, during the reach effect or before the start of the reach effect).

In addition, for example, in addition to the effects shown in FIG. 57(n) and FIG. 57(p), an operation prompting effect that prompts an operation on the effect button 17 may be performed, and when the operation is performed, a predetermined effect may be executed. This predetermined effect may or may not be accompanied by an operation prompting effect, and the execution of this operation prompting effect may be restricted at a predetermined timing before the SP development effect or the SPSP development effect is performed. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot accompanied by a transition to a certain variable game state, the execution of the operation prompting effect at a predetermined timing before the SP development effect or the SPSP development effect is performed is performed with a predetermined probability without being restricted, and when the effect button 17 is operated in response to the execution of this operation prompting effect, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect suggesting a certain variable jackpot) is performed. In other words, if the result of the jackpot determination is not a jackpot accompanied by a transition to a certain variable game state, the execution of the operation prompting effect at the above-mentioned predetermined timing is restricted (restricted), and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot accompanied by a transition to a certain variable game state, the execution of the operation prompting effect at the above-mentioned predetermined timing is not restricted (restricted). Methods for restricting the execution of the operation prompting effect at a specified time include setting the execution probability to zero in advance, or setting a relatively low execution probability in advance and restricting execution by lottery, etc.

In addition, while the above describes the effects that occur when the first special symbol changes in the normal game state, a similar effect also occurs when the second special symbol changes. Note that when the second special symbol changes, an effect different from that when the first special symbol changes may also be performed. Also, in a special probability game state or a time-limited game state, an effect different from the effects described above is performed. Note that an effect similar to the above may also be performed in a special probability game state or a time-limited game state.

For example, in a probability-change game state, a first period after a special game is played (the period until the special symbol changes the first number of times) and a second period different from the first period (e.g., a period shorter than the first period) may have different change pattern tables for selecting the change pattern of the second special symbol, and the content of the effects and/or the selection rate of the effects may be different between the first period and the second period. For example, in the first period, if a jackpot determination for the second special symbol is determined to be a miss, an operation prompting effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 17 may be performed with a first probability, and then a miss notification effect may be executed, and in the second period, if a jackpot determination for the second special symbol is determined to be a miss, an operation prompting effect may be performed with a second probability higher than the first probability, and then a miss notification effect may be executed.

In addition, in the normal game state, a first performance (for example, a start action performance or a variable display performance using performance pattern 701) is followed by a second performance (for example, a reach performance), and in the second performance, a first notification performance is performed to notify the player of information that is advantageous to the player, and in the special probability game state, the same first performance as in the normal game state is executed, and then a second performance is performed, and in the second performance, a second notification performance different from the first notification performance is performed to notify the player of information that is advantageous to the player.

It may also be possible to execute a first pattern in which a first performance (for example, a start action performance or a variable display performance using performance pattern 701) is followed by a second performance in which information regarding the execution of a jackpot game is announced in the second performance, and a second pattern in which a first performance different from that in the first pattern is executed, and then a second performance similar to that in the first pattern is executed, and information advantageous to the player is announced in the second performance. It may also be possible to execute a second performance when a pattern indicating the result of the jackpot determination is displayed in a stopped state.

For example, when a 10R special jackpot is won, a specific type of presentation among multiple specific presentations suggesting that a jackpot game will be played may be executed, and when a 4R special jackpot is won, the specific type of presentation may not be executed. For example, in the normal game state, a specific type of presentation may be executed when a 10R special jackpot is won or when a 4R special jackpot is won, and in the special jackpot game state, a specific type of presentation may be executed when a 10R special jackpot is won, but when a 4R special jackpot is won, the specific type of presentation may not be executed.

In addition, in the above performance example, in the normal miss variation, three performance patterns 701 of a first size are displayed on a first background image (a background image of any of performance modes A to C) to perform a start action performance and a variation display performance, and then a pre-stop action performance is performed using three performance patterns 701 of the first size, and the three performance patterns 701 are displayed stopped. Also, in the case where the big win judgment is judged as a miss, in the case of SP reach fluctuation or SPSP reach fluctuation, the three performance symbols 701 of the first size are displayed on the first background image to perform the start operation performance, the two performance symbols 701 of the first size are used to perform the pre-stop operation performance, and then the two performance symbols 701 are temporarily stopped, and the SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance is performed in a state where the two performance symbols 701 of the second size smaller than the first size are temporarily stopped on the second background image (background image corresponding to the SP reach performance, background image corresponding to the SPSP reach performance), and then the first background image is restored, and the three performance symbols 701 of the first size are stopped and displayed. That is, in the case of normal miss fluctuation, SP reach fluctuation, or SPSP reach fluctuation, the start operation performance and the pre-stop operation performance are not performed using the performance symbols 701 of the second size. In other performance examples, the start operation performance and/or the pre-stop operation performance may be performed using the performance pattern 701 of the second size. Also, in the case where the big win determination is determined to be a miss, in the case of SP reach fluctuation or SPSP reach fluctuation, the start operation performance is performed by displaying three performance patterns 701 of the first size on the first background image (for example, a background image corresponding to the performance mode A), and after performing the pre-stop operation performance using two performance patterns 701 of the first size, the two performance patterns 701 are temporarily stopped, and the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is performed in a state where two performance patterns 701 of a second size smaller than the first size are temporarily stopped on the second background image, and then the three performance patterns 701 of the first size are stopped and displayed on a third background image (a background image corresponding to the performance mode B) different from the first background image.

In addition, when a jackpot is determined, a confirmation effect suggesting that a jackpot game will be played may be performed one or more times before the N-reach effect is performed, during the N-reach effect, during the SP-reach effect, or during the SPSP-reach effect. For example, as the confirmation effect, an effect in which a premium character appears, an effect in which a rainbow-colored image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and/or the second image display device 71, an effect in which the movable effect device 73 emits rainbow colors, an effect in which the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device, or the effect button 17 emits rainbow colors, etc. may be performed. For example, when an operation promotion effect is performed during the SPSP-reach effect to promote the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect button 17 is pressed during the effective period of the operation, a cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70. The cut-in image includes a blue cut-in image with a relatively low jackpot expectation, a red cut-in image with a relatively high jackpot expectation, and a rainbow cut-in image suggesting that a jackpot game will be played, and any of these may be displayed in response to the pressing of the effect button 17. Furthermore, when a rainbow cut-in image is displayed, the effect button 17 may be vibrated while the rainbow cut-in image is being displayed or before the rainbow cut-in image is displayed, and when a blue cut-in image is displayed, the effect button 17 may not be vibrated while the blue cut-in image is being displayed or before the blue cut-in image is displayed. Also, before an N reach effect is performed, during an N reach effect, during an SP reach effect, or during an SPSP reach effect, a confirmation effect suggesting that a jackpot game will be played may be performed without an operation prompt effect (without an operation on the effect button 17).

(Examples of pre-reading performances)
Next, a specific example of the look-ahead performance will be described. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment may execute a start effect performance, a chance eye performance, and a zone performance as a look-ahead performance (look-ahead continuous performance) performed over the variation of a plurality of special symbols based on the result of the pre-determination. Only one of these three look-ahead continuous performances may be executed, or a plurality of them may be executed. Below, a performance example will be described in which, when it is pre-determined in the pre-determination that the SPSP reach performance is performed, a look-ahead continuous performance is executed in the variation before the variation of the special symbol (pre-read target variation) in which the SPSP reach performance is performed.

Figure 61 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when a consecutive look-ahead performance is performed two fluctuations before the look-ahead target fluctuation. Figure 62 is a diagram showing a continuation of the performance of Figure 61, and is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart from one fluctuation before the look-ahead target fluctuation to halfway through the look-ahead target fluctuation. Figures 63 to 66 are diagrams showing examples of performances at each timing of Figures 61 and 62.

As shown in FIG. 61, three rights to judge a big win related to the first special symbol are reserved, and the first reserved icon HA3, which is the pre-read target, is displayed in blue. At this time, when the first special symbol related to the first symbol two changes before the pre-read target starts to change at time t0, the start-time action effect using the performance symbol 701, the change display effect using the small symbol 702, the change display using the sub-first change display 81, the icon movement display effect of each first reserved icon HA, etc. are started (FIG. 63(a)). Note that, in reality, after the first special symbol starts to change, the start-time action effect using the performance symbol 701, the change display effect using the small symbol 702, the change display using the sub-first change display 81, etc. are started, but the difference in the start timing of these is as described above, so the explanation will be omitted here.

When the start-up action performance using the performance pattern 701 begins, at time t1, a start-up effect performance is performed in which an effect image 705a is added to each performance pattern 701 (Figure 63 (b)).

Next, at time t2, the movement of each first hold icon HA is completed. At this point, the start-up action presentation and start-up effect presentation are still ongoing (Figure 63 (c)).

Next, at time t3, the start effect performance ends (Figure 63 (d)). At this point, the start action performance continues. Furthermore, at time t4, the start action performance ends, and a variable display performance using performance pattern 701 is executed (Figure 63 (e)).

After a predetermined time has elapsed, the zone performance starts at time t5 (FIG. 63 (f)). When the zone performance starts, a zone entry image is displayed to indicate the start of the zone performance. In addition, in response to the start of the zone performance, a zone display image 707 is displayed indicating that the zone performance is being performed, and the background image changes from the normal background image to the zone background image. The zone display image 707 is, for example, an image in which the word "zone" is written superimposed on a long strip-shaped image in the left-right direction, and the word "zone" moves from left to right. The zone display image 707 is placed on the layer on the front side of the background image and is placed on the layer behind the performance pattern 701 (i.e., the performance pattern 701 is displayed preferentially). The zone display image 707 may be placed on the layer on the front side of the performance pattern 701. There are images corresponding to the "weak zone" and the "strong zone" as the zone display image 707, and here, the zone display image 707 corresponding to the weak zone is displayed. The zone background image is, for example, an image of a specific character in action, and there are images corresponding to the "weak zone" and the "strong zone" as the zone background image. The zone display image 707 and the zone background image are displayed over the course of one or more variations of the special pattern. During the execution of the zone performance, the zone BGM is output instead of the normal BGM. The normal BGM may be output during the execution of the zone performance. During the zone performance, in addition to the strip-shaped zone display image 707, another image indicating that the zone performance is being executed may be displayed. During the zone performance, the image of the reserved icon or the base of the icon (the image for forming the display area of the reserved icon or the icon) may be switched to an image specific to the zone performance.

When zone BGM is output during the execution of a zone effect, the normal BGM may be continued to be played while the zone BGM is being output, and the volume of the normal BGM may be set to zero or reduced to suppress the output of the normal BGM. Also, a suggestive effect may be executed in which a character is displayed suggesting the result of the jackpot determination, and the character's voice (suggestive effect sound) may be output during the suggestive effect. On the premise that such suggestive effects can be executed during and outside of a zone effect, when the suggestive effect is executed during a zone effect, the character's voice may be output at a lower volume than when not in a zone effect, may be output at a lower volume than the zone BGM, or may not be output at all.

Next, at time t6, an icon change effect is started for the first reserved icon HA2 related to the change in the pre-read target (FIG. 64 (g)). For example, the first reserved icon HA2 changes from "blue" to "red" due to the icon change effect. In addition, an icon change sound may be output in conjunction with the icon change effect. The icon change sound is a sound that corresponds to the display mode of the reserved icon after the change, and may be the same sound as the winning sound that is output when the game ball enters the starting hole.

Next, the left and right symbols perform pre-stop motion effects at different times, then temporarily stop. Then, at time t7, a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) after time t6, the third middle symbol performs pre-stop motion effects (Figure 64 (h)), and at time t8, the middle symbol temporarily stops (Figure 64 (i)).

At time t9 immediately after the middle symbol is temporarily stopped (for example, 0.5 seconds later), a pre-reading chance eye effect using three performance symbols 701 is started (Fig. 64 (j)). The pre-reading chance eye effect is an effect in which an effect image 705h is displayed around each performance symbol 701, and is an effect in which a specific combination (for example, a combination of even symbols or a combination of odd symbols) of performance symbols 701 is temporarily stopped to notify of a miss, which is a combination that does not indicate a jackpot. The pre-reading chance eye effect is an effect that suggests that there is a high expectation of a jackpot in the fluctuation of the special symbols from the next onwards. The pre-reading chance eye effect includes a first mode (a combination of even symbols in which a blue effect image 705h is added) and a second mode (a combination of odd symbols in which a red effect image 705h is added) that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first mode. In addition, a stop sound may be output in the pre-reading chance eye effect. This stopping sound may be different between the first and second modes.

At time t10, a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) after time t9, the predictive chance eye effect ends (the effect image 705h is erased), and the three effect symbols 701 indicating a miss temporarily stop (Fig. 64 (k)). Then, at time t11, the first special symbol stops and the three effect symbols 701 stop in response to the reception of the variable stop command (Fig. 64 (l)). When the three effect symbols 701 stop in a proper manner, the stop sound that was started when the predictive chance eye effect started has ended. Specifically, the output of the stop sound has ended before the first special symbol stops. Note that the stop sound may be being output at the timing when the first special symbol stops and the timing when the three effect symbols 701 stop in a proper manner.

In actuality, after the first special symbol stops, the main stop of the performance symbol 701, the stop display of the small symbol 702, and the stop display of the sub-first variable display 81 are performed, but the timing difference between these is as described above, so an explanation will be omitted here.

In this way, based on the result of the advance judgment, the pre-stop action performance and the temporary stop are performed for the three performance patterns 701 in order, and then the pre-reading chance eye performance may be executed. For example, the left pattern performs the pre-stop action performance and then temporarily stops, then the right pattern performs the pre-stop action performance and then temporarily stops, and finally, the middle pattern performs the pre-stop action performance and then temporarily stops. Then, immediately after the third middle pattern temporarily stops, the effect image 705h is added to the three performance patterns 701 at the same time. Note that, not only when the three performance patterns 701 perform the pre-stop action performance and the temporary stop in order, but also when at least two of the three performance patterns 701 perform the pre-stop action performance and the temporary stop at the same time. Even in this case, when the pre-reading chance eye performance is executed, the addition of the effect image 705h to the three performance patterns 701 is performed simultaneously. For example, the left and right patterns may simultaneously perform a pre-stop motion effect and a temporary stop, and then the center pattern may perform a pre-stop motion effect and a temporary stop, and then the effect image 705h may be added simultaneously to the three performance patterns 701. Also, the left, center, and right patterns may simultaneously perform a pre-stop motion effect and a temporary stop, and then the effect image 705h may be added simultaneously to the three performance patterns 701.

At time 12, 0.5 seconds after time t11, the next special symbol change display (one change before the one to be read ahead) begins (Fig. 65(m)). Specifically, as described above, the start-up action display using the performance symbol 701 begins, and the start-up effect display is executed.

Next, at time t13, a variable display effect using the effect pattern 701 begins (Figure 65 (n)), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, each of the three effect patterns 701 performs a pre-stop action effect and a temporary stop (at different times or simultaneously) (just before time t14, Figure 65 (o)).

Then, at time t14, the second look-ahead chance eye performance starts (FIG. 65(p)). The second look-ahead chance eye performance may be performed in a different manner from the first look-ahead chance eye performance. For example, the first look-ahead chance eye performance may be performed in a first manner, and the second look-ahead chance eye performance may be performed in a second manner that has a higher probability of winning.

At time t15, the predictive chance display ends (the effect image 705h is erased), and the three display symbols 701 indicating a miss temporarily stop (Fig. 65(q)). Then, at time t16, the first special symbol is displayed as stopped, and in response to the reception of the variable stop command, the three display symbols 701 stop permanently (Fig. 65(r)).

Furthermore, at time 17 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the display of the next special pattern change (change of the pre-read target) begins (Figure 66 (s)). As above, the start-time action display using the display pattern 701 begins, and the start-time effect display is executed. Here, the mode of the start-time effect display in the pre-read target change may be a mode with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the start-time effect displays two changes ago and one change ago, or may be a mode with the same expectation.

Next, at time t18, the N reach performance begins (Figure 66 (t)). Until this N reach performance begins, a zone background image is displayed as the background image. In addition, in response to the start of the N reach performance, or before the start of the N reach performance, the mode of the zone performance changes from a "weak zone performance" to a "strong zone performance" which has a higher expectation of a jackpot. In conjunction with this change, the text in the zone display image 707 also changes to "strong zone." Note that the change from "weak zone performance" to "strong zone performance" may occur at any time.

Then, after the SP development performance is performed, the SP reach performance starts at time t19 (Figure 66 (u)). In response to the start of the SP reach performance, the background image changes from the zone background image to an SP reach background image. Also, as shown in Figure 66 (u), a horizontal zone display image 707 was displayed until the N reach performance started, but in response to the start of the SP reach performance, it changes to a vertical zone display image 707.

When the SP reach performance ends, the SPSP development performance is passed through, and at time t20, the SPSP reach performance starts (Figure 66 (v)). In response to the start of the SPSP reach performance, the background image for the SP reach is changed to the background image for the SPSP reach. In addition, in response to the start of the SPSP reach performance, the zone display image 707 is no longer displayed. The subsequent SPSP reach performance is the same as above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The zone display image 707 may be displayed even during the SPSP reach performance. In the above performance example, even when the zone performance is executed, the SP reach background image is displayed during the SP reach performance, and the SPSP reach background image is displayed during the SPSP reach performance. However, in other performance examples, when the zone performance is executed, the zone background image may be displayed during the SP reach performance and even during the SPSP reach performance.

In this way, in this embodiment, the performance pattern performs a start action performance in response to the start of the special pattern change, and then the change display begins, and a background performance (the action of the zone background image, the action of the normal background image) using the background image is performed both before the start of the start action performance and while the start action performance is being executed. For this reason, attention is drawn to the background before the start of the special pattern change display, but by performing a start action performance using the performance pattern in response to the start of the special pattern change, it is possible to draw attention from the background to the performance pattern, and to appeal to the player that the special pattern will start to change. Also, when the background performance is performed based on the results of a prior determination, it is possible to make the player excited about the subsequent changes.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the special symbol starts to change, the display of the special symbol starts changing and the start-up action of the special symbol starts. Even when the start-up action of the special symbol starts, the background effect using the background image is still being performed. This allows the player to focus on the background and, from that state, to focus on the special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, after a pre-stop action performance using the performance pattern is performed, the performance pattern and small pattern stop, and while the performance pattern and the small pattern are stopped, a background performance using a background image is performed. Therefore, when the performance pattern stops, attention can be drawn to the performance pattern, and after the performance pattern stops, attention can be drawn to the background.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the pre-stop action performance using the performance pattern is performed, the performance pattern and small pattern stop, and even during the pre-stop action performance of the performance pattern, a background performance using a background image is performed. Therefore, when the performance pattern stops, attention can be drawn to the performance pattern, and after the performance pattern stops, attention can be drawn to the background.

(Example of what happens when no command is received)
Next, a description will be given of an example of a performance when the performance control unit 130 cannot receive a command from the main control unit 100. For example, the performance control unit 130 may not be able to properly receive a command from the main control unit 100 due to a poor connection between the main control unit 100 and the performance control unit 130 or due to some external influence (e.g., radio interference, etc.).

The following describes a case where the performance control unit 130 is unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100 when the first special symbol is being displayed and the first reserved number U1 is "3". In addition, a look-ahead continuous performance (zone performance) is being executed based on the third reserved symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "look-ahead target"), and in the change prior to the change of the look-ahead target, the normal miss change pattern HP1 or HP2 not accompanied by a reach effect is selected as the change pattern of the special symbol.

Figure 67 shows an example of a timing chart when the performance control unit 130 is unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100 during the variable display of special symbols. Figures 68 and 69 show examples of performances at each timing in Figure 67.

As shown in FIG. 67, at time t0, the performance pattern 701 is performing a variable display performance, and the small pattern 702 and the sub-first variable display 81 are also performing a variable display. The first reserved number U1 shown by the first special pattern reserved display 63 is "3" (the LED on the left is flashing, and the LED on the right is lit). The reserved number shown by the sub-first reserved display 83 is "3" (the LED on the left is flashing, and the LED on the right is lit). The reserved number shown by the first reserved icon HA and the first number reserved SHA is also "3". A zone background image is displayed as the background image, and a zone display image 707 is displayed, indicating that a zone performance is being performed.

Suppose that while such a presentation is being executed, at time t1, the presentation control unit 130 is unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100. Even in this case, the variable display presentation using the presentation pattern 701 continues. The variable display presentation of the small pattern 702 and the variable display of the sub-first variable display 81 also continue. The zone presentation also continues to be executed. Various presentations that were determined at or before the start of this variation are also executed at the timing that was determined in advance.

Specifically, when a predetermined time has passed since the special symbols began to change, the effect symbols 701 perform pre-stop motion effects and temporary stops in the order determined at the start of the change. For example, if it has been determined at the start of the special symbols' change that the symbols will stop in the order of left, right, and center, then as time passes, the left symbol will perform pre-stop motion effects and then temporarily stop, and then the right symbol will perform pre-stop motion effects and then temporarily stop.

Then, at time t2, the middle symbol performs a pre-stop motion effect (Fig. 68(b)). At time t3, when the pre-stop motion effect of the middle symbol ends, the middle symbol temporarily stops (Fig. 68(c)). Note that if it has been determined that a pre-reading chance eye effect should be performed during this change, the pre-reading chance eye effect will be performed.

Next, at time t4, the first special symbol is displayed as stopped (Fig. 68 (d)). Specifically, the main control unit 100 stops the display of the first special symbol and transmits a change stop command to the performance control unit 130. However, the performance control unit 130 cannot receive the change stop command from the main control unit 100. For this reason, even after the first special symbol is displayed as stopped (even after the performance control unit 130 receives the change stop command under normal conditions), the three performance symbols 701 continue to be temporarily stopped (oscillated). The small symbol 702 change display also continues to be executed. The sub first change display 81 also continues to display the change. The icon TI also continues to be displayed. The three first hold icons HA also continue to be displayed. The zone performance also continues to be executed. The BGM also continues to be output.

Next, at time t5, the first reserved number U1 is reduced from "3" to "2" in the main control unit 100, and the display of the first special pattern begins (Fig. 68 (e)). That is, the display of the pattern two symbols before the one to be read ahead begins. Specifically, the main control unit 100 begins the display of the first special pattern and sends a command to start the display of the pattern to start the display of the pattern. However, the display control unit 130 cannot receive the command to start the display of the pattern from the main control unit 100. For this reason, even if the display of the first special pattern begins, the start-time action display using the display pattern 701, the display of the small pattern 702, and the display of the sub-first display of the pattern 81 do not begin. On the other hand, the temporary stop (swing) of the three display patterns 701 continues, the display of the small pattern 702 continues, and the display of the sub-first display of the pattern 81 continues to be displayed. Additionally, the icon movement display effect of the first hold icon HA does not start, and the number of holds indicated by the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the first numeric hold SHA remains at "3." The icon TI also continues to be displayed. The zone effect also continues to be executed, and the background music also continues to be output.

Note that even if it has been previously determined that a start effect performance will be performed for this variation (two variations prior to the look-ahead target) based on the results of a prior determination of the look-ahead target, the start effect performance will not be performed in response to the start of this variation. Also, even if it has been previously determined that a look-ahead chance eye performance will be performed for this variation, the look-ahead chance eye performance will not be performed for this variation.

Next, at time t6, it is assumed that the performance control unit 130 has returned to a state in which it can receive commands from the main control unit 100. Even in this case, the temporary stop (swing) of the three performance symbols 701 continues, and the varying display of the small symbols 702 also continues. The sub-first varying display 81 also continues to display variations. The number of holds indicated by the sub-first hold display 83, the first hold icon HA, and the first number hold SHA also remains at "3". The zone performance continues to be executed, and the background music continues to be output.

After that, at time t7, the first special symbol is displayed as stopped, and the performance control unit 130 receives a change stop command from the main control unit 100 (Figure 68 (f)). In response to receiving the change stop command, the three performance symbols 701 stop, the small symbol 702 is displayed as stopped, and the sub-first change indicator 81 is also displayed as stopped. At this point, the number of reserved balls indicated by the sub-first reserve indicator 83, the first reserve icon HA, and the first number reserve SHA remains at "3". In addition, in response to receiving the change stop command, the disappearance performance of the icon TI is executed. As described above, this disappearance performance of the icon TI is a performance in which the icon TI gradually disappears over multiple frames. In addition, the zone performance continues to be executed, and the BGM also continues to be output.

Then, at the next time t8, the first reserved number U1 is reduced from "2" to "1" in the main control unit 100, and the display of the first special pattern begins (Fig. 69 (g)). That is, the previous change to the pre-read target begins. The performance control unit 130 also receives a change start command from the main control unit 100, and in response to receiving the change start command, begins a start-time action performance using the performance pattern 701, and begins a change display performance using the small pattern 702. The display of the change begins on the sub-first change display 81. The reserved number indicated by the sub-first reserve display 83 also changes from "3" to "1" (the left LED turns on and the right LED turns off). The reserved number indicated by the first number reserve SHA also changes from "3" to "1". This change in the reserved number indicated by the first number reserve SHA occurs in one frame. That is, the first number reserve SHA is updated from "3" to "1" at the next frame update timing after receiving the change start command. In addition, the zone effects will continue to be performed and the background music will continue to be played.

Furthermore, at time t8, one first hold icon HA disappears, and the two first hold icons HA each begin to shift (Figure 69 (g)). That is, of the three first hold icons HA displayed at this point, one extra first hold icon HA disappears, and the remaining two first hold icons HA each shift.

Next, at time t9, a start effect performance is executed for each performance pattern 701 (FIG. 69(h)). Here, based on the result of the advance judgment for the look-ahead target, it was previously determined that a start effect performance would be executed as a look-ahead continuous performance in the previous variation of the look-ahead target, so a start effect performance is executed.

Then, at time t10, the start-up action presentation ends, and the variable display presentation using presentation pattern 701 is executed (Figure 69 (i)). After that, the presentation progresses as described above.

In addition, in FIG. 69(g), when one extra first hold icon HA is eliminated and the remaining two first hold icons HA are shifted, the first hold icon HA farthest from the icon display area 704 may be eliminated, or the first hold icon HA closest to the icon display area 704 may be eliminated.

Figure 70 shows an example of a presentation in which the leftmost first hold icon HA3 is erased when an extra first hold icon HA is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 70, in response to receiving the fluctuation start command, the leftmost first hold icon HA3 is made to disappear, and the remaining first hold icons HA2 and HA1 are made to start moving to the display area of the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI, respectively (FIG. 70(g)). The leftmost first hold icon HA3 is erased in one frame and is not displayed in the next frame (FIG. 70(g-2)). That is, in this case, a disappearance effect is not performed to gradually make the first hold icon HA3 disappear over multiple frames. On the other hand, the remaining first hold icons HA2 and HA1 are moved by the normal icon movement display effect described above (icon movement display effect executed in response to receiving the fluctuation start command without missing any command from the main control unit 100). That is, the first hold icons HA2 and HA1 are moved by an animation that spans multiple frames (for example, 15 frames; 0.5 seconds). Then, after several frames, the first hold icons HA2 and HA1 are displayed as the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI, respectively (Figure 70 (g-3)).

Figure 71 shows an example of a presentation in which the rightmost first hold icon HA1 is erased when an extra first hold icon HA is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 71, in response to receiving the change start command, the rightmost first hold icon HA1 disappears (FIG. 71(g)), and the remaining first hold icons HA3 and HA2 are moved instantly (in one frame) to the display areas of the first hold icons HA2 and HA1, respectively (FIG. 71(g-2)). That is, in response to receiving the change start command, the rightmost first hold icon HA1 disappears in one frame, and the remaining first hold icons HA3 and HA2 move to the display areas of the first hold icons HA2 and HA1, respectively, in one frame. In other words, no disappearance effect is performed in which the rightmost first hold icon HA1 gradually disappears over multiple frames, and no icon movement display effect is performed in which the first hold icons HA3 and HA2 move over multiple frames. After that, the first hold icons HA2 and HA1 that moved instantly are moved to the display areas of the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI, respectively, using an icon movement display effect (animation spanning multiple frames) (Figure 71 (g-3)).

In addition, in both the case shown in FIG. 70 and the case shown in FIG. 71, when an extra first reserved icon HA is made to disappear, a disappearance effect may be performed over multiple frames to make the extra first reserved icon HA disappear. In this case, the extra first reserved icon HA may be made to disappear in a shorter time (i.e., in fewer frames) than the disappearance effect of the icon that is executed in response to successfully receiving a fluctuation stop command, or the extra first reserved icon HA may be made to disappear in the same time (i.e., in the same number of frames).

In addition, in the case shown in FIG. 71, the remaining first hold icons HA3 and HA2 may be moved in multiple frames to the display area of the first hold icons HA2 and HA1, respectively, rather than in one frame. That is, the remaining first hold icons HA3 and HA2 may be moved by an icon moving display performance over multiple frames. In this case, the moving speed from the first hold icons HA3 and HA2 to the first hold icons HA2 and HA1 may be faster than the moving speed in the normal icon moving display performance. That is, if the hold icons are not displayed in the normal position because a command from the main control unit 100 is not normally received, the hold icons may be moved in a shorter time than the normal icon moving display performance when returning each hold icon to the normal position. Note that the moving speed from the first hold icons HA3 and HA2 to the first hold icons HA2 and HA1 when a command from the main control unit 100 is not normally received may be the same as the moving speed in the normal icon moving display performance.

In the case shown in FIG. 71, the remaining first hold icons HA3 and HA2 may be moved (in one frame or multiple frames) to the display areas of the first hold icons HA2 and HA1, respectively, and then the moved first hold icons HA2 and HA1 may be moved to the display areas of the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI, respectively, at a speed faster (i.e., in a shorter time) than in the normal icon movement display performance.

In this way, if there is an inconsistency between the first reserved number U1 managed by the main control unit 100 and the reserved number for the jackpot determination related to the first special pattern managed by the performance control unit 130, the inconsistency is resolved in response to receiving the change start command. The reserved number indicated by the sub first reserved indicator 83 and the first number reserved SHA instantly changes to the normal value.

On the other hand, with regard to the first hold icons HA, if an extra first hold icon HA is displayed, the extra first hold icons HA are deleted. Specifically, the number of first hold icons HA equal to the number obtained by subtracting the number of first hold icons HA (U1) stored in the main control unit 100 at this time from the number of first hold icons HA currently displayed (HA_N) and then further subtracting "1" from that number ("HA_N-U1-1") are deleted, and the remaining (U1+1) first hold icons HA are displayed by moving them using the icon moving display effect.

When the first hold icon HA is made to disappear, it may be made to disappear instantly in one frame, or it may be made to disappear by an animation spanning multiple frames. When the first hold icon HA is made to disappear by an animation, it may be made to disappear in a shorter time than the disappearance of the icon TI by the disappearance performance of the icon TI described above.

Here, when the first hold icon HA is displayed in a special mode, if an inconsistency occurs between the number of holds in the main control unit 100 and the number of holds in the performance control unit 130 because the performance control unit 130 is unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100, if the change in the special pattern corresponding to the first hold icon HA in the special mode has not ended, the special mode will be maintained even after the inconsistency is resolved. For example, if the first hold icon HA3 is displayed in blue just before time t8 (FIG. 68(f)), the rightmost first hold icon HA1 disappears in a relatively short time (one frame or multiple frames) at the timing when time t8 is reached, and at the same time, the remaining blue first hold icon HA3 and white first hold icon HA2 move to the display area of the first hold icon HA2 and the first hold icon HA1 in a relatively short time (one frame or multiple frames), respectively. Then, the blue first hold icon HA2 and the white first hold icon HA1 are each moved to the right by an icon movement display effect (animation spanning multiple frames) and are displayed as the first hold icon HA1 (blue) and the icon TI (white), respectively.

For example, when the first reserved icon HA3 is displayed in a special mode, the performance control unit 130 becomes unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100, and this state continues. In this case, as time passes, the main control unit 100 ends the change of the current special pattern, and starts the change of the next special pattern. As time passes, the main control unit 100 ends the change of all special patterns that were reserved at the time when the performance control unit 130 became unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100. During this time, the first image display device 70 continues to display the swing of the performance pattern 701 and the change of the small pattern 702, and the first reserved icon HA3 continues to be displayed in a special mode. In addition, the first reserved icons HA2, HA1, and the icon TI also continue to be displayed, and the first number reserved SHA remains "3". In addition, the change display continues in the sub-first change display 81, and the number of reserved numbers indicated by the sub-first reserve display 83 remains "3". After that, when four game balls enter the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol starts to change and three changes of the first special symbol are reserved. At this time, the first reserved number U1 in the main control unit 100 and the reserved number of the first special symbol in the performance control unit 130 match. In this state, when the performance control unit 130 returns to a state in which it can receive commands from the main control unit 100, the performance control unit 130 next receives a change stop command from the main control unit 100. In response to receiving this change stop command, the main stop of the performance pattern 701 and the stop display of the small pattern 702 are performed, and the disappearance performance of the icon TI is performed. Then, in response to the start of the change of the next first special symbol, the first reserved icon HA3 in the special mode moves by the icon movement display performance and is displayed as the first reserved icon HA2. That is, the first hold icon HA in a special mode that was displayed before the performance control unit 130 was unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100 will be maintained even after the return, even if the variation of the special pattern corresponding to the first hold icon HA in that special mode has ended, as long as the number of holds at the time when the performance control unit 130 returns to a state in which it is able to receive commands from the main control unit 100 is consistent (matched) between the main control unit 100 and the performance control unit 130. In this case, the display mode of the first hold icon HA does not reflect an accurate pre-read result. That is, even if the first hold icon HA is displayed in a display mode with a high expectation of a jackpot, even if a variation related to the first hold icon HA in that display mode is performed, a high expectation performance will not be performed, and a normal miss variation may occur.

In another embodiment, when the first hold icon HA is displayed in a special mode, if the performance control unit 130 is unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100 and an inconsistency occurs between the number of holds in the main control unit 100 and the number of holds in the performance control unit 130, when the inconsistency is resolved, the first hold icon HA may be in a normal mode. For example, if the first hold icon HA3 is displayed in blue just before time t8 (FIG. 68(f)), at the timing when time t8 is reached, the extra leftmost blue first hold icon HA3 disappears in a relatively short time (one frame or multiple frames), and at the same time, the remaining white first hold icons HA2 and HA1 move to the right by an icon movement display performance (animation over multiple frames) and are displayed as the first hold icon H1 and the icon TI. Even if the remaining first hold icons HA2 and HA1 are displayed in a special mode, they may be changed to a normal mode when the extra first hold icon HA3 disappears.

In addition, when the number of the first reserved icons HA currently displayed is greater than the number of the first reserved icons U1 of the actual first special pattern, they are controlled to be consistent in response to the reception of the change start command. Specifically, when the number of the first reserved icons HA currently displayed (HA_N) minus the first reserved number (U1) stored in the main control unit 100 at this time is less than "1", the number of the first reserved icons HA is insufficient, so the first reserved icons HA are increased. For example, when only the first reserved icon HA1 is displayed and the first reserved number U1 included in the change start command is "2", the first reserved icons HA3 and HA2 are additionally displayed to add the missing icons. Then, the additionally displayed first reserved icons HA3 and HA2 are moved to the display areas of the first reserved icons HA2 and HA1, respectively, and the first reserved icon HA1 is moved to the display area of the icon TI. When these missing first reserved icons HA3 and HA2 are additionally displayed, they may be additionally displayed in fewer frames (i.e., in a shorter time) than the additional icon display effect that is normally performed when the game ball enters the starting hole, or they may be additionally displayed in the same number of frames (i.e., in the same time).

The above describes a case where the performance control unit 130 becomes unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100 while the special pattern is being displayed and then returns to a state where it can receive commands after the special pattern stops and starts changing. If the performance control unit 130 receives a change start command in response to the start of the special pattern changing, and then receives the next change start command without receiving a change stop command, the following control will be performed.

In other words, just before receiving the change start command, as shown in FIG. 68(d), the performance pattern 701 is temporarily stopped (swinging), the small pattern 702 is executing a change display performance, and the sub first change display 81 is executing a change display. In addition, the zone performance continues to be executed, and the background music also continues to be output.

In response to receiving a fluctuation start command in this state, the icon TI disappears. This disappearance of the icon TI occurs in one frame (instantaneously). Note that this disappearance of the icon TI may be performed by an animation having multiple frames. For example, the disappearance of the icon TI in response to receiving a fluctuation start command may be performed by an animation having fewer frames than the disappearance performance of the icon TI executed in response to receiving a normal fluctuation stop command. Also, the disappearance of the icon TI in response to receiving a fluctuation start command may be performed by the disappearance performance of the icon TI executed in response to receiving a normal fluctuation stop command.

In response to receiving the change start command, the start-time action performance using the performance pattern 701 is started. At this time, the performance pattern 701 starts the start-time action performance from the temporary stopped state without going through a permanent stop.

In addition, in response to receiving the change start command, the small symbol 702 executes the change display performance without stopping. In other words, the small symbol 702 executes (continues) the change display performance from the state in which the change display performance is being performed, without going through a stop display.

In addition, in response to receiving a change start command, the sub-first change display 81 executes the change display without stopping the display. In other words, the sub-first change display 81 executes (continues) the change display without going through a stop display from the state in which the change display is being performed.

In addition, in response to receiving the change start command, if there is an inconsistency between the first reserved number U1 in the main control unit 100 and the reserved number (N1) of the first special pattern in the performance control unit 130 as described above, the first reserved icon HA disappears and moves instantaneously in one frame (or moves briefly in multiple frames), and then shifts due to the icon movement display performance.

The above describes an example of a performance in which the performance control unit 130 is unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100 while a look-ahead continuous performance (zone performance) is being executed, but the same applies when a look-ahead performance is not being executed.

In addition, the above describes the case where a command cannot be received during the execution of a normal miss fluctuation (fluctuation pattern HP1 or HP2), but the fluctuation performance will continue in the same way if a command cannot be received during the execution of a reach fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to an SP reach performance, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to an SPSP reach performance, etc.). For example, when a fluctuation performance according to a fluctuation pattern corresponding to an SPSP reach performance is being executed, the performance progresses to an N reach performance, an SP reach performance, and an SPSP reach performance as time passes, and as a result of the SPSP reach performance, the three performance patterns 701 temporarily stop to notify whether or not a jackpot has been reached. If the performance control unit 130 does not receive a fluctuation stop command, the temporary stop period of the three performance patterns 701 indicating a miss or a jackpot is extended, and the period of the fluctuation display of the small pattern 702 and the fluctuation display of the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is also extended. In this case, the SPSP reach BGM is stopped in response to the end of the SPSP reach performance (the temporary stop of the three performance symbols 701) and is not output during this extended period. Then, in response to receiving the next change stop command, the performance symbol 701 stops permanently, and the small symbol 702 and the sub first change display 81 are also displayed as stopped.

In the above embodiment, when a command from the main control unit 100 becomes unreceivable and then becomes receivable, if there is an inconsistency between the reserved number managed by the main control unit 100 and the reserved number managed by the performance control unit 130, the inconsistency is resolved in response to the reception of a change stop command. In another embodiment, the inconsistency may be resolved in response to the reception of a change start command. Specifically, the performance control unit 130 determines whether an inconsistency has occurred based on the first reserved number and the second reserved number included in the change start command, and if an inconsistency has occurred, it adds a missing reserved icon, erases an unnecessary reserved icon, updates the first number reserved SHA and the second number reserved SHB, and updates the display of the sub first reserved indicator 83 and the sub second reserved indicator 84.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the performance control unit 130 does not receive a command from the main control unit 100 normally, the performance pattern 701 will remain temporarily stopped and oscillate even if the special pattern is displayed as stopped. This allows the player to continue to be notified of the result of the jackpot determination.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the performance control unit 130 fails to receive a command from the main control unit 100 normally, even if the special symbol is displayed as stopped, the small symbol 702 continues the variable display performance and the sub-first variable display 81 continues the variable display. This allows the player's expectations to be maintained. Also, because the small symbol 702 and the sub-first variable display 81 continue the variable display for a long period of time, the player can be made aware of the abnormal condition.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the performance control unit 130 is unable to receive a command from the main control unit 100 normally, the icon TI will not disappear but will continue to be displayed even if the special symbol is stopped and displayed. This allows the player's expectations to be maintained. Also, because the icon TI will remain displayed for a long period of time, the player can be made aware of the abnormal state.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the performance control unit 130 is unable to properly receive commands from the main control unit 100, the currently executing variable performance (variable display performance of the performance pattern 701, pre-stop action performance, advance notice performance, reach performance, etc.) continues, and pre-reading performance (for example, zone performance) is also executed. This allows the player's expectations to be maintained.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the performance control unit 130 returns to a state where it can receive commands from the main control unit 100 after being unable to receive commands normally, a change performance using the performance pattern 701 is executed in response to the next change start command, and a pre-reading performance (start-time effect performance) that has been determined in advance to be executed in that change is also executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a stop fluctuation command is received while a specific performance is being executed (for example, while the icon TI is being displayed), the specific performance is terminated (the icon TI is made to disappear), if the stop fluctuation command is not received, the specific performance is continued, and if the next command (next start fluctuation command) is received, the specific performance being executed is terminated and another performance (movement to the new icon) is executed. In other words, on the premise that the specific performance is terminated in response to receiving a first command while the specific performance is being executed, and another performance is executed in response to receiving a second command, even if the second command is received without receiving the first command, the specific performance is terminated and the other performance is executed. In this way, even if the first command is not received, the performance can be executed while maintaining consistency by receiving the second command.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a change start command corresponding to the start of change of the special symbol that is the target of pre-reading is not received, a pre-reading effect can be executed while the special symbol is changing, even if a change effect (for example, a start action effect using the effect symbol 701, a change display effect, a change display of the small symbol 702, a change display of the sub first change display 81, movement of the first hold icon, etc.) is not executed while the special symbol is changing. This makes it possible to maintain the player's expectations even if a change effect cannot be executed.

When a look-ahead performance is executed without executing a variable performance, the look-ahead performance is executed continuously. Also, the look-ahead performance has a display for look-ahead (zone display image 707) and a sound for look-ahead (zone BGM) as its modes, and when a look-ahead performance is executed without executing a variable performance, the display for look-ahead can change gradually (for example, from a horizontal zone display image 707 to a vertical zone display image 707, a change in color of the zone display image 707, a change from an image showing a weak zone to an image showing a strong zone, etc.), but as for the sound for look-ahead, there may be times when the output mode changes when the mode of the display for look-ahead changes, and times when the output mode does not change.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a look-ahead continuous performance across multiple special symbol changes, and when a change start command is received in response to the start of a special symbol change, a change performance (start-time action performance of performance symbol 701, change display performance, etc.) is executed, and a look-ahead continuous performance (for example, start-time effect performance) is executed, but when a change start command is not received, the execution of the change performance and look-ahead continuous performance is restricted (suppressed) during the change display of that special symbol. Even when the execution of the change performance and look-ahead continuous performance is restricted (suppressed), when a change start command is received in response to the start of the next special symbol change, a restricted (suppressed) look-ahead continuous performance (start-time effect performance) is executed. This allows a look-ahead continuous performance to be executed even when a change start command cannot be received, creating anticipation for the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a change start command corresponding to the start of special symbol change is not received and a change performance is not executed, a first look-ahead performance (e.g., a zone performance, a performance using the first hold icon HA, etc.) is executed while the special symbol change is being displayed, but a second look-ahead performance (e.g., a start effect performance, a look-ahead chance eye performance) is not executed. This allows for executable look-ahead performances to be executed even if a change start command cannot be received, raising the player's expectations.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a change stop command is not received during the temporary stop of the three performance patterns 701, the temporary stop period of the performance patterns 701 is extended, and the background music is continuously output even during the extension of this temporary stop period. This makes it possible to prevent the performance from being interrupted.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the variation stop command is received normally, the background music continues until a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the special symbol stopped display, and the background music stops after the predetermined time has passed. On the other hand, if the variation stop command is not received normally, the background music is not stopped and continues to be output even after a predetermined time has passed since the special symbol stopped display (the start of the extension of the temporary stop period of the three performance symbols 701). This makes it possible to prevent the performance from being interrupted.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a change stop command is not received during the change display performance of the small pattern 702 (or the sub first change display 81), the change display performance of the small pattern 702 is extended, and the BGM continues to be output even during the extension of this change display performance. This allows the performance to continue.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a change stop command is not received while the icon TI is displayed, the display of the icon TI is extended, and the BGM continues to be output even during the extension of the display of the icon TI. This allows the performance to continue.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a fluctuation stop command is not received in a normal miss fluctuation, the temporary stop period of the three performance symbols 701 is extended, and BGM is continuously output during this extended period. For example, if normal BGM is being output, output of normal BGM is continued, and if zone BGM is being output, output of zone BGM is continued. On the other hand, for example, if a fluctuation stop command is not received in an SPSP reach fluctuation or SP reach fluctuation, the temporary stop period of the three performance symbols 701 is extended, but BGM for SPSP reach or BGM for SP reach is not continuously output during this extended period. This allows the performance to continue in the case of a normal miss fluctuation even if the fluctuation stop command cannot be received, while, for example, if an SP reach performance is performed, the player can be made aware that the SP reach performance has essentially ended, and excessive expectations can be prevented from being maintained.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a look-ahead performance (e.g., a zone performance) is being executed and a variable stop command is not received while the three performance symbols 701 are temporarily stopped, the temporary stop period of the performance symbols 701 is extended, and the look-ahead performance being executed continues even during the extension of this temporary stop period. This allows the look-ahead performance to continue, and the player's expectations to be maintained.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a look-ahead performance (e.g., a zone performance) is being executed and a change stop command is not received during the change display performance of the small pattern 702 (or the sub-first change display 81), the execution period of the change display of the small pattern 702 (or the sub-first change display 81) is extended, and the look-ahead performance being executed continues even during this extended period. This allows the look-ahead performance to continue, and the player's expectations to be maintained.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a look-ahead performance (e.g., a zone performance) is being performed and a fluctuation stop command is not received while the icon TI is being displayed, the display period of the icon TI is extended, and the look-ahead performance being performed continues during this extended period. This allows the look-ahead performance to continue, and keeps the player's expectations up.

The stage of the performance mode of the look-ahead performance is not changed during the extended period of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 701, the extended period of the variable display performance of the small pattern 702, and the extended period of the display of the icon TI. For example, if a zone performance is being executed, the mode of the zone performance is not changed from a weak zone to a strong zone. Also, if the first hold icon HA is displayed in a first special mode (e.g., blue), it is not changed to a second special mode (e.g., red). This makes it possible to control the look-ahead performance.

In addition, during the extension period of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 701, the extension period of the variable display performance of the small pattern 702, and the extension period of the display of the icon TI, a trigger performance that serves as a trigger for changing the stage of the performance mode of the look-ahead performance (a performance that makes the player expect that the performance mode of the look-ahead performance will change (or that there is a possibility of this happening)) is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations.

In addition, BGM (zone BGM) for the look-ahead performance can be output during the extended period of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 701, the extended period of the variable display performance of the small pattern 702, and the extended period of the display of the icon TI. This makes it possible to appeal to the player that the look-ahead performance will continue, thereby increasing interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation stop command is received normally, the disappearance of the icon TI is performed by an animation spanning multiple frames in response to the reception of the fluctuation stop command. On the other hand, when the icon TI continues to be displayed without receiving the fluctuation stop command and the next command (next fluctuation stop command, next fluctuation start command, or customer waiting command) is received, the icon TI is erased in a relatively short time (e.g., one frame). In other words, the disappearance period of the icon TI when the next command is received without receiving the fluctuation stop command is shorter than the disappearance period of the icon TI when the fluctuation stop command is received normally. This makes it possible to immediately erase the icon TI when the fluctuation stop command is not received normally.

The disappearance period of the icon TI when the next fluctuation start command (or fluctuation stop command) is received without normally receiving the fluctuation stop command may be the same as the disappearance period of the icon TI when the next customer waiting command is received without normally receiving the fluctuation stop command.

In addition, during the extension period of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 701, the extension period of the variable display performance of the small pattern 702, and the extension period of the display of the icon TI, a preview performance (confirmation performance) suggesting that a jackpot game will be played is not started, but the preview performance that started before the extension period continues to be executed during the extension period. In addition, the preview performance (confirmation performance) can be executed at multiple times before the extension period, and may continue to be executed during the extension period regardless of when it was started. In addition, the preview performance (confirmation performance) includes a first performance (e.g., sound) and a second performance (light emission in a specified color), and the first performance ends before the extension, but the second performance may continue to be executed during the extension period.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, it is possible to adjust the volume using the cross key 19 while the special symbol is being displayed, and normally, when the special symbol stops changing and starts changing, volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is suppressed (restricted). If a change stop command is not received normally while the performance symbol 701 is temporarily stopped, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 701 is extended. During the extension of this temporary stop period, it is possible to adjust the volume using the cross key 19. Also, even during the extension of this period, normal BGM or zone BGM is output, but BGM for SP reach and BGM for SPSP reach are not output during the extension of this period.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a change stop command is not received normally during the change display of the small pattern 702 (or the sub first change display 81), the change display period of the small pattern 702 is extended. During this extension of the change display period, it is possible to adjust the volume using the cross key 19. Also, even during the extension of this period, normal BGM or zone BGM is output, but BGM for SP reach or BGM for SPSP reach is not output during the extension of this period.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a fluctuation stop command is not received normally while the icon TI is displayed, the display period of the icon TI is extended. During this extension of the display period, it is possible to adjust the volume using the cross key 19. Furthermore, even during this extension of the period, normal BGM or zone BGM is output, but BGM for SP reach or BGM for SPSP reach is not output during this extension of the period.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the change stop command is not received normally while the performance pattern 701 is temporarily stopped, the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 701 is extended, and if the next change start command is received after that, the performance pattern 701 does not stop properly, but starts the change performance (start operation performance) from the temporary stop position. This allows the performance to return to normal even if there is an abnormality in which the change stop command is not received.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the next start-of-change command is received during the extended period of the change display of the small pattern 702 (or the sub-first change display 81) due to a failure to properly receive the stop-of-change command, the small pattern 702 (or the sub-first change display 81) will not stop displaying, but will continue to display the change. This allows the normal presentation to be restored even if there is an abnormality in which the stop-of-change command is not received.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the next fluctuation start command is received during the extension of the display period of the icon TI due to an unsuccessful reception of the fluctuation stop command, the icon TI is erased (e.g., instantly erased in one frame), and then the first pending icon HA1 is moved by an icon movement display presentation to display the icon TI. This allows a return to normal presentation even in the event of an abnormality in which the fluctuation stop command is not received.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130 receives a power-on command from the main control unit 100 during an extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 701 due to failure to properly receive a change stop command during the temporary stop of the performance pattern 701, the performance pattern 701 is made invisible and a power-on image is displayed.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130 receives a power-on command from the main control unit 100 during the extended period of the changing display of the small pattern 702 (or the sub-first changing display unit 81) due to failure to properly receive the change stop command, the small pattern 702 is made invisible and a power-on image is displayed.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130 receives a power-on command from the main control unit 100 during the extension of the display period of the icon TI due to failure to properly receive the change stop command, the icon TI is made invisible and a power-on image is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the number of reserved items in the performance control unit 130 (the number of first reserved icons HA, the number of first number reserved SHA, etc.; here "HA_N") becomes greater than the first reserved number (U1) stored in the main control unit 100 due to an unsuccessful reception of a command from the main control unit 100, then upon reception of the next start fluctuation command, the surplus (HA_N-U1-1) first reserved icons will not be shifted, but the necessary number (U1+1) of first reserved icons will be shifted. This allows for a return to normal performance even in the event of an abnormality in which a stop fluctuation command is not received.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a discrepancy occurs between the first reserved number U1 stored in the main control unit 100 and the reserved number of the first special pattern in the performance control unit 130 (the number of first reserved icons HA, the number of first number reserved SHA, etc.) due to a failure to receive a command from the main control unit 100 during the execution of the look-ahead performance, the look-ahead performance can be executed during the execution of the variable performance in response to the reception of the next variable start command. Note that when the next variable start command is received, the look-ahead performance currently being executed may be terminated.

(Example of what happens if the power is cut off while a special symbol is being displayed)
Next, a description will be given of an example of a performance when the power supply is cut off during the variable display of the special symbol. In the following, a description will be given of a case where the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is cut off when the first special symbol is being variable displayed and the first reserved number U1 is "1".

Figure 72 shows an example of a timing chart when the power is cut off during the variable display of the first special symbol. Figures 73 to 75 show examples of displays at each timing in Figure 72.

As shown in FIG. 72, at time t0, the first special symbol is being displayed in a changing manner, the performance symbol 701 is performing a changing display performance, and the small symbol 702 and the sub-first changing display 81 are also displaying changes (FIG. 73(a)). In addition, the first reserved number U1 shown by the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1", and the reserved number shown by the sub-first reserved display 83 is also "1". In addition, the first reserved icon HA1 in the special mode (blue) is displayed, and the icon TI is also displayed. In addition, the first number reserved SHA is "1". In addition, a normal background image is displayed as the background image, and normal BGM is being output.

Next, assume that the power is cut off at time t1. When the power is cut off, all LEDs of the main information display 59, including the first special pattern display 60 and the first special pattern reserved display 63, are turned off, and all LEDs of the sub information display 80, including the sub first variable display 81 and the sub first reserved display 83, are also turned off. The first image display device 70 also stops operating (Figure 73 (c)). Even if the power is cut off, the information stored in the main RAM 100c of the main control unit 100 is maintained for a certain period of time (for example, 24 hours).

After a predetermined time has elapsed from time t1, the power is restored without any setting change operation or RWM clear operation being performed, and the above-mentioned initial setting process is performed, so that the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 resume at time t2. Here, the display of the first special symbol changes is resumed from the state it was in immediately before the power was cut off.

That is, if the third and fourth LEDs from the left of the first special symbol display 60 are lit (FIG. 73(b)) just before the power is cut off (e.g., 1 ms before the power is cut off), when the LEDs of the first special symbol display 60 are lit for the first time after the power is restored at time t2, the third and fourth LEDs from the left will be lit (FIG. 73(d)). As mentioned above, the lighting state of each LED of the first special symbol display 60 changes every 32 ms. If the power is cut off 32 ms after the third and fourth LEDs are lit, the fourth and fifth LEDs will be the first to light up after the power is restored.

At time t2 when the display of the first special symbol is resumed, the first image display device 70 does not display any effect images related to the game, including the effect symbol 701, small symbol 702, reserved icon, the icon, the first number reserved SHA, and the second number reserved SHB (Figure 73 (d)). Note that in this case, an image indicating that the gaming machine 1 is starting up may be displayed.

After that, at time t3, a power restoration image is displayed in response to a power restoration command from the main control unit 100 (the diagram on the left side of Figure 74 (e)). Here, the power restoration command includes information that identifies whether the machine is in a waiting state for customers, a changing display of special symbols, or a jackpot game. In addition to the power restoration command, commands indicating the current game state, the first reserved number U1, and the second reserved number U2 are also sent from the main control unit 100. Images are generated based on these commands.

Specifically, as shown in the right-hand diagram of FIG. 74(e), a presentation image including a background image corresponding to the game status, three predetermined presentation patterns 701 and small patterns 702, a number of first reservation icons HA corresponding to the first reservation number U1, an image of a first number reservation SHA corresponding to the first reservation number U1, and an image of a second number reservation SHB corresponding to the second reservation number U2 is internally generated in the image and sound control unit 140.

Even during the variable display of the first special symbol, the three predetermined performance symbols 701 and the small symbol 702 are stopped. In addition, regardless of the symbol that was displayed before the power was cut off, a predetermined fixed combination of three performance symbols (for example, "123") is drawn. In any performance mode, a predetermined fixed combination of three performance symbols (for example, "123") is drawn. For example, in the normal game state, a predetermined performance mode (for example, performance mode A) is set among multiple performance modes A to C (stages A to C), and a performance symbol in a display mode corresponding to the predetermined performance mode is drawn. In the probability game state, a performance symbol in a display mode corresponding to performance mode D is drawn. In any performance mode, the combination of three performance symbols when the power is restored is a common number combination ("123").

The first hold icon HA is the same as it was before the power was cut off, but its display mode is normal. That is, the first hold icon HA1, which was displayed in a special mode before the power was cut off, is in its normal mode after the power is restored. The first hold icon HA1 also performs the cyclic operation described above. The icon is not displayed (generated) in the internally generated performance image. The background image is a background image that corresponds to the game status. The layers (priority) of these images, such as the background image, performance pattern 701, and hold icon, are the same as those during normal play, with the background image being placed at the backmost side and the performance pattern 701, etc. being placed at the front side of the background image.

A power restoration image corresponding to the power restoration command is placed on a layer further in front of this generated effect image, and the power restoration image is displayed on the first image display device 70 (the left diagram in Figure 74 (e)). In other words, the generated effect image including the effect pattern 701 etc. is not displayed on the first image display device 70, and is not visible to the player. The power restoration image is an image that indicates that the power has been restored, and is an image for making the player wait until a normal effect image including the effect pattern 701 etc. is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 74(e), while the power restoration image is displayed, no change display (LED blinking) is performed using the sub-first change indicator 81. On the other hand, while the power restoration image is displayed, the sub-first hold indicator 83 displays according to the first hold number U1. That is, since the first hold number U1 is "1" here, the left LED of the two LEDs on the sub-first hold indicator 83 is lit, indicating that the first hold number U1 related to the first special pattern is "1". Note that, since the second hold number U2 is "0", the two LEDs on the sub-second hold indicator 84 are off, and the second number hold SHB in the internally generated performance image is also "0".

While this power restoration image is displayed, the first special symbol continues to change and the game itself is in progress. For example, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 at time t4, the first reserved number U1 in the main control unit 100 changes to "2", and the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is reserved.

In response to the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 45, the display of the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes to "2" and the first number reserved SHA also changes to "2" (Figure 74 (f)). The first reserved icon HA is also added. Specifically, an icon addition display performance (addition display animation) of the first reserved icon HA2 is performed. Since the power recovery image is superimposed on the layer on the front side, the added first reserved icon HA2 is not visible to the player at this point. In addition, if it is determined in the icon change performance determination process that the added first reserved icon HA2 is to be added in a special manner, it is added in a special manner. Here, the first reserved icon HA2 is added in a normal manner. In addition, a winning sound may be output in response to the winning of the game ball into this starting hole. By outputting the winning sound, the player can be made aware that a winning has occurred in the starting hole, even if the icon addition display performance of the first reserved icon HA2 is not visible. The winning sound also allows the player to recognize the display mode of the first hold icon HA that will be added.

Next, when the first special symbol variation time has elapsed at time t5, the first special symbol is displayed as still on the first special symbol display 60 (Fig. 74 (g)). The period during which the power supply to the gaming machine 1 was cut off is not counted as part of the special symbol variation time. Therefore, the first special symbol is displayed as still when the remaining variation time of the first special symbol at time t1 has elapsed after the variation display is resumed at time t3.

In response to the display of the stopped first special symbol, at time t6, a fluctuation stop command is received by the performance control unit 130. In response to receiving this fluctuation stop command, the power recovery image is erased, and a performance image including the performance symbol 701, small symbol 702, first hold icon HA, etc. is displayed on the first image display device 70 (Figure 75 (h)).

Next, at time t7, the display of the first special symbol begins to change (Figure 75 (i)). At this point, the performance control unit 130 has not received a change start command from the main control unit 100, and the performance symbol 701, small symbol 702, etc. remain displayed as stopped symbols.

Next, at time t8, in response to the performance control unit 130 receiving a command to start changing the first special symbol, a start-up action performance using the performance symbol 701, a change display of the small symbol 702, and a change display using the sub-first change display 81 are started (Figure 75 (j)). In addition, an icon movement display performance of the first reserved icon HA is started, and the display of the sub-first reserved display 83 and the first number reserved SHA decreases from "2" to "1".

In this way, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off while the special symbols are being displayed in a changing state, and then restored, the game will proceed with the power restoration image displayed until the changing special symbols are displayed as still. Then, in response to the special symbols being displayed as still, the power restoration image is erased and the normal presentation image including the presentation symbols 701 and the like will be displayed. When the power is restored, a power restoration command, a command indicating the number of reserved symbols, and a command indicating the game status are sent from the main control unit 100 to the presentation control unit 130. Based on these commands, the presentation control unit 130 recognizes that the power has been restored while the special symbols are being displayed in a changing state, the number of reserved symbols, and the game status, and generates and displays an image accordingly.

Specifically, when the power is restored, a power restoration image is displayed, and even while the power restoration image is being displayed, the reserved icon is drawn in a lower layer. However, the reserved icon is made invisible by the power restoration image. Also, if the reserved jackpot determination for the special pattern (reserved special pattern fluctuation) increases while the power restoration image is being displayed, the reserved icon corresponding to the increase is also drawn, but is made invisible by the power restoration image. Also, while the power restoration image is being displayed, even if the special pattern is fluctuating, the performance pattern 701 and small pattern 702 are drawn stopped, but are made invisible by the power restoration image.

In addition, if the power is cut off while the hold icon is displayed in a special mode and is then restored, an image of the hold icon in the normal mode is drawn. The power restoration image is drawn in the layer above it, and the hold icon in the normal mode becomes invisible. Then, at a specified timing (the timing when the special pattern stops being displayed), the power restoration image is erased and the hold icon in the normal mode is displayed.

In addition, if a game ball enters the starting hole while the power restoration image is being displayed, a special reserved icon may be additionally drawn based on the results of a preliminary determination. The power restoration image is drawn on a layer above it, and the special reserved icon becomes invisible. Then, at a specified timing (the timing when the special symbol stops being displayed), the power restoration image is erased and the special reserved icon is displayed.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters the starting hole while the power restoration image is being displayed, an additional reserved icon is drawn and a winning sound is output. This allows the player to easily recognize that a winning ball has entered the starting hole, even if the added reserved icon is drawn on a lower layer of the power restoration image and is not visible. Furthermore, if the added reserved icon is a reserved icon with a special aspect, a winning sound corresponding to the special aspect may be output. In this case, even if the reserved icon is not visible, the player can recognize that a reserved icon with a special aspect has been added.

In addition, even when the power recovery image is being displayed, the hold icon is drawn and the hold icon performs the above-mentioned periodic operation. This allows the performance to start smoothly even when transitioning from the power recovery image to the normal performance image.

By this control, when the power recovery image is erased (when the special symbol is stopped), a performance image according to the current state (game status, number of reserved balls, special symbol fluctuation state, etc.) can be instantly displayed, and the performance can be smoothly resumed when the next special symbol starts to fluctuate. Also, by displaying the power recovery image until the current special symbol fluctuates, it is possible to confuse the player less than when the performance symbol 701 is displayed fluctuating when the power is restored. In other words, when executing the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 701 when the power is restored, it is necessary to precisely determine what kind of performance is to be executed and at what timing, and if the timing of the stopped display of the special symbol and the timing of the performance using the performance symbol 701 do not match, it will confuse the player. By displaying the power recovery image until the current special symbol fluctuates, this can be prevented.

In the above embodiment, when the performance control unit 130 receives a fluctuation stop command, the power restoration image is erased and a normal performance image including the performance pattern 701 and the like is displayed. Such control may be performed in response to another command instead of the fluctuation stop command. For example, when the performance control unit 130 receives the next fluctuation start command, the power restoration image may be erased and a normal performance image may be displayed. Also, when a customer wait command is received, the power restoration image may be erased and a normal performance image may be displayed.

In addition, if the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off while waiting for customers and then restored, the power restoration image shown in FIG. 74(e) is not displayed, or the power restoration image is displayed for just a moment, and then the normal effect image is displayed. In this case, the three effect symbols 701 and the small symbols 702 are displayed in a predetermined fixed number combination.

In addition, if the power to the gaming machine 1 is cut off during a jackpot game and then the power is restored, the power restoration image shown in FIG. 74(e) will not be displayed, or the power restoration image will be displayed for just a moment, and then an image related to the effects that were produced during the jackpot game will be displayed.

(Other characteristics when power is restored and when power is turned on)
When power is restored after a power outage or when power is turned on, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has the following features.

For example, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the power switch is pressed while the effect button 17 is pressed, a menu screen is displayed before the gaming machine 1 becomes playable, allowing the user to perform store settings, RTC settings, eco mode settings, or debug mode startup. The store settings are settings that allow gaming staff to input store information. The RTC settings are settings for date and time. The eco mode settings are settings for whether or not to set the eco mode that reduces power consumption. If the effect control unit 130 receives a power-on command while such a menu screen is displayed, it makes the menu screen invisible and displays a power-on image. If the effect control unit 130 receives a power restoration command while the menu screen is displayed, it makes the menu screen invisible and displays a power restoration image.

The first movable member 73a is movable in a first region, and the second movable member 73b is movable in a second region overlapping the first region. When a jackpot is announced, the first movable member 73a executes a first movable role performance in which the first movable member 73a moves from an initial position to a first performance position overlapping the display area of the performance pattern 701, and the second movable member 73b executes a second movable role performance in which the second movable member 73b moves from the initial position to a second performance position overlapping the display area of the performance pattern 701. The first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are usually waiting in their initial positions. When the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are waiting in their initial positions, the power is cut off, and when the power is restored, a power restoration image is displayed and an initial operation is performed to operate the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b from their initial positions. If the power supply is interrupted during the operation of the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b may not be in their initial positions when the power supply is restored. If the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are not in their initial positions when the power supply is restored, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are returned to their initial positions at different times, and a power restoration image is displayed. After the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are returned to their initial positions, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are moved to the same performance position and performance mode as when the movable role performance is performed at different times, and then an initial operation is performed to move them to their initial positions. During the initial operation, a power restoration image is displayed. By performing such control, the operation of multiple movable members with overlapping movable ranges can be confirmed without interfering with each other, even if they are not in their initial positions when the power supply is restored.

The pending change of the first special symbol is displayed using the first special symbol pending indicator 63, the sub-first pending indicator 83, and the first pending icon HA. The display mode of the first pending icon HA can be changed, whereas the display mode of the first special symbol pending indicator 63 and the sub-first pending indicator 83 cannot be changed. When the power is restored, the display of the first special symbol pending indicator 63 and the sub-first pending indicator 83 is resumed before the display of the first pending icon HA is resumed. Similarly, for the pending change of the second special symbol, the display of the second special symbol pending indicator 64 and the sub-second pending indicator 84 is resumed before the display of the second pending icon HB is resumed when the power is restored. Therefore, the number of pending symbols can be notified as soon as possible when the power is restored.

In addition, while the power restoration image is being displayed, the volume value image (light intensity value image) corresponding to the volume adjustment operation (or light intensity adjustment operation) is also hidden. Similarly, if a game ball enters the starting hole while the power restoration image is being displayed, the volume value image (light intensity value image) is not displayed. In this case, the volume adjustment (or light intensity adjustment) itself corresponding to the volume adjustment operation (or light intensity adjustment operation) may be possible. The volume value image (light intensity value image) corresponding to the volume adjustment operation (or light intensity adjustment operation) is drawn internally, but may be made invisible by the power restoration image. Similarly, if the performance control unit 130 goes from being unable to receive commands from the main control unit 100 to being able to receive commands while the power restoration image is being displayed, the volume value image (light intensity value image) is not displayed.

After the power is restored, the power restoration image is erased in response to the reception of the fluctuation stop command, but the display of the volume value image (light intensity value image) is suppressed (hidden) for a predetermined period of time after the reception of the fluctuation stop command. If a special pattern fluctuation is pending, the volume value image (light intensity value image) is hidden until a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reception of the next fluctuation start command, and the volume value image (light intensity value image) can be displayed after the start operation performance of the performance pattern 701 is performed.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment may also have the following features:

Among the multiple reach effects with different jackpot expectancies, when a look-ahead effect (zone effect, start effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, icon change effect) is executed for an N reach effect with a low expectancy, the expectancy of the N reach effect may be higher than when the look-ahead effect is not executed. For example, the expectancy of the N reach effect when the look-ahead effect is not executed is "1%, whereas when the look-ahead effect is executed, the expectancy of the N reach effect may be increased to "5%". In addition, when a specific look-ahead effect is executed among the multiple look-ahead effects, the expectancy of the N reach effect may be higher than when the specific look-ahead effect is not executed. With this configuration, even if the reach effect has a low expectancy, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the player can be made to expect a jackpot. Note that there may be cases where the look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the N reach effect, and cases where the look-ahead effect is executed after the start of the N reach effect. In this case, the expectancy of the jackpot may be higher (or lower) in the former than in the latter. In addition, regarding the probability of winning the SPSP reach performance, such a change in the probability of winning may or may not occur.

In addition, the execution rate of each effect differs between when it is determined to be a jackpot and when it is determined to be a miss, as follows. Specifically, when it is determined to be a jackpot, the rate of executing N reach after executing the look-ahead effect is configured to be higher than the rate of executing N reach without executing the look-ahead effect (e.g., icon change effect). In addition, when it is determined to be a jackpot, the rate of executing SP reach effect after executing the look-ahead effect is configured to be higher than the rate of executing N reach effect after executing the look-ahead effect. In addition, when it is determined to be a jackpot, the rate of executing SPSP reach effect after executing the look-ahead effect is configured to be higher than the rate of executing SP reach effect after executing the look-ahead effect. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a miss, the rate of executing SP reach effect after executing the look-ahead effect is configured to be lower than the rate of executing N reach effect after executing the look-ahead effect. In addition, when it is determined to be a miss, the rate of executing SPSP reach effect after executing the look-ahead effect is configured to be lower than the rate of executing SP reach effect after executing the look-ahead effect.

The reserved icon can be changed to any of blue, red, and gold, and the icon can also be changed to any of blue, red, and gold. When the icon changes from a predetermined color to a specific color (e.g., gold), a suggestive effect may be executed that suggests that the change related to the icon will develop into an SPSP reach effect, which has a higher expectation than the SP reach effect. In this case, the SPSP reach effect is executed after the suggestive effect, but when the icon is a specific color, the SPSP reach effect may be executed regardless of whether the suggestive effect has been executed. Note that when the icon changes to the specific color while being displayed as a reserved icon, and the reserved icon of the specific color is displayed as the icon, the suggestive effect may not be executed. Also, the suggestive effect may be executed more easily when the icon changes to a specific color while the icon is being displayed than when the reserved icon changes to a specific color and is displayed as the icon.

In addition, for example, while the special symbols are changing due to a change pattern corresponding to the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance, the icon is more likely to change before the execution of the N reach performance than during the execution of the N reach performance. This allows players to expect a jackpot before the start of the N reach performance, and also allows them to expect the performance to progress to an SP reach performance or an SPSP reach performance, which have a high probability of winning.

The reserved icon and the icon can change at multiple times, and the second period during which the icon can change is longer than the first period during which the reserved icon can change. In addition, in a change in which a reach performance (N reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) is executed, the probability of changing the reserved icon is higher before the N reach performance starts than during the execution of the N reach performance. This makes it easier for the reserved icon to change before the reach performance is executed, so that the player's interest can be directed to the reserved icon. In addition, after the reach performance starts, the reserved icon becomes harder to change and conversely, the icon becomes easier to change, so that the player's interest can be directed to the change (current change).

The number of stages of the reserved icon or the display mode of the icon may differ depending on the presentation mode. For example, there may be a first presentation mode in which the reserved icon can be displayed in a display mode with a first number of stages (e.g., blue, red, gold) and a first background image is displayed, and a second presentation mode in which the reserved icon can be displayed in a display mode with a second number of stages (e.g., blue, red, gold, rainbow) and a second background image is displayed. Also, before the icon change presentation that changes the reserved icon, an icon change suggestion presentation that triggers the execution of the icon change presentation (suggesting that the icon may change) may be executed. The content of the icon change suggestion presentation may differ depending on which stage of the display mode of the reserved icon changes to and from among the multiple stages. For example, the form of the icon change suggestion presentation when changing from blue to red may be different from the form of the icon change suggestion presentation when changing from blue to gold.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment may perform a confirmation effect (a confirmation effect indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed) that suggests that a jackpot game will be played while a variable effect is being performed.

For example, a confirmation sound may be output as a confirmation effect, suggesting that a jackpot game will be played. The confirmation sound is output without being associated with an operation prompting effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 17. There may be a first notification effect pattern in which an operation prompting effect is executed after the confirmation sound is output, and a jackpot is notified by operating the movable effect device 73 in response to an operation of the effect button 17, and a second notification effect pattern in which an operation prompting effect is executed without outputting a confirmation sound, and a jackpot is notified by operating the movable effect device 73 in response to an operation of the effect button 17. When the second notification effect pattern is executed, the confirmation sound is not output, even after the movable effect device 73 is operated.

There is also a first reach performance pattern in which an SP reach performance is executed from an N reach performance, and then an SPSP reach performance is executed, and a second reach performance pattern in which an SPSP reach performance is executed from an N reach performance without executing an SP reach performance. A confirmation performance can be executed when the first reach performance pattern is executed and when the second reach performance pattern is executed, and the execution manner of the confirmation performance can be different for each pattern. Also, an operation promotion performance that encourages an operation of the performance button 17 can be executed, and if the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period of the operation of the performance button 17 in the operation promotion performance, a notice performance can be executed that suggests that a jackpot game may be played. A confirmation performance can be executed at multiple times during the variable performance, but the confirmation performance may not be executed during the valid period of the operation.

In addition, an operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 may be executed, and if the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period of the operation of the effect button 17 in the operation promotion effect, a notice effect may be executed suggesting that a jackpot game may be played, and a confirmation effect accompanied by output of a confirmation sound suggesting that a jackpot game will be played may be executed. The execution rate of the confirmation effect and/or the execution rate of the notice effect differs between when the movable effect device 73 is activated and when it is not activated, and the confirmation effect can be executed at multiple times during the variable effect, but the confirmation effect may not be executed during the valid period (during the operation promotion effect).

Also, before the deciding effect immediately before announcing whether or not a jackpot has been reached, a confirmation effect suggesting that a jackpot game will be played and a suggestion effect suggesting the possibility that a jackpot game will be played may be executed. The suggestion effects include a first suggestion effect and a second suggestion effect with a higher probability of a jackpot than the first suggestion effect, and the movable effect device 73 is configured to operate more easily when the second suggestion effect is executed than when the first suggestion effect is executed. Also, an operation promotion effect that encourages an operation of the effect button 17 can be executed, and an effect suggesting the possibility of a jackpot game being played can be executed when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period of the operation of the effect button 17 in the operation promotion effect. When a jackpot is determined to be reached and a reach effect is executed, the effect button 17 is more likely to change to a protruding state in the operation promotion effect when the operation promotion effect is executed during the execution of the reach effect than when the operation promotion effect is executed before the reach effect is executed.

In addition, when a jackpot is determined, a first variation pattern of a first variation time or a second variation pattern of a second variation time longer than the first variation time can be selected, and when the first variation pattern is selected, a first confirmation performance is executed with a first probability, and when the second variation pattern is selected, a second confirmation performance is executed with a second probability. When the second confirmation performance is executed, a start-time action performance is executed using a performance pattern of a first mode (a first size and a mode in which a character is added), and during the execution of a predetermined performance, a variation display performance is executed using a performance pattern of a second mode (a second size smaller than the first size), and then a pre-stop action performance is executed using a performance pattern of a first mode or a third mode (a first size and a mode in which a character is not added). On the other hand, when the first confirmation performance is executed, a pre-stop action performance may be executed using a performance pattern of a first mode or a third mode without displaying a performance pattern of a second mode. Here, when the first confirmation performance is executed, a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player may be executed more easily than when the second confirmation performance is executed. Conversely, when the second confirmation effect is executed, it may be easier for the player to win a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than when the first confirmation effect is executed.

In addition, when the performance control unit 130 can receive commands from the main control unit 100, the oscillation period of the performance pattern 701 in a variation in which a miss is notified as a result of the reach performance (reach miss variation) is longer than the oscillation period of the performance pattern 701 in a variation in which a jackpot is notified (jackpot variation). In the case where the performance control unit 130 cannot receive commands from the main control unit 100, the oscillation period of the performance pattern 701 in a reach miss variation may be shorter than the oscillation period of the performance pattern 701 in a jackpot variation.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has the following features. Specifically, in a gaming machine in which a special symbol stops after multiple cycle changes, the performance symbol starts a start-time action performance (movement in a specified direction or character action) at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle change. Specifically, after the first cycle change ends, the performance symbol starts a start-time action performance (movement in a specified direction or character action).

In addition, in gaming machines where the special symbol stops after multiple cycles of fluctuation, the display of the fluctuation using the small symbol and the sub-first fluctuation display starts at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle of fluctuation. Specifically, after the first unit change (first LED lighting) in the first cycle of fluctuation ends, the display of the fluctuation using the small symbol and the sub-first fluctuation display starts.

In addition, in gaming machines where the special symbol stops after multiple cycle changes, the update of the reserved display (decreasing display) begins at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle change. Specifically, the shift movement (moving animation) of the reserved icon begins at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle change. In addition, after the first unit change (first LED lighting) in the first cycle change has ended, the shift movement (moving animation) of the reserved icon ends, thereby ending the update of the reserved display.

In addition, in gaming machines where the special symbol stops after multiple cycle changes, the reserved icon starts changing to the icon in question at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle change. Also, after the first unit change (first LED lighting) in the first cycle change is completed, the change from the reserved icon to the icon in question ends.

In addition, in gaming machines where the special symbol stops after multiple cycles of fluctuation, audible output of game sounds (for example, background music, fluctuation start sounds, and other warning sounds that warn of the results of the jackpot determination) begins at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation.

In addition, in a gaming machine in which a special symbol stops after multiple cycle changes, a background effect using a background image is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle change. Also, a background effect using a background image is executed before the start of the first cycle change and while the cycle change is being executed.

In addition, in gaming machines where the special symbol stops after multiple cycles of fluctuation, the performance symbol is displayed as stopped (temporarily stopped) at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle of fluctuation. The performance symbol is displayed as temporarily stopped before the final cycle of fluctuation of the special symbol is completed.

In addition, in gaming machines where the special symbol stops after multiple cycles of fluctuation, the small symbol and the sub-first fluctuation display stop at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle of fluctuation.

In addition, in gaming machines where the special symbol stops after multiple cycles of fluctuation, the reserved icon performs a cyclical action (a performance action, such as swinging from side to side, rotating, etc.) while the cycle of fluctuation is in progress and after the cycle of fluctuation has ended.

In addition, in gaming machines where the special symbol stops after multiple cycles of fluctuation, the disappearance effect (disappearance animation) of the icon ends at a timing different from the end timing of the last cycle of fluctuation. Specifically, the disappearance effect of the icon ends after the last cycle of fluctuation has ended.

Also, in gaming machines where special symbols stop after multiple cycle fluctuations, game sounds (performance background music, stop sounds in pre-read chance eye performances, and other temporary stop sounds output when performance symbols temporarily stop, and actual stop sounds output when they actually stop) that started to be output before the start of the final cycle fluctuation end at a timing different from the end timing of the final cycle fluctuation. Also, the audible output of game sounds (temporary stop sounds, etc.) that started to be output before the start of the final cycle fluctuation ends before the end of the final cycle fluctuation.

In addition, in gaming machines where the special symbol stops after multiple cycle changes, a specific game sound (such as background music) is audibly output during the cycle changes and after the final cycle change has ended.

In addition, in gaming machines where the special symbol stops after multiple cycles of fluctuation, background effects using background images are performed while the cycles are being performed and after the final cycle of fluctuation has ended.

The gaming machine 1 can also display number images (first number reserved SHA, second number reserved SHB) and reserved icons that indicate the number of reserved jackpot determination rights (change of special symbols), and can change the display mode of the reserved icons (for example, from four to three) after changing the display mode of the number images (for example, from "4" to "3") when the special symbols start to change. The display mode of the number images does not change if there is no new winning at the start port while the special symbols are changing. On the other hand, even if there is no new winning at the start port while the special symbols are changing, the reserved icons can repeatedly execute a cyclic operation in which the display mode is changed from a first state to a second state at a predetermined cycle. In addition, multiple reserved icons can be displayed, and the multiple reserved icons perform cyclic operations in synchronization (or nearly in synchronization).

When a hold icon is additionally displayed, the display mode differs in part between when the hold icon begins to be displayed and when the display is completed. In addition, the operating mode of the cyclical operation may differ in part between when the hold icon begins to be displayed and when the display is completed. For example, the icon may operate in a small manner when the display begins, and operate in a large manner after the display is completed. For example, the icon may operate with a left-right tilt in the range of 0 to 10 degrees when the display begins, and operate with a left-right tilt in the range of 25 degrees after the display is completed.

In addition, the size of the area in which the number image is displayed is the same whether there is a single reserved special pattern variation or multiple reserved variations, but the size of the area in which the reserved icon is displayed is different.

In addition, the reserved icon and the icon in question can be displayed, and the reserved icon and the icon in question can be made to repeatedly perform a predetermined cyclical operation while the special pattern is changing, and when the display of the special pattern changes ends, the icon in question can be made to disappear (not displayed), and then the cyclical operation of the reserved icon can be ended. Note that after the cyclical operation of the reserved icon ends, the icon in question can be made to disappear.

In addition, the reserved icon and the icon in question can be displayed, and the reserved icon and the icon in question can be made to repeatedly perform a predetermined cyclical operation while the special pattern is changing. After the performance pattern has temporarily stopped, the icon in question can be made to disappear, and the reserved icon can be made to perform a cyclical operation from when the performance pattern has stopped properly until the next special pattern starts changing.

In addition, it is possible to display the effect pattern and the icon, and to make the icon repeat a predetermined cyclical operation while the special pattern is fluctuating. After the effect pattern temporarily stops, the cyclical operation of the icon may be terminated, the transparency of the icon may be changed from a first transparency to a second transparency, and the icon may be made to disappear. Note that the effect pattern stops permanently after the temporary stop, and the transparency does not change before and after the permanent stop.

In addition, it is possible to display a performance pattern, a small pattern, and a reserved icon, and to repeatedly execute a predetermined cyclical operation that changes the reserved icon from a first state to a second state while the special pattern is changing. As the special pattern starts to change, the display of the small pattern change is started, and then the reserved icon is moved, and after the movement, the reserved icon may start a cyclical operation from the first state (from the beginning).

In addition, it is possible to display a performance pattern, a small pattern, and a reserved icon, and to repeatedly execute a predetermined cyclical operation that changes the reserved icon from a first state to a second state while the special pattern is changing. As the special pattern starts to change, the display of the small pattern change starts, and then the reserved icon is moved, and the reserved icon is made to perform a cyclical operation from when the performance pattern stops until the next special pattern starts to change.

In addition, it is possible to display a performance pattern, a small pattern, and a reserved icon, and in a first performance mode (first stage), it is possible to repeat a first periodic operation in which the reserved icon changes from a first state to a second state, and in a second performance mode (second stage) different from the first performance mode, it is possible to repeat a second periodic operation in which the reserved icon changes from a third state to a fourth state, and after the display of the small pattern changes begins with the start of the special pattern change, the reserved icon starts moving. The time it takes for the reserved icon to change from the first state to the next first state in the first periodic operation (the period of the first periodic operation) may be the same as the time it takes for the reserved icon to change from the third state to the next third state in the second periodic operation (the period of the second periodic operation).

In addition, a number image indicating the number of reserved balls and a reserved icon can be displayed, and in a first presentation mode (first stage), a first periodic operation in which the reserved icon changes from a first state to a second state can be repeated, and in a second presentation mode (second stage) different from the first presentation mode, a second periodic operation in which the reserved icon changes from a third state to a fourth state can be repeated. After the display mode of the number image changes as the special pattern starts to change, the display mode of the reserved icon changes. The time it takes for the reserved icon to change from the first state to the next first state in the first periodic operation (the period of the first periodic operation) may be the same as the time it takes for the reserved icon to change from the third state to the next third state in the second periodic operation (the period of the second periodic operation).

In addition, it is possible to display a performance pattern, a small pattern, and a reserved icon, and it is possible to change the display mode of the reserved icon from at least a first display mode to a second display mode in which the expectation of a special game being executed is higher than in the first display mode, and it is possible to start the display of the small pattern change as the special pattern starts to change, and then start moving the reserved icon. It is possible to repeat a first cyclic operation in which the reserved icon displayed in the first display mode changes from a first state to a second state in a first cycle, and it is possible to repeat a second cyclic operation in which the reserved icon displayed in the second display mode changes from a third state to a fourth state in a second cycle different from the first cycle.

In addition, it is possible to display a performance pattern, a reserve icon, and a reserve number display (number image) showing a different reserve number, and the reserve icon can repeat a cyclical operation of changing from a first state to a second state at a predetermined cycle. In addition, when the performance pattern stops, a performance using the performance pattern (pre-stop action performance or a performance that adds an effect) can be executed, and when the performance pattern stops, the cyclical operation of the reserve icon ends, and the reserve number display is changed according to the fluctuation of the next special pattern, and then the reserve icon is moved. The cycle of the cyclical operation of the reserve icon is shorter than the performance time of the performance using the performance pattern. Note that the cycle of the cyclical operation of the reserve icon may be longer than the performance time of the performance using the performance pattern.

In addition, it is possible to display a performance pattern, a hold icon, and a hold number display (number image) showing a different hold number, and the hold icon can repeat a cyclical operation of changing from a first state to a second state at a predetermined cycle. In addition, when the performance pattern stops, it is possible to execute a performance using the performance pattern (a pre-stop action performance or a performance that adds an effect). In addition, it is possible to cause the hold icon to perform a cyclical operation between the time when the performance pattern stops and the time when the next change begins, and the cycle of the cyclical operation of the hold icon is shorter than the performance time of the performance using the performance pattern. Note that the cycle of the cyclical operation of the hold icon may be longer than the performance time of the performance using the performance pattern.

In addition, it is possible to display a performance pattern, a small pattern, and a reserved icon, and it is possible to execute a cyclic operation in which the reserved icon changes from a first state to a second state, and it is possible to move the reserved icon after the display of the small pattern changes begins as the special pattern starts to change. After a reach performance (N reach performance) is executed, the reserved icon is hidden when a special performance (SP reach performance) with a high expectation of a special game being executed is executed, and the display of the reserved icon is maintained when a special performance is not executed after the reach performance is executed. The small pattern is maintained displayed regardless of whether or not a special performance is executed after the reach performance is executed.

It is also possible to display a performance pattern, a small pattern, and a reserved icon, and to execute a cyclic operation in which the reserved icon changes from a first state to a second state. After the display of the small pattern begins to change in accordance with the start of the special pattern change, the reserved icon can be moved. The display mode of the reserved icon can be changed at least from the first display mode to a second display mode in which the expectation of a special game being executed is higher than that of the first display mode, and when a special performance in which the expectation of a special game being executed is being executed, the reserved icon displayed in the second display mode is hidden, and when a special game is being executed after the special performance ends, the reserved icon is not displayed in the second display mode, and when a special game is being executed, the reserved icon is displayed when a special game is not being executed. The small pattern remains displayed even when a special performance is being executed.

It is also possible to display the effect pattern, the small pattern, and the reserved icon, and to execute a cyclic operation in which the reserved icon changes from a first state to a second state. After the display of the small pattern begins to change as the special pattern starts to change, the reserved icon can be moved. When playing a special game, the reserved icon is hidden when a special effect is being executed that has a high expectation of a special game being executed after the execution of a reach effect (Fig. 57(o)), and when playing a special game, the reserved icon remains displayed when a special effect is not executed after the execution of a reach effect (as a result of Fig. 56(j), a jackpot is announced). When playing a special game, the display of the small pattern is maintained both when a special effect is executed after the execution of a reach effect and when a special effect is not executed.

It is also possible to display a performance pattern, a small pattern, and a reserved icon, and to execute a cyclic operation in which the reserved icon changes from a first state to a second state. After the display of the small pattern begins to change in accordance with the start of the special pattern change, the reserved icon can be moved. When a special performance is being executed that has a high expectation of a special game being executed, the reserved icon is hidden (Fig. 57(o)), and if a performance pattern indicating a loss is displayed after the special performance ends and then a performance pattern indicating a jackpot is displayed, the reserved icon is hidden (Fig. 60(r-2)), and if a performance pattern indicating a loss is displayed after the special performance ends and then no performance pattern indicating a jackpot is displayed, the reserved icon is displayed (Fig. 58(u)). The small pattern remains displayed even when the special performance is being executed.

It is also possible to display a performance pattern, a small pattern, and a reserved icon, and to execute a cyclic operation in which the reserved icon changes from a first state to a second state. After the display of the small pattern begins to change as the special pattern begins to change, the reserved icon can be moved. After a reach performance is executed, the reserved icon is hidden when a special performance is executed that has a high expectation of a special game being executed (Figure 57 (o)), and after the special performance ends, the reserved icon is displayed when a performance pattern indicating a miss is displayed (Figure 58 (u)), and the reserved icon remains displayed when a special performance is not executed after a reach performance is executed. The small pattern remains displayed even when a special performance is executed.

In addition, it is possible to display a performance pattern, a small pattern, and a reserved icon, and after the small pattern starts to change as the special pattern starts to change, the reserved icon starts to move, and the small pattern changes and displays at a predetermined cycle. The reserved icon can repeat the cyclical operation of changing from a first state to a second state at a cycle different from the predetermined cycle (the cycle of the small pattern change and display).

In addition, it is possible to display the performance pattern, the sub-first change indicator which indicates that the special pattern is changing, and a hold icon, and it is possible to notify that the special pattern is changing by flashing the sub-first change indicator at a predetermined cycle. After the sub-first change indicator starts flashing as the special pattern starts to change, the hold icon starts moving, and the cyclical operation of the hold icon changing from the first state to the second state can be repeated at a cycle different from the predetermined cycle (the cycle of flashing the sub-first change indicator).

In addition, a reserved icon can be displayed, and the first special pattern display 60 can be made to change display (light on and off) at a predetermined cycle, after which the result of the jackpot determination can be announced, and after the first special pattern display 60 starts changing display according to the result of the jackpot determination, the reserved icon starts moving, and the cyclical operation of the reserved icon changing from a first state to a second state can be repeated at a cycle different from the predetermined cycle (the cycle of the changing display of the first special pattern display 60; for example, the cycle of cyclical change).

In addition, a reserved number display (first number reserved SHA, sub-first reserved display) that shows the reserved number and a reserved icon can be displayed, and as the special pattern begins to change, the reserved number display changes without moving, and after the reserved number display changes, the reserved icon moves.

In addition, it is possible to display a performance pattern, a small pattern, and a reserved icon, and after the small pattern starts to change and display as the special pattern starts to change, the reserved icon starts to move. The reserved icon repeats a cyclical movement of moving back and forth between a first position and a second position. The direction of movement of the small pattern is different from the direction of movement during the cyclical movement of the reserved icon.

In addition, a reserved icon can be displayed, and the result of the jackpot determination can be announced after the first special pattern display 60 is caused to change (light and blink) at a predetermined cycle, and the periodic operation in which the reserved icon changes from the first state to the second state can be repeated at a cycle different from the predetermined cycle (the cycle of the change display of the first special pattern display 60; for example, the cycle of cyclic change). After the first special pattern display 60 starts to light when the power is restored, the reserved icon is displayed.

In addition, a performance pattern and a reserved icon can be displayed, and after the performance pattern stops changing as the special pattern stops changing, the reserved icon starts moving, and the reserved icon can execute a cyclic operation in which it changes from a first state to a second state, and when a special performance that has a high expectation of a special game being executed is executed, the display mode of the performance pattern is changed, but the mode of the cyclic operation is not changed.

In addition, the effect pattern and the reserved icon can be displayed, and after the effect pattern stops changing as the special pattern stops changing, the reserved icon starts moving, and the reserved icon can execute a cyclic operation of changing from a first state to a second state, and when a special effect that has a high expectation of a special game being executed is executed, the display mode of the effect pattern is changed and the reserved icon is hidden.

As described above, various effects during the special pattern change, such as the start action effect using the special pattern during the cycle change, the change display effect using the special pattern, the stop action effect using the special pattern, the icon addition display effect, the icon movement display effect, the periodic action using the reserved icon or the icon, the icon disappearance effect, the reserved icon disappearance effect, the change display effect using the small pattern, and others, have been described, but the time of each effect may be as follows. For example, the time of the start action effect using the special pattern may be longer or shorter than the time of the stop action effect using the special pattern, and these times may differ depending on the expectation of the special game being played. For example, when the expectation of a big win in the change of the special pattern is relatively low, the start action effect in that change may be longer (or shorter) than the stop action effect, or they may be the same. Also, when the expectation is relatively high, the stop action effect may be longer (or shorter) than the start action effect, or they may be the same. In addition, regardless of the degree of expectation, the time of the variable display performance using the performance pattern may be longer than each of the times (and the sum of these times) of the start-time action performance and the stop-time action performance. In addition, the time of the start-time action performance may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the movement display performance of the reserved icon or the icon (icon). In addition, the time of the stop-time action performance may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the movement display performance of the icon. In addition, the time of the start-time action performance may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle of the cyclical action of the icon. In addition, the time of the stop-time action performance may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle of the cyclical action of the icon. In addition, the time of the stop-time action performance may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the disappearance performance of the icon. In addition, the time of the start-time action performance may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the disappearance performance of the icon. Additionally, the duration of the start-up action presentation may be longer, shorter, or the same as the duration of the presentation for disappearing the reserved icons when an unnecessary reserved icon is deleted if a command is not received correctly.

The time of the variable display performance using the small pattern (or the sub-first variable display device) may be longer than each of the times of the start-time action performance and the stop-time action performance using the performance pattern. The time of the variable display performance using the small pattern (or the sub-first variable display device) may be longer than the sum of the time of the start-time action performance and the time of the stop-time action performance. The time of the variable display performance using the small pattern (or the sub-first variable display device) may be longer than the sum of the time of the start-time action performance and the time of the variable display performance using the performance pattern. The time of the variable display performance using the small pattern (or the sub-first variable display device) may be longer than the sum of the time of the variable display performance using the performance pattern and the time of the stop-time action performance.

In addition, when a performance using a special character is performed during the change of a special pattern, the time from when the special character starts to move until it returns to its initial position may be longer than the time of the start-time action performance in that change. In addition, the time from when the special character starts to move until it returns to its initial position may be shorter than or the same as the time of the start-time action performance. In addition, when a performance using a special character is performed during the change of a special pattern, the time from when the special character starts to move until it returns to its initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the stop-time action performance using the performance pattern in that change. In addition, when a performance using a special character is performed during the change of a special pattern, the time from when the special character starts to move until it returns to its initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the change display performance using the performance pattern in that change. In addition, when a performance using a special character is performed during the change of a special pattern, the time from when the special character starts to move until it returns to its initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the movement display performance of the reserved icon or the icon (icon) in that change. Also, the time from when the prop starts to move until it returns to its initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the icon's cyclical movement. Also, the time from when the prop starts to move until it returns to its initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time it takes for the icon to disappear. Also, the time from when the prop starts to move until it returns to its initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time it takes for the reserved icon to disappear when an unnecessary reserved icon is made to disappear when a command is not received normally.

In addition, when a button prompting effect is executed to prompt button operation as shown in Figures 57 (n) and (p) during the change of the special pattern, the maximum time for which the valid period image YKG is displayed may be longer than each of the times (and the sum of these times) of the start-time action effect and the stop-time action effect using the effect pattern in that change.In addition, the maximum time for which the valid period image YKG is displayed may be shorter than the time of the change display effect using the effect pattern in that change.

In addition, when a button promotion effect is executed while the special pattern is changing, the maximum time for which the valid period image YKG is displayed may be longer than the time for the icon movement display effect.In addition, when a button promotion effect is executed while the special pattern is changing, the maximum time for which the valid period image YKG is displayed may be longer than the icon disappearance effect (the disappearance effect of the icon under normal circumstances, and the disappearance effect of the extra icon when a command cannot be received and an extra icon is displayed).

In addition, when a button promotion effect and an effect using a special symbol are executed during the change of the special symbol, the maximum time for which the valid period image YKG is displayed may be shorter, longer, or the same as the time from when the effect symbol starts to move to when it returns to its initial position. In addition, when a start effect effect is executed when the special symbol starts to change, the execution time of the start effect effect (the time for which the effect is added) may be shorter, longer, or the same as the start action effect using the effect symbol in that change. In addition, the execution time of the start effect effect may be shorter, longer, or the same as each of the stop action effect and the change display effect using the effect symbol in that change. In addition, when a pre-reading chance eye effect is executed, the time for which the effect image showing the chance eye is displayed may be shorter, longer, or the same as the stop action effect using the effect symbol in that change. In addition, when a pre-reading chance eye effect is executed, the time for which the effect image is displayed may be shorter, longer, or the same as the start action effect using the effect symbol in that change. Also, when a look-ahead chance eye effect is executed, the time for which the effect image is displayed may be shorter than, longer than, or the same as the time for which the effect image is displayed using the effect pattern in that change.

The duration of the start action performance using the performance symbols is longer than the time for one cycle of fluctuation of the special symbols. The duration of the variable display performance using the performance symbols is longer than the time for one cycle of fluctuation of the special symbols. The duration of the stop action performance using the performance symbols is longer than the time for one cycle of fluctuation of the special symbols.

The duration of the icon movement display effect may be longer than the duration of one cycle of the special pattern. The duration of the icon addition display effect may be longer, shorter, or the same as the duration of one cycle of the special pattern. The duration of the icon disappearance effect during normal play may be longer, shorter, or the same as the duration of one cycle of the special pattern. In addition, in the case where an extra icon is displayed due to a state in which commands cannot be received, the duration of the icon disappearance effect when the extra icon disappears may be shorter, longer, or the same as the duration of one cycle of the special pattern. The duration of the icon disappearance effect when the extra icon disappears may be longer than the duration of one unit change in the cycle of the special pattern.

The period of change of the sub-first change indicator 81 during the change of the first special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the cycle change of the first special symbol. The period of change of the sub-first change indicator 81 during the change of the first special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the unit change in the cycle change of the first special symbol. The period of change of the sub-second change indicator 82 during the change of the second special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the unit change in the cycle change of the second special symbol. The period of change of the sub-second change indicator 82 during the change of the second special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the unit change in the cycle change of the second special symbol.

In the above embodiment, a gaming machine was described in which, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a jackpot game is played and the gaming state is changed via the jackpot game. In other embodiments, even if a jackpot is not determined, the normal gaming state may be transitioned to a time-saving gaming state. For example, if the number of times that the special symbol changes in the normal gaming state (the number of consecutive times that are determined to be misses in the jackpot determination) reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (e.g., 300 times), the state may be transitioned to a time-saving gaming state for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 50 times, or 100 times or more) even if the change is not determined to be a jackpot. In this case, if a jackpot does not occur before the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times, the time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is returned to. Alternatively, even if the result of the jackpot determination is a miss (i.e., even if the random number value for jackpot determination obtained at the time of winning the starting hole is a value indicating a miss), if the random number value for jackpot pattern determination obtained at the time of winning (a random number for determining the jackpot pattern (type of jackpot) when it is determined that a jackpot has been won) is a predetermined value, the game may be shifted to a time-saving game state for a predetermined number of times. In addition, in the case of shifting to a time-saving game state based on the number of times of fluctuation of the special pattern, the above-mentioned predetermined upper limit number may be variable or fixed. For example, in the case where the predetermined upper limit number is variable, there may be a time when the time-saving game state is granted when the number of times of fluctuation of the special pattern becomes a first number, and a time-saving game state is granted when the number of times of fluctuation of the special pattern becomes a second number. In this case, the number of time-saving times granted may be different depending on the number of times of fluctuation of the special pattern, and the number of time-saving times may be set to be larger as the number of times of fluctuation increases. In addition, in the case of shifting to a time-saving game state based on the random number value for jackpot pattern determination, the number of time-saving times granted may be different depending on the acquired random number value for jackpot pattern determination. For example, when the acquired random number value for determining the jackpot pattern is a first value, a first number of time-saving times may be given, and when the acquired random number value for determining the jackpot pattern is a second value, a second number of time-saving times may be given. In addition, there may be a case where the time-saving game state is shifted to based on the number of times of variation of the special pattern, and a case where the time-saving game state is shifted to based on the random number value for determining the jackpot pattern. In this case, the number of time-saving times given may be different between a case where the time-saving game state is shifted to based on the number of times of variation of the special pattern and a case where the time-saving game state is shifted to based on the random number value for determining the jackpot pattern. For example, when the time-saving game state is shifted to based on the number of times of variation of the special pattern, a time-saving game state of 50 times may be shifted, and when the time-saving game state is shifted to based on the random number value for determining the jackpot pattern, a time-saving game state of 30 times may be shifted, which is less than the time-saving game state. Conversely, the number of time-saving times may be greater when the time-saving game state is shifted to based on the random number value for determining the jackpot pattern than when the time-saving game state is shifted to based on the number of times of variation of the special pattern. In addition, in the case where the time-saving game state is shifted to in this way without going through a jackpot, if a time-saving game state is further granted without going through a jackpot during the shifted time-saving game state, the time-saving game state may continue for the number of newly granted time-saving times. For example, if a time-saving game state of 50 times is granted without going through a jackpot, and when a special pattern fluctuates 30 times in the time-saving game state, and a time-saving game state of 50 times is granted without going through a jackpot, the time-saving game state of 50 times may be shifted to. Alternatively, in this case, the number of time-saving times may be added. For example, if a time-saving game state of 50 times is granted without going through a jackpot, and when a special pattern fluctuates 30 times in the time-saving game state, and a time-saving game state of 50 times is granted without going through a jackpot, the newly granted 50 times may be added to the remaining 20 times, and a time-saving game state of 70 times may be granted. In addition, during such a time-saving game state without going through a jackpot, the time-saving game state without going through a jackpot may not be granted. In addition, in a configuration in which a transition to a time-saving game state is made based on the number of times the special symbol changes or a random number value for determining a jackpot symbol without going through a jackpot, a time-saving suggestion effect suggesting a transition to a time-saving game state may be performed. For example, if the number of times the special symbol changes is close to the above-mentioned predetermined upper limit, the time-saving suggestion effect may be configured to be easily executed. Conversely, if the number of times the special symbol changes is close to the above-mentioned predetermined upper limit, the time-saving suggestion effect may be configured to be difficult to execute. In addition, a time-saving suggestion effect may be performed in a start-time operation effect using the performance pattern. For example, if the performance pattern moves in a specific manner at the start of the change, it may suggest the possibility of transitioning to a time-saving game state. In addition, a time-saving suggestion effect may be performed in a change display effect using the performance pattern. In addition, a time-saving suggestion effect may be performed in a stop-time operation effect using the performance pattern.

(Configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention and its effects)
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention may have the following configuration: Note that the contents in parentheses indicate correspondence with the embodiments and are merely examples.

(Configuration 1)
The gaming machine according to configuration 1 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a first variable presentation using a first presentation pattern (presentation pattern 701) and a second variable presentation using a second presentation pattern (small pattern 702) different from the first presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, wherein the first variable presentation includes a start action presentation (floating, rotating, etc.) that causes the first presentation pattern to operate in a predetermined manner, and a variable display presentation (scroll display) that causes the first presentation pattern to be displayed in a variable manner after the start action presentation, and during the start action presentation, the second variable presentation is executed.

(Configuration 2)
The gaming machine according to configuration 2 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a first variable presentation using a first presentation pattern (presentation pattern 701) and a second variable presentation using a second presentation pattern (small pattern 702) different from the first presentation pattern, in the variable display of the identification information, wherein the first variable presentation includes a start action presentation (floating, rotating, etc.) that causes the first presentation pattern to operate in a predetermined manner, and a variable display presentation (scroll display) that causes the first presentation pattern to be displayed in a variable manner after the start action presentation, and wherein the second variable presentation executes the variable display of the second presentation pattern without causing the second presentation pattern to operate in a predetermined display manner.

(Configuration 3)
A gaming machine according to a third aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not a special game is to be executed based on the judgment information, and is capable of displaying the identification information in a variably manner and then displaying the identification information in a stationary manner after a predetermined time has elapsed based on the result of the judgment, and is capable of storing the judgment information before the judgment is made as a reserved memory in a reserved memory means, and may decrease or increase the reserved memory, and the presentation control means controls the display of the identification information to display the identification information in a manner that is suitable for the purpose of the present invention. The control means is capable of executing a changing performance using a performance pattern (performance pattern 701) in the changing display of the identification information, and the changing performance includes a start action performance (floating up, rotating, etc.) that causes the performance pattern to operate in a predetermined manner, and a changing display performance (scroll display) that causes the performance pattern to change and be displayed after the start action performance, and is capable of displaying pending information (pending icon, number pending, sub-pending display) corresponding to the pending memory, and is capable of reducing and displaying the pending information in response to the reduction of the pending memory, and after the start action performance, the pending information is displayed in a reduced manner.

(Configuration 4)
The gaming machine according to configuration 4 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not a special game is to be executed based on the judgment information, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner. The judgment information before the judgment is made is capable of being stored in a reservation storage means as a reservation memory, and the reservation memory may be decreased or increased. The presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern (presentation pattern 701) in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable presentation includes a start action presentation (floating, rotating, etc.) that causes the presentation pattern to operate in a predetermined manner, and a variable display presentation (scrolling display) that causes the presentation pattern to be displayed in a variable manner after the start action presentation. The reservation display (reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved memory can be displayed, and the reserved display can be moved in response to the reserved memory being decreased, and the moving display of the reserved display has begun during the start action presentation.

(Configuration 5)
The gaming machine of configuration 5 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information a predetermined time after the variable display of the identification information has elapsed based on the result of the judgment, and is capable of storing the judgment information before the judgment is made as a reserved memory in a reserved memory means, and may decrease or increase the reserved memory, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable presentation includes a start action presentation for operating the presentation pattern in a predetermined manner and a variable display presentation for variable display of the presentation pattern after the start action presentation, and is capable of displaying a reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory, and is capable of moving the reserved display in response to the reserved memory being decreased, and during the start action presentation, the moving display of the reserved display is terminated.

(Configuration 6)
The gaming machine according to configuration 6 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not a special game is to be executed based on the judgment information, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the identification information is variably displayed, and is capable of storing the judgment information before the judgment is made as a reserved memory in a reserved memory means, and may decrease or increase the reserved memory, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable presentation includes a start action presentation for operating the presentation pattern in a predetermined manner, and a variable display presentation for variably displaying the presentation pattern after the start action presentation, and is capable of displaying a first information display (a reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved memory, and is capable of moving and displaying the first information display as a second information display (the icon) in response to the reduction of the reserved memory, and the moving display of the first information display has begun during the start action presentation.

(Configuration 7)
The gaming machine according to configuration 7 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information was variably displayed based on the result of the judgment, and is capable of storing the judgment information before the judgment is made as a reserved memory in a reserved memory means, and may decrease or increase the reserved memory, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable presentation includes a start action presentation for operating the presentation pattern in a predetermined manner, and a variable display presentation for variably displaying the presentation pattern after the start action presentation, and is capable of displaying a first information display (a reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved memory, and is capable of moving and displaying the first information display as a second information display (the icon) in response to the reserved memory being decreased, and is capable of displaying the second information display during the start action presentation.

(Configuration 8)
The gaming machine of configuration 8 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information a predetermined time after the identification information has been displayed in a variable manner. The judgment information before the judgment is made is capable of being stored as a reserved memory in a reserved memory means, and the reserved memory may be decreased or increased. The presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable presentation includes a start action presentation for operating the presentation pattern in a predetermined manner and a variable display presentation for displaying the presentation pattern in a variable manner after the start action presentation. The hold display (hold icon) corresponding to the hold memory can be displayed, and the hold display can be operated (periodic operation) in a predetermined display manner during the start action presentation.

(Configuration 9)
The gaming machine according to configuration 9 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is variably displayed based on the result of the judgment, and is capable of storing the judgment information before the judgment is made as a reserved memory in a reserved memory means, and may decrease or increase the reserved memory, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable presentation includes a start action presentation for operating the presentation pattern in a predetermined manner, and a variable display presentation for variably displaying the presentation pattern after the start action presentation, and is capable of displaying a first information display (a reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved memory, and is capable of moving and displaying the first information display as a second information display (the icon) in response to the reserved memory being decreased, and is capable of operating (periodic operation) the second information display in a predetermined display manner during the start action presentation.

(Configuration 10)
The gaming machine of configuration 10 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not a special game is to be executed based on the judgment information, and is capable of causing a predetermined time after a variable display of identification information has elapsed based on the result of the judgment to stop the display of the identification information, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, the variable presentation including a start action presentation for moving the presentation pattern in a predetermined manner and a variable display presentation for variable displaying the presentation pattern after the start action presentation, and is capable of executing a background presentation for moving at least a part of a background image, and is capable of executing the background presentation during the start action presentation.

(Configuration 11)
The gaming machine of configuration 11 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not a special game is to be executed based on the judgment information, and is capable of causing a predetermined time period to pass after the identification information is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped displaying the identification information based on the result of the judgment, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, wherein the variable presentation includes a start action presentation for causing the presentation pattern to operate in a predetermined manner and a variable display presentation for causing the presentation pattern to variably display after the start action presentation, wherein the background presentation is capable of executing a background presentation for causing at least a part of a background image to operate, and wherein the background presentation is capable of being executed before the start action presentation is started.

(Configuration 12)
The gaming machine of configuration 12 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not a special game is to be executed based on the judgment information, and is capable of causing a predetermined time after a variable display of identification information has elapsed based on the result of the judgment to stop the display of the identification information, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, the variable presentation including a start action presentation for operating the presentation pattern in a predetermined manner, and a variable display presentation for variable displaying the presentation pattern after the start action presentation, and is capable of outputting a predetermined sound (such as background music) during the variable display of the identification information, and output of the predetermined sound is started during the start action presentation.

(Configuration 13)
The gaming machine of configuration 13 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not a special game is to be executed based on the judgment information, and based on the result of the judgment, is capable of causing the identification information to be displayed in a variable manner and then stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed after the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, the variable presentation including a start action presentation for operating the presentation pattern in a predetermined manner and a variable display presentation for displaying the presentation pattern in a variable manner after the start action presentation, and is capable of outputting a predetermined sound (such as background music) during the variable display of the identification information, and is capable of outputting the predetermined sound when executing the start action presentation.

(Configuration 14)
The gaming machine of configuration 14 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not a special game is to be executed based on the judgment information, and is capable of causing a predetermined time after a variable display of identification information has elapsed based on the result of the judgment to stop the display of the identification information, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, the variable presentation including a start action presentation for operating the presentation pattern in a predetermined manner, and a variable display presentation for variable displaying the presentation pattern after the start action presentation, a predetermined sound (such as background music) can be output during the variable display of the identification information, and the predetermined sound that has been output before the execution of the start action presentation can be continuously output during the execution of the start action presentation.

(Configuration 15)
The gaming machine according to configuration 15 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of causing a stopped display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, the presentation control means is capable of executing a first variable presentation by a first presentation pattern (presentation pattern 701) and a second variable presentation by a second presentation pattern (small pattern 702) different from the first presentation pattern, in the variable display of the identification information, a first stop display by the first presentation pattern and a second stop display by the second presentation pattern, and is capable of executing a pre-stop action presentation for operating the first presentation pattern in a predetermined manner after the first variable presentation, and is capable of executing the first stop display after the pre-stop action presentation, and executing the second variable presentation during the pre-stop action presentation.

(Configuration 16)
The gaming machine of configuration 16 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of causing a predetermined time to elapse after the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a plurality of presentation patterns (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) in the variable display of the identification information, and is capable of executing a stop display using the plurality of presentation patterns in the stopped display of the identification information, and is capable of executing a pre-stop action presentation that causes the presentation patterns to operate in a predetermined manner after the variable presentation, and is capable of executing the stop display using the plurality of presentation patterns after the pre-stop action presentation, and while a first presentation pattern (left pattern) of the plurality of presentation patterns is performing the pre-stop action presentation, there are times when a second presentation pattern (right pattern) of the plurality of presentation patterns performs the pre-stop action presentation, and times when the second presentation pattern performs a variable display.

(Configuration 17)
The gaming machine of configuration 17 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not a special game is to be executed based on the judgment information, and is capable of causing a stationary display of the identification information a predetermined time after the variable display of the identification information has elapsed based on the result of the judgment, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and is capable of executing a stationary display using the presentation pattern in the stationary display of the identification information, and is capable of executing a pre-stop action presentation for moving the presentation pattern in a predetermined manner after the variable presentation, and is capable of executing the stationary display using the presentation pattern after the pre-stop action presentation, and during the pre-stop action presentation, the identification information is displayed variable.

(Configuration 18)
The gaming machine according to configuration 18 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not a special game should be executed based on the judgment information, and is capable of causing identification information to be displayed variably and then stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed based on the result of the judgment, and is capable of storing the judgment information before the judgment is made as a reserved memory in a reserved memory means, and may decrease or increase the reserved memory, and the presentation control means controls a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information. a change performance can be executed by the display of the identification information, a stop display can be executed using the performance pattern in the stop display of the identification information, and after the change performance, a pre-stop action performance can be executed in which the performance pattern is operated in a predetermined manner, and after the pre-stop action performance, the stop display can be executed using the performance pattern, a first information display (pending icon) corresponding to the pending memory can be displayed, and in response to the pending memory being reduced, the first information display can be moved and displayed as a second information display (the icon in question), and after the pre-stop action performance, a disappearance performance can be executed in which the second information display disappears (disappearance performance of the icon in question).

(Configuration 19)
A gaming machine according to a configuration 19 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not a special game is to be executed based on the judgment information, and is capable of variably displaying identification information and then stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed based on the result of the judgment, and is capable of storing the judgment information before the judgment is made as a reserved memory in a reserved memory means, and may decrease or increase the reserved memory, and the presentation control means controls the variably display of the identification information and the presentation control means controls the display of the presentation of the presentation of the special game based on the result of the judgment. In the display, a variable performance can be executed using a performance pattern, and in the stopped display of the identification information, a stop display can be executed using the performance pattern, and after the variable performance, a pre-stop action performance can be executed in which the performance pattern is operated in a predetermined manner, and after the pre-stop action performance, the stop display can be executed using the performance pattern, a first information display (pending icon) corresponding to the pending memory can be displayed, and in response to the pending memory being reduced, the first information display can be moved and displayed as a second information display (the icon), and after the stop display using the performance pattern, the second information display disappears.

(Configuration 20)
The gaming machine according to configuration 20 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not a special game is to be executed based on the judgment information, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment, and is capable of storing the judgment information before the judgment is made as a reserved memory in a reserved memory means, and may decrease or increase the reserved memory, and the presentation control means controls a first variable presentation by a first presentation pattern (presentation pattern 701) and a presentation pattern different from the first presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information. a first stop display by the first performance pattern and a second stop display by the second performance pattern, and in the stop display of the identification information, a first stop display by the first performance pattern and a second stop display by the second performance pattern can be executed, after the first change display, a pre-stop action display can be executed in which the first performance pattern is operated in a predetermined manner, and after the pre-stop action display, the first stop display can be executed, a first information display (pending icon) corresponding to the pending memory can be displayed, and in response to the pending memory being reduced, the first information display can be moved and displayed as a second information display (the icon), and after the second stop display is executed, a disappearance effect can be executed in which the second information display disappears.

(Configuration 21)
The gaming machine according to configuration 21 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of causing a stopped display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a first variable presentation by a first presentation pattern (presentation pattern 701) and a second variable presentation by a second presentation pattern (small pattern 702) different from the first presentation pattern, in the variable display of the identification information, a first stop display by the first presentation pattern and a second stop display by the second presentation pattern, and is capable of executing a pre-stop action presentation for operating the first presentation pattern in a predetermined manner after the first variable presentation, and is capable of executing the first stop display after the pre-stop action presentation, and is capable of executing the second stop display after the second variable presentation without operating the second presentation pattern in a predetermined display manner.

(Configuration 22)
The gaming machine of configuration 22 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of causing a stationary display of the identification information a predetermined time after the variable display of the identification information has elapsed based on the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and is capable of executing a stationary display using the presentation pattern in the stationary display of the identification information, and is capable of executing a pre-stop action presentation for causing the presentation pattern to operate in a predetermined manner after the variable presentation, and is capable of executing the stationary display using the presentation pattern after the pre-stop action presentation, and is capable of executing a background presentation for causing at least a part of a background image to operate, and is capable of executing the background presentation while the stationary display using the presentation pattern is being executed.

(Configuration 23)
The gaming machine of configuration 23 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of causing a stationary display of the identification information a predetermined time after the variable display of the identification information has elapsed based on the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and executing a stationary display using the presentation pattern in the stationary display of the identification information, and is capable of executing a pre-stop action presentation for causing the presentation pattern to operate in a predetermined manner after the variable presentation, and is capable of executing the stationary display using the presentation pattern after the pre-stop action presentation, and is capable of executing a background presentation for causing at least a part of a background image to operate, and is capable of executing the background presentation during the execution of the pre-stop action presentation and the stationary display using the presentation pattern.

(Configuration 24)
The gaming machine of configuration 24 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not a special game is to be executed based on the judgment information, and is capable of causing a stationary display of the identification information a predetermined time after the variable display of the identification information has elapsed based on the result of the judgment, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and is capable of executing a stationary display using the presentation pattern in the stationary display of the identification information, and is capable of executing a pre-stop action presentation for moving the presentation pattern in a predetermined manner after the variable presentation, and is capable of executing the stationary display using the presentation pattern after the pre-stop action presentation, and is capable of outputting a predetermined sound (such as background music) during the variable display of the identification information, and is capable of continuously outputting the predetermined sound during the execution of the pre-stop action presentation and the stationary display using the presentation pattern.

(Configuration 25)
The gaming machine of configuration 25 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not a special game is to be executed based on the judgment information, and is capable of causing a predetermined time to elapse after the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and executing a stop display using the presentation pattern in the stop display of the identification information, and is capable of executing a pre-stop action presentation for moving the presentation pattern in a predetermined manner after the variable presentation, and is capable of executing the stop display using the presentation pattern after the pre-stop action presentation, and is capable of outputting a predetermined sound (BGM, etc.) during the variable display of the identification information, and is capable of adjusting the volume of the predetermined sound according to an operation on a predetermined operation unit (cross key 19) during the pre-stop action presentation.

(Configuration 26)
A gaming machine according to configuration 26 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of causing a predetermined time to elapse after causing a variable display of identification information to be displayed stationary based on the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and executing a stop display using the presentation pattern in the stop display of the identification information. It is possible, after the variation performance, a pre-stop action performance can be executed in which the performance pattern is operated in a predetermined manner, the stop display can be executed using the performance pattern after the pre-stop action performance, a predetermined sound (BGM, etc.) can be output during the variation display of the identification information, the volume of the predetermined sound can be adjusted in accordance with operation of a predetermined operation unit (cross key 19) during the pre-stop action performance, a predetermined alarm sound can be output when predetermined conditions are satisfied, and the volume of the predetermined sound can be suppressed when the predetermined alarm sound (error alarm sound) is output during the pre-stop action performance.

(Configuration 27)
The gaming machine of configuration 27 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a first variable presentation using a first presentation pattern (presentation pattern 701) and a second variable presentation using a second presentation pattern (small pattern 702) different from the first presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, wherein the first variable presentation includes a start action presentation in which the first presentation pattern is operated in any one of a plurality of manners (floating, rotating, etc.), and a variable display presentation in which the first presentation pattern is displayed in a variable manner after the start action presentation, and during the start action presentation, the second variable presentation is executed.

(Configuration 28)
The gaming machine of configuration 28 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a first variable presentation using a first presentation pattern (presentation pattern 701) and a second variable presentation using a second presentation pattern (small pattern 702) different from the first presentation pattern, in the variable display of the identification information, wherein the first variable presentation includes a start action presentation in which the first presentation pattern is operated in any one of a plurality of manners (floating, rotating, etc.), and a variable display presentation in which the first presentation pattern is displayed in a variable manner after the start action presentation, and wherein the second variable presentation executes the variable display of the second presentation pattern without operating the second presentation pattern in a predetermined display manner.

(Configuration 29)
The gaming machine according to configuration 29 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is variably displayed based on the result of the judgment, and is capable of storing the judgment information before the judgment is made as a reserved memory in a reserved memory means, and may decrease or increase the reserved memory, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable presentation includes a start action presentation for operating the presentation pattern in any one of a plurality of modes, and a variable display presentation for variably displaying the presentation pattern after the start action presentation, and is capable of displaying reserved information (a reserved icon, a number reserved, a sub reserved indicator, etc.) corresponding to the reserved memory, and is capable of decreasing and displaying the reserved information in response to the reserved memory being decreased, and after the start action presentation, the reserved information is displayed in a decreased form.

(Configuration 30)
The gaming machine of configuration 30 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information a predetermined time after the variably displayed identification information based on the result of the judgment, and is capable of storing the judgment information before the judgment is made as a reserved memory in a reserved memory means, and may decrease or increase the reserved memory, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable presentation includes a start action presentation for operating the presentation pattern in any one of a plurality of modes, and a variable display presentation for variably displaying the presentation pattern after the start action presentation, and is capable of displaying a reserved display (reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved memory, and is capable of moving the reserved display in response to the reserved memory being decreased, and the moving display of the reserved display has begun during the start action presentation.

(Configuration 31)
The gaming machine of configuration 31 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information a predetermined time after the variably displayed identification information has elapsed based on the result of the judgment, and is capable of storing the judgment information before the judgment is made as a reserved memory in a reserved memory means, and may decrease or increase the reserved memory, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable presentation includes a start action presentation for operating the presentation pattern in any one of a plurality of modes, and a variable display presentation for variably displaying the presentation pattern after the start action presentation, and is capable of displaying a reserved display (reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved memory, and is capable of moving the reserved display in response to the reserved memory being decreased, and the moving display of the reserved display is terminated during the start action presentation.

(Configuration 32)
The gaming machine of configuration 32 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information a predetermined time after the variably displayed identification information has elapsed based on the result of the judgment, the judgment information before the judgment is made is capable of being stored as a reserved memory in a reserved memory means, and the reserved memory may be decreased or increased, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, the variable presentation including a start action presentation for operating the presentation pattern in any one of a plurality of modes, and a variable display presentation for variably displaying the presentation pattern after the start action presentation, a first information display (a reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved memory may be displayed, and in response to the reduction of the reserved memory, the first information display may be moved and displayed as a second information display (the icon), and the moving display of the first information display has begun during the start action presentation.

(Configuration 33)
The gaming machine according to configuration 33 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not a special game is to be executed based on the judgment information, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed since the identification information is variably displayed based on the result of the judgment, and is capable of storing the judgment information before the judgment is made as a reserved memory in a reserved memory means, and may decrease or increase the reserved memory, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable presentation includes a start operation presentation for operating the presentation pattern in any one of a plurality of modes, and a variable display presentation for variably displaying the presentation pattern after the start operation presentation, and is capable of displaying a first information display (a reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved memory, and is capable of moving and displaying the first information display as a second information display (the icon) in response to the reserved memory being decreased, and is capable of displaying the second information display during the start operation presentation.

(Configuration 34)
The gaming machine of configuration 34 is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling a presentation based on a command from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not to execute a special game based on the judgment information, and is capable of stopping the display of the identification information a predetermined time after the identification information has been displayed in a variable manner. The judgment information before the judgment is made is capable of being stored as a reserved memory in a reserved memory means, and the reserved memory may be decreased or increased. The presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation using a presentation pattern in the variable display of the identification information, and the variable presentation includes a start action presentation in which the presentation pattern is operated in any one of a plurality of manners, and a variable display presentation in which the presentation pattern is displayed in a variable manner after the start action presentation. The hold display (hold icon) corresponding to the hold memory can be displayed, and the hold display can be operated (periodic operation) in a predetermined display manner during the start action presentation.

(Configuration 35)
A gaming machine according to configuration 35 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentations based on commands from the main control means, wherein the main control means acquires judgment information, judges whether or not a special game is to be executed based on the judgment information, and is capable of variably displaying identification information and then stopping the display of the identification information after a predetermined time has elapsed based on the result of the judgment, and is capable of storing the judgment information before the judgment is made as a reserved memory in a reserved memory means, and may decrease or increase the reserved memory, and the presentation control means is In the variable display of the identification information, a variable performance can be executed using a performance pattern, and the variable performance includes a start action performance in which the performance pattern is operated in any one of a plurality of modes, and a variable display performance in which the performance pattern is variable displayed after the start action performance, and a first information display (pending icon) corresponding to the pending memory can be displayed, and in response to a reduction in the pending memory, the first information display can be moved and displayed as a second information display (the icon), and during the start action performance, the second information display can be operated (periodic operation) in a predetermined display mode.

The configurations of the embodiments described so far, other embodiments, and their modified examples can be combined in any way as long as they are not mutually contradictory. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to the configurations of the embodiments described above, other embodiments, and their modified examples, and other modifications may be made.

1 Pachinko game machine 45 First start gate 47 Second start gate 50 First big prize gate 56 Second big prize gate 60 First special symbol display 61 Second special symbol display 62 Ordinary symbol display 63 First special symbol reserved indicator 64 Second special symbol reserved indicator 81 Sub first variable indicator 82 Sub second variable indicator 83 Sub first reserved indicator 84 Sub second reserved indicator 701 Performance symbol 702 Small symbol HA First reserved icon HB Second reserved icon TI Applicable icon SHA First number reserved SHB Second number reserved

Claims (1)

A main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance control means for controlling a performance based on a command from the main control means,
The main control means
Obtaining judgment information,
Based on the determination information, a special game determination is made as to whether or not a special game is to be executed;
The display of the symbol information can be changed based on the result of the special game determination.
As a variation display of the identification information, a cyclic variation is performed a plurality of times, and then the identification information is displayed in a stationary state;
The judgment information before the special game judgment is performed can be stored as reserved memory in a reserved memory means,
Transmitting a predetermined command according to the result of the special game determination in the variable display of the identification information;
The performance control means includes:
In the variable display of the identification information, when the predetermined command is received, a first variable performance by a first performance pattern and a second variable performance by a second performance pattern having a display position different from that of the first performance pattern can be executed;
During the variable display of the identification information, a reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory and a corresponding display corresponding to the judgment information in which the special game judgment is performed can be displayed;
In the stop display of the identification information, a first stop display for stopping and displaying the first performance pattern and a second stop display for stopping and displaying the second performance pattern can be executed;
In the first variation performance, a start action performance is executed to operate the first performance pattern in a predetermined manner, and after the start action performance, a variation display performance is executed to vary and display the first performance pattern, and after the variation display performance, a pre-stop action performance is executed to operate the first performance pattern in a specific manner, and after the pre-stop action performance, the first performance pattern can be temporarily stopped,
After the temporary stop of the first performance pattern, the first stop display and the second stop display can be executed at a timing after the end timing of the last cycle change in the change display of the identification information and before the stop time of the identification information has elapsed.
When the first stationary display is executed, the corresponding display can be made non-display for a first time period,
In the second variation performance, after the second performance pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the second stop display can be executed without temporarily stopping the second performance pattern,
A gaming machine capable of executing the start operation presentation without performing the first stop display and executing the second change presentation without performing the second stop display in response to receiving the next specified command during execution of the first change presentation and the second change presentation , and capable of hiding the corresponding display for a second time different from the first time.

Images